WF-C5790Series WF-C5710 ET-8700 WF-C5210 WF-C5290Series A

SERVICE MANUAL
Color Inkjet Printer
EPSON WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/
WF-C5710/ET-8700
WF-C5210/WF-C5290/
WF-C5290a
CONFIDENTIAL
SEMF17-010
Notice:
 All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being
informed of them.
 The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2018 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

　　　　　　　 P・CS Quality Assurance Department
Confidential
Safety Precautions
All safety procedures described here shall be strictly adhered to by all parties servicing and maintaining this product.
DANGER
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply could result in serious bodily injury or loss of life.
1. Always disconnect the product from the power source and peripheral devices when servicing the product or performing maintenance.
2. When performing works described in this manual, do not connect to a power source until instructed to do so. Connecting to a power source causes high voltage
in the power supply unit and some electronic components even if the product power switch is off. If you need to perform the work with the power cable
connected to a power source, use extreme caution to avoid electrical shock.
WARNING
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply may lead to personal injury or loss of life.
1. Always wear protective goggles for disassembly and reassembly to protect your eyes from ink in working. If any ink gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with
clean water and consult a doctor immediately.
2. When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such products containing flammable gas is
prohibited.
PRECAUTIONS
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply may lead to personal injury or damage of the product.
1. Repairs on Epson product should be performed only by an Epson certified repair technician.
2. No work should be performed on this product by persons unfamiliar with basic safety knowledge required for electrician.
3. The power rating of this product is indicated on the serial number/rating plate. Never connect this product to the power source whose voltages is different from
the rated voltage.
4. Replace malfunctioning components only with those components provided or approved by Epson; introduction of second-source ICs or other non-approved
components may damage the product and void any applicable Epson warranty.
Confidential
5. In order to protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when accessing internal components.
6. Do not tilt this product immediately after initial ink charge, especially after performing the ink charge several times. Doing so may cause ink to leak from the
product because it may take some time for the waste ink pads to completely absorb ink wasted due to the ink charge.
7. Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water immediately. If you have a skin
irritation, consult a doctor immediately.
8. When disassembling or assembling this product, make sure to wear gloves to avoid injuries from metal parts with sharp edges.
9. Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or adjusting the printer.
10. Observe the specified torque when tightening screws.
11. Be extremely careful not to scratch or contaminate the following parts.
 Nozzle plate of the print head
 Gears
 Rollers
 LCD
 Scanner Sensor
 Exterior parts
12. Never use oil or grease other than those specified in this manual. Use of different types of oil or grease may damage the component or give bad influence on the
printer function.
13. Apply the specified amount of grease described in this manual.
14. Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the printer.
15. When cleaning this product, follow the procedure described in this manual.
16. When transporting the product with ink filled in the print head, take precautionary measure against ink leak before packing the product.
17. Make sure to install antivirus software in the computers used for the service support activities.
18. Keep the virus pattern file of antivirus software up-to-date.
Confidential
About This Manual
This manual, consists of the following chapters, is intended for repair service personnel and includes information necessary for properly performing maintenance
and servicing the product.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT OUTLINE

Describes the feature of the product.
CHAPTER 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Describes the basic specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PRINCIPLES

Explains about components and operating principles of the product.
CHAPTER 4. TROUBLESHOOTING
Provides information for identifying causes of errors/problems from the symptoms or events, and the procedure for troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 5. SERVICE SUPPORT MODE

Explains about the service support mode.
CHAPTER 6. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Describes the disassembly/reassembly procedures for main parts/units of the product.
CHAPTER 7. ADJUSTMENT
Describes the required adjustments for servicing the product.
CHAPTER 8. MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Provides cautions, points to be checked and procedure for maintaining and inspecting the product.
CHAPTER 9. APPENDIX
Provides additional information for reference.
Confidential
Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action.
Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, would result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
equipment.
C H E C K May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional information
P O IN T that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components in
question may be adversely affected.
A D J U S T M E N T Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
R E Q U IR E D
Confidential
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description
A February 28, 2018 First release
Confidential
EPSON WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700/WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a Revision A
Contents
Chapter 1 Product outline 3.3.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 42
3.3.1.2 Head Angular Mecha Adjustment ...................................................... 43
1.1 Product Summary .............................................................................................. 12 3.3.2 Carriage Mechanism ................................................................................. 44
3.3.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 44
Chapter 2 Product Specifications 3.3.2.2 Shifting PG (APG Mechanism) .......................................................... 45
3.3.2.3 APG Lever actions ............................................................................. 45
2.1 Product Hardware Specifications ...................................................................... 14
3.3.2.4 PG type ............................................................................................... 46
2.2 Printing Specifications ....................................................................................... 18 3.3.3 Paper Loading/Paper Feed mechanism ..................................................... 47
2.3 Copying Specifications 3.3.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 47
(WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only) .............................................. 18 3.3.3.2 Paper Loading/Feed Path ................................................................... 48
2.4 ADF Specifications 3.3.3.3 Detail of Paper Loading/Feed Mechanism ......................................... 50
(WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only) .............................................. 19 3.3.4 Ink Supply Mechanism ............................................................................. 58
3.3.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 58
2.5 Scanner Specifications
3.3.4.2 Operating principles ........................................................................... 58
(WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only) .............................................. 20
3.3.4.3 Ink leak detection function ................................................................. 59
2.6 Options Specifications ....................................................................................... 20 3.3.5 Inksystem mechanism ............................................................................... 60
2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications ....................................................... 21 3.3.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 60
3.3.5.2 Operating principles ........................................................................... 61
Chapter 3 Configuration and operating principles 3.3.6 Scanner / ADF Mechanism ....................................................................... 67
3.3.6.1 Scanner Mechanism ........................................................................... 67
3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) ..................................................... 23
3.3.6.2 ADF Mechanism ................................................................................ 68
3.1.1 WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 ......................................... 23
3.1.2 WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a ........................................................ 29 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting
3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications ......................................... 34
3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors and solenoids) ................................................ 35 4.1 Troubleshooting Workflow ............................................................................... 71
3.2.2 Printer Main Unit (Ink detection and cover detection system sensors) ... 36 4.2 Troubleshooting procedure ................................................................................ 73
3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (Encoder sensors and PW sensor) .............................. 37 4.2.1 Normal Errors ........................................................................................... 73
3.2.4 Printer Main Unit (Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sen- 4.2.2 Fatal Errors ............................................................................................... 88
sors) ........................................................................................................... 38 4.2.3 Troubleshooting from Failure Symptom ................................................ 132
3.2.5 Options (Motor and Sensors) .................................................................... 39 4.3 Fax Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 162
3.2.6 Scanner (Motor and Sensor) ..................................................................... 40 4.3.1 Outline of the FAX Troubleshooting ...................................................... 162
3.2.7 ADF (Motor and Sensor) .......................................................................... 41 4.3.2 Reports/Logs related to FAX .................................................................. 162
3.3 Operating principles .......................................................................................... 42 4.3.2.1 FAX Communication Log ................................................................ 162
3.3.1 Printhead ................................................................................................... 42 4.3.2.2 Protocol trace .................................................................................... 164
8
Confidential
4.3.2.3 FAX Function Check Report ............................................................ 178 6.2.4.3 Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (1) ...................................................... 249
4.3.3 FAX Error Code ..................................................................................... 179 6.2.4.4 Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) ...................................................... 254
4.3.3.1 Overview .......................................................................................... 179 6.2.4.5 Ink Supply Mechanism (1) ............................................................... 263
4.3.3.2 Error code list ................................................................................... 179 6.2.4.6 Ink Supply Mechanism (2) ............................................................... 277
4.3.4 Telephone Line Check Modes Related to FAX ...................................... 182 6.2.4.7 Ink Supply Mechanism (3) ............................................................... 293
4.3.4.1 Line Measurement Mode Startup Method ........................................ 182 6.2.4.8 ADF/SCN (1) (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 only) ........................... 309
4.3.4.2 Confirmation method for each step of Line Measurement Mode .... 183 6.2.4.9 ADF/SCN (2) (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 only) ........................... 318
4.3.5 FAX Service Parameter .......................................................................... 190 6.2.4.10 Electrical Components (1) .............................................................. 328
4.3.5.1 Outline of setting change in FAX Maintenance Mode ..................... 190 6.2.4.11 Electrical Components (2) .............................................................. 345
4.3.5.2 Parameter changing procedure ......................................................... 191 6.2.4.12 Electrical Components (3) (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700) .............. 358
4.3.5.3 FAX Service Parameter Table .......................................................... 195 6.2.4.13 Electrical Components (3) (WF-C5200 Series) ............................. 368
4.3.6 Fax related user special parameters. ....................................................... 207 6.2.4.14 Inksystem ....................................................................................... 378
4.3.6.1 Emergency ejection of fax reception document (FAX to PC) ......... 207 6.2.4.15 Carriage Mechanism (1) ................................................................. 389
4.3.6.2 Emergency ejection of received fax documents (FAX to Memory) 208 6.2.4.16 Carriage Mechanism (2) ................................................................. 403
4.3.7 Fax related troubleshooting .................................................................... 210 6.2.4.17 Carriage Mechanism (3) ................................................................. 417
4.3.7.1 Fax troubleshooting basics ............................................................... 210 6.2.4.18 Paper Feed Mechanism (1) ............................................................. 439
4.3.7.2 Equipment information necessary for fax trouble report. ................ 212 6.2.4.19 Paper Feed Mechanism (2) ............................................................. 453
4.3.7.3 Troubleshooting from fax function diagnosis .................................. 213 6.2.4.20 Paper Feed Mechanism (3) ............................................................. 458
4.3.7.4 Troubleshooting from error code ..................................................... 214 6.2.4.21 Paper Feed Mechanism (4) ............................................................. 468
6.2.4.22 Printer Mechanism ......................................................................... 490
Chapter 5 Service support mode 6.2.4.23 Optional Paper Cassette Unit (1) .................................................... 526
6.2.4.24 Optional Paper Cassette Unit (2) .................................................... 534
5.1 Service Support Mode ..................................................................................... 216 6.2.4.25 Optional Paper Cassette Unit (3) .................................................... 546
5.1.1 Service mode startup ............................................................................... 216
5.1.2 Service mode menu configuration .......................................................... 218 Chapter 7 Adjustment
Chapter 6 Disassembly/assembly 7.1 Adjustment and Inspection Overview .............................................................. 552
7.1.1 Operating Environment ........................................................................... 552
6.1 Repair Work Overview ..................................................................................... 220 7.1.2 Tools and jigs ........................................................................................... 552
6.1.1 Tools ........................................................................................................ 220 7.1.3 Adjustment and Inspection List ............................................................... 553
6.1.2 Definition of Orientation of the Printer ................................................... 220
7.2 Required Adjustments ...................................................................................... 557
6.2 Disassembly/Reassembly Procedures .............................................................. 221
6.2.1 Parts/Components Location ..................................................................... 221 7.3 Adjustment and Inspection Details ................................................................... 559
6.2.2 Preparation for servicing .......................................................................... 235 7.3.1 Mechanical Adjustments and Inspections ............................................... 559
6.2.2.1 Unlocking the CR Unit ..................................................................... 235 7.3.2 Software Adjustments and Inspections .................................................... 564
6.2.2.2 Removing the Maintenance Box ...................................................... 235 7.3.2.1 Initial settings ................................................................................... 564
6.2.2.3 Removing the Ink Pack .................................................................... 236 7.3.2.2 Adjustment (Mechanical) ................................................................. 567
6.2.3 How to Read This Chapter ...................................................................... 237 7.3.2.3 Adjustment (Print Adjustment by Mechanical) ............................... 568
6.2.4 Repair Work Details ................................................................................ 239 7.3.2.4 Adjustment (Print Adjustment by Program) .................................... 572
6.2.4.1 Housing (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700) (1) ....................................... 239 7.3.2.5 Adjustment (Program) ...................................................................... 579
6.2.4.2 Housing (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700) (2) ....................................... 245
9
Confidential
Chapter 8 Maintenance/inspection
8.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................................... 583
8.1.1 Cleaning Method .................................................................................... 583
8.2 Lubrication ...................................................................................................... 587
8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions ........................................................ 588
Chapter 9 Appendix
9.1 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................... 592
9.2 Part Names Conversion Table .......................................................................... 593
9.2.1 WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 ........................................ 593
9.2.2 WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a ....................................................... 594
9.2.3 Optional Cassette Unit ............................................................................. 595
9.3 Status Sheet Information .................................................................................. 596
10
Confidential
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT OUTLINE
Confidential
1.1 Product Summary  Economy and ecology

 Low power consumption makes it an energy-saving product
The features of this product are as follows: • TEC value 0.3 kWh
 Large capacity, yet compact • Power consumption during operation
WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700: Approx. 23W
 Large capacity WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a: Approx. 21W
• Equipped with a large-capacity ink pack. This reduces the efforts  Improved transmission timing
required for managing and replacing consumables.
• Equipped with a large-capacity paper cassette. This reduces the  The large-capacity ink pack reduces the disposed amount of consumables
frequency of replenishing paper.
• A maximum of 880 pages can be fed if an Optional Cassette Unit is
attached.
 Compact
• The installation area during use has been reduced by 14% as compared to
the conventional model.
• The projection from the printer has been reduced by 85 mm as compared
to the conventional model.
 No need to wait due to high-speed processing
 First printing is fast
• Current model Monochrome: 8 sec./Color: 8 sec
→ This product Monochrome: 4.8 sec./Color: 5.3 sec (single side)
 Printing speed is fast
• Conventional model Monochrome: 20 ipm/Color: 20 ipm
→This product Monochrome: 24 ipm/Color: 24 ipm (single side)
 ADF scan is fast
• Conventional model Monochrome: 19 ipm/Color: 19 ipm WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a
→This product Monochrome: 22 ipm/Color: 22 ipm (single side) ET-8700
 High reliability reduces downtime

 Reduced risk of paper jamming
Figure 1-1. External View
• The paper feeding reliability is improved, and the risk of paper jamming
is reduced by using a Retard Roller.
 Defective pixels are not easily noticeable
• Equipped with a nozzle diagnosis system. The missing head nozzle is
detected automatically and the image quality is adjusted, which helps
secure the print quality, and prevents re-printing.
Product outline Product Summary 12

Confidential
CHAPTER
2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Confidential
2.1 Product Hardware Specifications

 Hardware specifications
Specification
Item
WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a
When the stacker is attached 425 mm (W) x 357 mm (H) x 535 mm (D) 425 mm (W) x 357 mm (H) x 535 mm (D)
Dimension (Stored)
When the stacker has been removed 425 mm (W) x 357 mm (H) x 434 mm (D) 425 mm (W) x 357 mm (H) x 434 mm (D)
When the stacker/paper support has been extended 425 mm (W) x 449 mm (H) x 578 mm (D) 425 mm (W) x 449 mm (H) x 578 mm (D)
Dimension (Printing)
When a scanner is used 425 mm (W) x 616 mm (H) x 535 mm (D) ---
Without consumables and options 18.4 kg 15.3 kg
Weight
Optional Cassette Unit 4.3 kg
Panel LCD 4.3 inch optical touch panel 2.4 inch color LCD
Power supply rating 100 to 240 VAC
Input voltage range 90 to 264 VAC
Rated current 0.9 to 0.5 A
Maximum rated current 1.1 to 0.6 A
Rated frequency range 50 - 60 Hz
Input frequency range 49.5 - 60.5 Hz
Copying Approx. 25 W Approx. 21 W
Ready mode Approx. 12 W Approx. 7 W
Power consumption
Sleep mode Approx. 1.5 W Approx. 1.2 W
Power off mode Approx. 0.2 W Approx. 0.2 W
Temperature 10 to 35 degrees C
Operating Humidity (without condensation) 20 to 80% RH
Altitude 3,000 m or lower
Environmental
Temperature Before opening: -20 to 60 degrees C, After opening: -20 to 40 degrees C
Stored Humidity 5 to 85% RH
Altitude ---
Paper cassette 1 (64gsm) 250 sheets
Paper loading capacity Paper cassette 2 (optional paper cassette unit)
500 sheets
(64gsm)
Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 14

Confidential
Specification
Item
WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a
Plain paper (A4/LTR) 100 sheets
Output tray capacity Photo paper 20 sheets
Postcard 20 sheets
XL size BK different by each country
BK ---
C different by each country
L size
M different by each country
Replacement Ink Packs Y different by each country
BK different by each country
C different by each country
Standard
M different by each country
Y different by each country
Replacement Maintenance Box T6716
Product lifetime 150,000 sheets

Confidential
 Paper handling
Paper weight
Paper
Paper types Paper sizes (grams per
source
square meter)
Plain paper Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Postcard Postcard, Postcard for inkjet printers ---
Bright White Ink Jet Paper A4 92.5 g/m2
Preprinted Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Letterhead Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Recycled Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Color Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Business plain paper Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
Thick paper 1 Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 91 to 160 g/m2
Paper Ultra Glossy Photo Paper Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 300 g/m2
cassette 1 Premium Glossy Photo Paper/
Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 16:9 wide, 4 x 7 in. 255 g/m2
Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper Letter, A4, 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 250 g/m2
Matte Paper-Heavy weight/
A4 167 g/m2
Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper/
A4 102 g/m2
Presentation Paper Matte
Photo Quality Self Post Card Postcard 175 g/m2
Photo Quality Self Adhesive
A4 167 g/m2
Sheets
Envelopes #10, DL 75 to 90 g/m2
Paper
cassette 2 Letterhead Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
(optional Recycled Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
paper cassette Color Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
unit)
Thick paper 1 Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 91 to 160 g/m2
Postcard Reply-paid card, Postcard, Postcard for inkjet printers ---

Confidential
Paper weight
Paper
Paper types Paper sizes (grams per
source
square meter)
Postcard Reply-paid card, Postcard, Postcard for inkjet printers ---
Envelopes #10, DL 75 to 90 g/m2
Photo Quality Self Post Card Postcard 175 g/m2
Photo Quality Self Adhesive
A4 167 g/m2
Sheets
Premium Glossy Photo Paper/
Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 16:9 wide, 4 x 7 in. 255 g/m2
Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper Letter, A4, 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 250 g/m2
Rear paper
feed tray Matte Paper-Heavy weight/
A4 167 g/m2
(Rear ASF Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Unit) Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper/
A4 102 g/m2
Presentation Paper Matte
Ultra Glossy Photo Paper Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in. 300 g/m2
Letterhead Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Recycled Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Color Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Thick Paper 1 Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 91 to 160 g/m2
Thick Paper 2 Legal, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2

Confidential
2.2 Printing Specifications 2.3 Copying Specifications

(WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only)
Item Specification
Print method Serial inkjet Item Specification
Paper ejection Face up Scan Flatbed 300 dpi x 600 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Paper cassette 1 Spring hopper + Retard separation method resolution ADF 300 dpi x 300 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Paper feed Paper cassette 2 Print resolutions 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 600 dpi x 1200 dpi
Hopper up + Retard separation method
method (optional paper cassette unit)
Legal, A4, Letter, B5, 8 x 10 in., A5,
Document Flatbed
Rear paper feed tray LD roller + Retard separation method 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in.
size
Print head μTFP4 ADF Legal, A4, Letter, B5, A5, A6
Number of Black 800 nozzles Number of pages that can be stored for collate
160
nozzles Color 800 nozzles for each color copy
Minimum ink droplet size 3.3 ng  Standard copy
 One-sided document --> 2-sided
Number of ink colors 4
copy (Scanner glass/ADF)
Black Pigment ink  2-sided document --> One-sided
Ink type
Color Pigment ink copy (ADF)
Black, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan  2-sided document --> 2-sided copy
Order of Ink Packs (from left to right when viewed from (ADF)
the front)  2-Up copy
Copy features
 One-sided document --> 2-sided
Number of Ink Packs 4
copy (Scanner glass/ADF)
Maintenance Box User-replaceable  2-sided document --> One-sided
Maximum print resolution 4800 x 1200 copy (ADF)
 2-sided document --> 2-sided copy
Bk 150,000 sheets (A4, 3.5%Duty)
(ADF)
Cl 150,000 sheets (A4, ISOFDC24712)
Durability  ID card copy (Scanner glass)
or five years whichever comes first  Collate copy
(excluding printhead)
Print speed One side 24 ipm / 24 ipm
(monochrome/
color) 2-sided 15 ipm / 15 ipm
Languages Japanese, English
Product Specifications Printing Specifications 18

Confidential
Item Specification 2.4 ADF Specifications

Number of copies 1 to 999 (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only)
Zoom Custom 25% to 400%
 One-sided -> One-sided Item Specification
 One-sided -> 2-sided Sensor type CIS
2-Sided
 2-sided -> One-sided
Light source LED
 2-sided -> 2-sided
Maximum optical resolutions (main scan x sub scan) 1200 dpi x 2400 dpi
Density
-4 to +4 Document setting Centering
Adjustment
Contrast -4 to +4 Document set orientation Face up
Image Auto 2-sided scanning Multi path
Color balance -4 to +4
Copy adjustment
Sharpness Yes 300 dpi color 0.5 msec/line
settings
Remove 300 dpi monochrome 0.5 msec/line
Yes Scan speed
background 600 dpi color 0.85 msec/line
 Text 600 dpi monochrome 0.85 msec/line
 Text and Image Plain paper, High-quality
Document type (Quality) Document paper type
 Ultra fine paper, Recycled paper
 Photo
A4, Letter, Legal, B5, A5,
Dry time for 2-sided copy 0 sec, 10 sec, 60 sec Size
Document paper size A6
Copy density restriction for 2- Paper weight 64 to 95 g/m2
Yes
sided copy
Sheet feeding capacity
Margin with Boarder (3mm) 50 sheets
(plain paper (hight-quality paper, recycled paper) 80 g/m2)
Preview Yes ADF durability 90,000 sheets
Product Specifications ADF Specifications (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only) 19

Confidential
2.5 Scanner Specifications 2.6 Options Specifications

Item Specification
Item Specification Including projections:
425 mm (W) x 143 mm (H) x 399 mm (D)
Scanner type Flatbed Dimension
Optional cassette Excluding projections:
Sensor type CIS 425 mm (W) x 104 mm (H) x 399 mm (D)
unit
Light source LED Weight 4.4 kg
Optical resolution 1,200 dpi Code PXA4CU3
Maximum optical resolutions 1,200 x 2,400 dpi
Maximum scan area 216 x 297 mm
Maximum document size A4, Letter
Document setting Far left corner
300 dpi color 0.85 msec/line
300 dpi monochrome 0.84 msec/line
Scan speed
Scanner durability 36,000
Product Specifications Scanner Specifications (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only) 20

Confidential
2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications  Fax specifications (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only)

Item Specification
 Network specifications
Standard analog telephone lines (PSTN), PBX (Private
Support lines
Item Specification Branch Exchange) telephone systems
 10BASE-T (IEEE802.3i) Standard: 8 pixels per mm x 3.85 lines per mm

 100BASE-TX (IEEE802.3u) Fine: 8 pixels per mm x 7.7 lines per mm
Wired Ethernet standards Monochrome
 1000BASE-T (IEEE802.3ab) Resolution Super Fine: 8 pixels per mm x 15.4 lines per mm
 IEEE802.3az (energy save type)
Ultra Fine: 16 pixels per mm x 15.4 lines per mm
 IEEE802.11b
Color 200 x 200 dpi
Wi-Fi standards  IEEE802.11g
 IEEE802.11n Speed Up to 33.6 kbps
Security protocol TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6 Encoding Monochrome MH, MR, MMR

method Color JPEG
 Infrastructure mode
Coordination modes
 Wi-Fi Direct mode (Simple AP mode) Communication mode CCITT/ITU Group 3, Super Group 3 (V34)
 WEP (64/128 bit) Document sizes Letter, A4, Legal

Wireless security  WPA2-PSK(AES)* Paper sizes to print faxes Letter, A4, Legal
 WPA-2 Enterprise Approx. 20 seconds (ITU-T standard document,
Transmission time
Frequency range 2.400 to 2.4835 GHz Monochrome Standard mode, Super Group 3)
Page memory for received faxes Up to 550 pages or 6MB
*: Conforms to the WPA2 standard, and supports the WPA/WPA2 Personal standard
Speed dial Up to 30 (/100/200) contents
Group dial 199
Product Specifications Network Specifications/Fax Specifications 21

Confidential
CHAPTER
3
CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Confidential
3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) Table 3-1. Name of Each Part
No. Name Description
3.1.1 WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 1
ADF (Automatic Document Open when removing jammed originals in the
Feeder) cover (F) ADF.
Feeds originals straight into the printer. Slide to
2 ADF edge guides
the edges of the originals.
3 ADF input tray Feeds originals automatically.
4 ADF output tray Holds originals ejected from the ADF.
Paper cassette 1 or Paper
5 Loads paper.
cassette (C1)
Optional paper cassette unit.
6 Paper cassette 2 (C2)
Loads paper.
Figure 3-1. Name of Each Part
Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 23

Confidential
Table 3-2. Name of Each Part

Feeds the paper straight into the printer.
1 Edge guides
Slide to the edges of the paper.
2 Paper support Supports loaded paper.
Prevents foreign substance from entering the
3 Feeder guard
printer. Usually keep this guard closed.
4 Rear paper feed (B) Loads paper.
5 Output tray Holds the ejected paper.
Feeds the paper straight into the printer. Slide to
6 Edge guides
the edges of the paper.
7 Paper cassette Loads paper.

Confidential

1 Document cover Blocks external light while scanning.
2 Scanner glass Place the originals.
Operates the printer.
3 Control panel
You can change the angle of the control panel.
4 External interface USB port Connects memory devices.

Confidential

Scans placed originals. Open when removing
1 Scanner unit (J)
jammed paper inside the printer.
2 Printhead Fires ink.
3 Ink supply unit tray Sets an ink supply unit.
4 Front cover (A) Open when replacing ink supply units.
5 Front cover lock Locks the front cover.

Confidential

1 LAN port Connects a LAN cable.
2 USB port Connects a USB cable.
3 LINE port Connects a phone line.
4 EXT. port Connects external phone devices.
5 AC inlet Connects the power cord.
6 Rear Cover (D) Open when removing jammed paper.
7 Rear Cover (E) Open when removing jammed paper.
8 Maintenance box cover (H) Open when replacing the maintenance box.

Confidential

No. Description
Turns the printer on or off.
1
Unplug the power cord when the power light is off.
2 Pass a smart device over this mark to print or scan from the smart device directly.
Turns on when received documents that have not yet been read, printed, or saved, are
3
stored in the printer's memory.
4 Displays the home screen.
5 Displays menus and messages.
Logs off from the printer when Access Control is enabled.
6
When Access Control is disabled, this is also disabled.
Displays the Help screen.
7
You can check solutions to problems from here.
8 Stops the current operation.
Pauses the current printing job and allows you to interrupt another job. However, you
Figure 3-6. Name of Each Part 9 cannot interrupt a new job from the computer.
Press this button again to restart a paused job.
Resets the current settings to user default settings. If user default settings have not
10
been made, resets to the factory default.
Displays the Paper Setting screen. You can select the paper size and paper type
11
settings for each paper source.
Displays the Job/Status menu. You can check the printer's status and job history.
The error light on the left flashes or turns on when an error occurs.
12
The data light on the right flashes when the printer is processing data. It turns on
when there are queued jobs.
13 Enters numbers, characters, and symbols.
14 Displays the Contacts list. You can register, edit or delete the contacts.
15 Clears number settings such as the number of copies.

Confidential
3.1.2 WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a Table 3-7. Name of Each Part

Operates the printer.
1 Control panel
You can change the angle of the control panel.
Paper cassette 1 or Paper
2 Loads paper.
cassette (C1)
Optional paper cassette unit.
3 Paper cassette 2 (C2)
Loads paper.

Confidential

1 Edge guides
2 Paper support Supports loaded paper.
Prevents foreign substance from entering the
3 Feeder guard
printer. Usually keep this guard closed.
4 Rear paper feed (B) Loads paper.
5 Output tray Holds the ejected paper.
6 Edge guides
7 Paper cassette Loads paper.

Confidential

Open when removing jammed paper inside the
1 Printer cover (J)
printer.
2 Printhead Fires ink.
3 Ink supply unit tray Sets an ink supply unit.
4 Front cover (A) Open when replacing ink supply units.
5 Front cover lock Locks the front cover.

Confidential

1 LAN port Connects a LAN cable.
2 USB port Connects a USB cable.
3 AC inlet Connects the power cord.
4 Rear Cover (D) Open when removing jammed paper.
5 Rear Cover (E) Open when removing jammed paper.
6 Maintenance box cover (H) Open when replacing the maintenance box.

Confidential

No. Description
1 Pass a smart device over this mark to print from the smart device directly.
Turns the printer on or off.
2
Unplug the power cord when the power light is off.
3 Displays the home screen.
Displays the Paper Setting screen. You can select the paper size and paper type
4
settings for each paper source.
5 Stops the current operation.
Figure 3-11. Name of Each Part 6 Applies to a variety of functions depending on the situation.
Press , ,  and  to select the items. Press OK to confirm your selection or run
7
the selected feature.
8 Returns to the previous screen.
Flashes when the printer is processing data.
9
It turns on when there are queued jobs.
10 Flashes or turns on when an error occurs.

Confidential
3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications

This section shows the positions and specifications of the motors, sensors, and
solenoids used in the product.
 Printer main unit
 Motors and solenoids (p. 35)
 Ink detection and cover detection system sensors (p. 36)
 Encoder sensors and PW sensor (p. 37)
 Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sensors (p. 38)
 Options
 Motors and sensors (p. 39)
 Scanner
 ADF
Configuration and operating principles Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 34
Confidential
3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors and solenoids)

Table 3-12. Motors and solenoids
No. Name Function Type
DC motor
1 CR Motor Used for CR operation driving.
(42VDC±5%) 1
Used for driving the feed mechanism.
 Pickup Roller DC motor A
2 ASF Motor
 Rear ASF Unit (42VDC±5%)
 Rear Unit 5
 Used for feed and delivery roller
DC motor
3 PF Motor driving.
(42VDC±5%)
 Used for driving the APG lever.
Used for supplying ink from the ink packs DC motor
4 Decompression Motor
to the buffer of the ink supply unit. (42VDC±5%)
2
Used for driving the pump of Inksystem DC motor
5 I/S Motor
Unit. (42VDC±5%)
Performs switching of the ASF motor
A Rear ASF Solenoid ---
drive transmission to the rear ASF unit.
Figure 3-12. Printer Main Unit (Motors and solenoids)
Confidential
3.2.2 Printer Main Unit (Ink detection and cover detection system sensors)
Table 3-13. Ink detection and cover detection system sensors
Transmissive 1
1 Ink End Sensor Detects the end of the ink. photo-interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Detects the installation state of the Rear Mechanical
Rear Unit Detection
2 Unit. contact 2
Sensor
(3.3VDC±5%)
9
3 Ink Pack Sensor (Bk) Used for ink pack (black) recognition. CSIC
4 Ink Pack Sensor (Y) Used for ink pack (yellow) recognition. CSIC
Detects the open/closed state of the front Mechanical
Front Cover Open
5 cover. contact
Sensor
(3.3VDC±5%)
ADF/SCN Open Sensor
(WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/
WF-C5710/ET-8700) Mechanical
Detects the open/closed state of the ADF/
6 Printer Cover Open contact
SCN unit or the printer cover.
Sensor (WF-C5210/ (3.3VDC±5%)
WF-C5290/WF-
C5290a) 1
7 Ink Pack Sensor (M) Used for ink pack (magenta) recognition. CSIC
8 Ink Pack Sensor (C) Used for ink pack (cyan) recognition. CSIC
Maintenance Box
9 Used for maintenance box recognition. CSIC
Sensor
8
3
4 7
5 6
Figure 3-13. Ink detection and cover detection system sensors
Confidential
3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (Encoder sensors and PW sensor)

Table 3-14. Encoder sensors and PW sensor
Used for CR operation control (CR scale Transmissive
1 CR Encoder reading). photo-interrupter 1
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Used for paper loading driving (ASF
2 ASF Encoder photo-interrupter 2
motor) control. 5
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Used for paper feed driving (PF motor)
3 PF Encoder photo-interrupter
control.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Used for ink eject driving (I/S motor)
4 IS Encoder photo-interrupter
control.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Used for paper leading edge and paper Reflective photo-
5 PW Sensor width detection. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
3 4
Figure 3-14. Encoder sensors and PW sensor
Confidential
3.2.4 Printer Main Unit (Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sensors)
Table 3-15. Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sensors
2 1
Transmissive
Detects the paper leading edge and paper photo- 3
1 PE Sensor
trailing edge during paper feeding. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%) 4
Transmissive
Used for paper conveyance detection photo- 7
2 Feed Sensor 5
between the pickup roller and PE sensor. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Rear ASF Paper Detection Detects whether or not there is paper inside photo-
3
Sensor the rear ASF unit. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Cassette Paper Detection Detects whether or not there is paper inside photo-
4
Sensor the paper cassette. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Mechanical
Detects the insertion state of the paper
5 Cassette Detection Sensor contact
cassette.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Detects the ink leakage inside the ink Analog sensor
6 Ink Leak Sensor
supply unit. (3.3VDC±5%)
Temperature and Humidity Measures temp/humidity to set the Analog sensor
7
Sensor appropriate drying time. (3.3VDC)
Figure 3-15. Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and other sensors
Confidential
3.2.5 Options (Motor and Sensors)

Table 3-16. Options (Motor and Sensor)
DC motor
A ASF Motor Used for driving the feed mechanism.
(42VDC±5%)
B Lift Motor
Used to raise the Paper Cassette Hop- DC motor
per. (42VDC±5%)
Mechanical 2 1
1 Cassette Detection Sensor Detects the insertion state of the paper cas- contact
sette. 3
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive 4
Cassette Paper Detection Detects whether or not there is paper inside photo-
2 5
Sensor the paper cassette. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
6
Transmissive
photo-
3 Hopper Position Sensor Detects the up/down state of the hopper.
interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Mechanical
Jam Cover Detection Detects the open/closed state of the rear
4 contact
Sensor cover. (3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive A
Used for paper conveyance detection from photo-
5 Feed Sensor
the pickup roller. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%) B
Transmissive
photo- 7
6 ASF Encoder Used for ASF motor operation control.
interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Used for detecting the phase of lift motor photo-
7 Lift Phase Sensor
driving. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Figure 3-16. Options (Motor and Sensor)
Confidential
3.2.6 Scanner (Motor and Sensor)

Table 3-17. Scanner (Motor and Sensor)
DC motor
A SCN Motor Used for driving the scanner carriage.
(42VDC±5%)
1 CIS Module Used to read the document on the scanner CIS imaging
glass. sensor
Transmissive
photo-
2 SCN Encoder Used for scanner motor operation control.
interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
1
Figure 3-17. Scanner (Motor and Sensor)
Confidential
3.2.7 ADF (Motor and Sensor)

Table 3-18. ADF (Motor and Sensor)
Used for driving the document feed mecha- DC motor
A ADF Motor
nism. (42VDC±5%)
B ADF Solenoid Performs switching of the drive transmis- ---

sion to the pickup roller.
Transmissive
Used for controlling operation of the ADF photo-
1 ADF Encoder
motor. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive B
Detects whether or not there is a document photo-
2 ADF PE Sensor
in the paper feed path. interrupter 1
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmissive
Detects whether or not a document is photo-
3 ADF DOC Sensor
placed on the ADF document support. interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
3
2
Figure 3-18. ADF (Motor and Sensor)
Confidential
3.3 Operating principles The nozzle arrangement of the TFP4 head mounted on this printer differs from that of
the traditional printers. The nozzles of the same color are not arranged next to each
other.
3.3.1 Printhead The nozzle layout as seen from behind the Printhead is shown below.
3.3.1.1 Overview
Row B Row D Row F Row H
WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700/WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a (Cyan) (Bk) (Magenta) (Yellow)
employs the TFP4 head.
Row A Row C Row E Row G
The TFP4 head features dense nozzle pitches (600 dpi); denser than the traditional (Yellow) (Magenta) (Bk) (Cyan)
heads. In addition, the number of nozzles per row is also greater with the row length of
1.33 inches.
These features contribute to higher image quality and faster printing by increasing both
Paper feed direction

the quantity and the density of ink droplets per shot.
The following table lists the Printhead specifications.
Table 3-19. Nozzle Configuration
Printhead type TFP4
Black (B: 2 row), Cyan (C: 2 row)

Color
Magenta (M: 2 row), Yellow (Y: 2 row)
Number of nozzles 3200 nozzles (400 nozzles per row)

Nozzle pitch 0.042 mm (1/600 inch)
Full digit side Carriage movement direction 0 digit side
Figure 3-20. Nozzle layout

This product uses off-carriage type ink supply mechanism. Therefore, the Printhead is
equipped with self-sealing valves1 so that the amount of ink fired from the Printhead is
not affected by variation in pressure inside the ink path caused by movements of the
carriage or ink supply operations.
Figure 3-19. Printhead Appearance
1. This valve opens only when the pressure of the output side drops below a specified value. Because of this
characteristic of the valve, pressure variation in the input side does not affect the output side.
Configuration and operating principles Operating principles 42

Confidential
3.3.1.2 Head Angular Mecha Adjustment Row A Row H Row A Row H

This section explains the head angular mecha adjustment for adjusting the inclination Misalignment of
of the Printhead on the CR Unit physically. the nozzle
locations
Overview
The nozzle arrangement of the μTFP4 head mounted on this printer differs from that
of the traditional printers. The nozzles of the same color are not arranged next to
each other. Therefore, the influence of the posture (inclination) of the Printhead of
this printer on the print quality is greater than that of the traditional printers' Print-
heads.
The inclination of the Printhead of the traditional printers is corrected with software
(the adjustment program).1 However, the inclination of the Printhead of this printer
is corrected mechanically by adjusting the head angular adjustment dial mounted on
the carriage mechanism based on the result of visual check of the adjustment pattern No inclination Inclined
printed with the adjustment program.
Figure 3-21. Definition of the inclination of the Printhead
In this adjustment, the inclination of the Printhead is defined as the amount of mis-
alignment of the nozzles on row H and the center points of the spaces between the
nozzles on row A shown in Figure 3-21. The purpose of the adjustment is to elimi-
nate the misalignment (the inclination of the Printhead) completely.
+ direction - direction
Range of adjustment
By rotating the head angular adjustment dial, the Printhead is rotated on the pivot
point on the bottom. The relationship between the rotational direction of the Head
Angular Adjustment Dial and that of the Printhead is as follows.
Table 3-20. Rotational direction of Head Angular Adjustment Dial and that of Printhead Head Angular Adjustment Dial
Rotational direction of Head Angular
+ direction - direction
Adjustment Dial
Rotational direction of Printhead CCW CW CR Unit
Printhead
The resolution performance of the Head Angular Adjustment Dial is approximately
12m, and adjustable up to ± 144m Figure 3-22. Head angular mecha adjustment
1. For the correction of the inclination of the Printhead of the traditional printers is made using software with the
calculation result of the amount of the inclination of the Printhead based on the result of visual check of the
adjustment pattern. For the band feeding used in the draft mode, the head angular adjustment using software;
different from the mechanical inclination correction explained here, is used.

Confidential
3.3.2 Carriage Mechanism Cross-section Main Frame

CR Unit backside
CR Encoder
3.3.2.1 Overview Sensor
The carriage mechanism of this product consists of the CR Unit, CR Encoder Sensor,
CR Scale, CR Motor, CR Timing Belt, and etc. The Carriage Mechanism is a key
mechanism to ensure stable print quality because printing is performed by moving the
CR Unit from side to side.
As shown on the right, the CR Unit is placed on the CR Guide Frame being the
upperside of the assy held by the Main Frame. The CR Unit is attached to the CR
Timing Belt that is moved by the CR Motor so that the unit can move from side to side APG Cam
to print. The position and speed of the CR Unit are always monitored by the CR
Encoder Sensor and CR Scale, and the CR Motor is controlled in accordance with the APG Slider CR Guide Frame CR Unit
information acquired by the CR Encoder Sensor.
The APG Mechanism adjusts the distance between the printhead nozzle and the paper
CR Motor
(PG: Platen Gap) as suitable, depending on the paper to be printed. (behind the Main Frame)
The APG Mechanism of this product is equipped with an APG Cam placed between Main Frame
the CR Unit and CR Guide Frame, and simply changes PG1 just by the movements of
the APG Trigger Lever and CR Unit.
CR Unit
CR Scale
CR Guide Frame
APG Trigger Lever
1. A gap between the printhead surface and the paper surface. To ensure print quality, the two surfaces must be parallel,
and adequate control over the amount of ink fired from the printhead and the carriage movements is required based Figure 3-23. Carriage Mechanism / APG Mechanism
on the PG appropriate to paper type.

Confidential
3.3.2.2 Shifting PG (APG Mechanism) 3.3.2.3 APG Lever actions

This product's APG Mechanism shifts PG with the APG Cam mounted on the Carriage. The PF Motor drives the Planet Gear, operating the APG Lever, and this sets or resets
APG Cam is located between the CR Guide Frame and the Carriage, and has a stepped the APG Lever.
cam face. With the APG Lever applied, if the Carriage moves toward the APG Lever,
the lever pushes the APG Cam, and the cam face of the APG Cam in contact with the APG Lever is set APG Lever is reset
APG Slider is shifted. This action shifts PG.
PG: wide Carriage
Tip of APG Lever APG Cam
CR Guide Frame
APG Slider
Platen (Paper Guide Front) When PF Motor rotates CCW, APG
Printhead PG When PF Motor rotates CW, APG
Lever is set. Lever is reset.
PG: narrow Together with the Carriage APG Lever

movement, the APG Lever
pushes the APG Cam, and PG
is shifted.
Planet Gear
PF Roller
CR Guide Frame
PG
PF Gear
Figure 3-24. APG Cam and APG Lever (Simplified Image)
PF Motor
Figure 3-25. APG Lever

Confidential
3.3.2.4 PG type
This product has four types of PGs. The following describes the details of PGs. Each PG is determined by up to where the Carriage moves with reference to the APG Lever. PG set
once is held until the next PG shift sequence.
289.627 271.07 243.332

Distance from
0-digit (mm) APG shift standby APG reset complete APG reset standby
position position position
APG Cam
PG 4
PG 3
PG 1
PG 2
Carriage PG 1 PG 4
APG shift start position PG 3
operation PG 2 Cam face
position and 10.553 17.949
PG (mm)
APG shift area PG 4
PG 3
PG 4 set position
PG 2
PG 1
PG 3 set position
PG 2 set position
PG 1 set position
80-digit 0-digit
PG (mm) 1.55 1.85 2.35 3.0

PG Position PG1 PG2 PG3 PG4
Printing plain paper (Single) Printing plain To avoid Envelope
(Standard), Photo paper paper (Fine), rubbing (Uni-d)
Post card, (Uni-d)
Application Photo matte
paper, Duplex
printing, or to
avoid rubbing

Confidential
3.3.3 Paper Loading/Paper Feed mechanism

LD Roller
3.3.3.1 Overview
Middle Roller
The components of the paper loading mechanism and the loading method are
as follows.
Pickup Roller
Mechanism Power source and control Function
 Power source  Drives the Pickup Roller, loading PF Roller
Standard
 ASF Motor paper from the Standard Cassette.
Cassette
 Control  Paper loaded from the Cassette is
(Paper ASF Encoder
 ASF Encoder/ fed to the PF Roller using the EJ Roller
Cassette1)
ASF Scale Middle roller of the Rear unit.
 Power source  ASF Motor (Optional Cassette) ASF Motor

 ASF Motor  Drives the Pickup Roller, loading
(optional cassette) paper from the Optional Cassette.
 Lift Motor  Drives the Vertical Feed Roller,
Front feeding the paper to the Middle
 ASF Motor
paper Roller of the Rear Unit.
 Control
loading Optional PF Encoder PF Motor
 ASF Encoder/  Lift Motor
Cassette ASF Scale  Drives the lift-up mechanism, Paper Cassette 1
(Paper (optional cassette) raising the paper set on the
Cassette2)  Lift Phase Sensor Optional Cassette up to the Vertical Feed Roller
 ASF Encoder/ paper pick-up position.
Pickup Roller
ASF Scale  ASF Motor
 Paper loaded from the optional ASF Encoder
(Optional Cassette)
cassette is fed to the PF Roller
using the Middle Roller of the
Rear Unit.
 Power source
 ASF Motor Drives the LD Roller and Hopper of
Rear paper loading  Control the Rear ASF Unit, loading paper
 ASF Encoder/ from the Rear ASF Unit.
ASF Scale
ASF Motor
 Power source (Optional cassette)
 PF Motor
Drives the PF Roller/EJ Roller, Lift Motor
Paper feed  Control loading and outputting paper. Paper Cassette 2
 PF Encoder/
Lift Phase Sensor
PF Scale
Figure 3-26. Paper Loading/Paper Feed mechanism

Confidential
3.3.3.2 Paper Loading/Feed Path

Hopper
FEEDING FROM THE PAPER CASSETTE 1
1. When you set Paper Cassette 1 in the printer, the Cassette Hopper is lifted
up by the pickup mechanism provided in Paper Cassette 1. The paper set in 1
paper cassette 1 is lifted up by the Cassette Hopper, and comes in contact
LD Roller
with the Pickup Roller.
2. The ASF Motor is driven, and the Pickup Roller conveys paper to the Retard
Separation Roller. The paper conveyed to the Separation Roller is Roller
separated from the second paper by the Separation Roller and Retard Printehead PE Sensor 2
Middle Roller
Roller, and is conveyed to the Middle Roller after passing through the
position where paper is detected by the Feed Sensor. 5 3
3. The paper conveyed to the Middle Roller is conveyed by the Middle Roller 2
up to the position where paper is detected by the PE Sensor. 4 PF Roller
EJ Roller Feed
1 Sensor
4. When the PE Sensor detects the paper, skew removal is performed in
accordance with the printing conditions. After the completion of skew Separation
removal, the paper is conveyed to the printing start position by the PF Roller
Roller, and printing starts. Pick-up Retard Roller

Cassette Hopper
Roller
5. After the completion of printing, the paper is extracted by the PF Roller Paper Cassette 1
and EJ Roller.
FEEDING FROM THE REAR ASF UNIT
1. When printing is performed from the rear paper feed device, the drive
transmission of the ASF Motor is switched by the Rear ASF Solenoid, and
the LD Roller rotates by the ASF Motor.
2. The paper set in the Hopper is conveyed to the Middle roller by the hopper-
Feeding path from the Paper Cassette 1
up action of the Hopper + LD Roller.
Feeding path from the Rear ASF Unit
3. The paper conveyed to the Middle Roller is conveyed by the Middle Roller
to the position where paper is detected by the PE Sensor, and printing is
performed in the same way as the Front Cassette. Figure 3-27. Paper loading/feed path (1)

Confidential
FEEDING FROM OPTIONAL CASSETTE (PAPER CASSETTE 2)
1. The drive of the Lift Motor is transferred to the optional hopper-up

mechanism parts, which lifts up the Optional Cassette Hopper, and the
paper set in Paper Cassette 2 comes in contact with the Optional Pickup
Roller.
2. The ASF Motor is driven, and the Optional Pickup Roller conveys paper to
the Optional Separation Roller. The paper conveyed to the Optional
Separation Roller is separated from the second paper by the Optional Middle Roller
Separation Roller and Optional Retard Roller, and is conveyed to the Printhead PE Sensor
Vertical Feed Roller.
3. The paper conveyed to the Vertical Feed Roller is passed through the 4
Optional Feed Sensor by the Vertical Feed Roller, and is conveyed up to Feed
Sensor
the position where it is detected by the Feed Sensor of the printer.
EJ Roller PF Roller
4. When the Feed Sensor detects a paper, the ASF Motor is driven, the paper
is conveyed by the Middle Roller up to the position where it is detected by 3
the PE Sensor, and printing is performed in the same way as the front Optional Feed Sensor
cassette paper feeding. Vertical Feed Roller
Optional Separation Roller

FEEDING PATH DURING THE AUTOMATIC DUPLEX PRINTING
Optional Pick-up Roller
When automatic duplex printing is performed, an automatic judgment function 2
for the drying time of the printed surface after surface printing is provided in 1
order to avoid friction of the printed surface. If drying is determined to be
necessary after surface printing, two-stage printed surface drying wait is
performed at two locations, namely on the Stacker (when the paper is held by
the PF Roller and the Driven Roller) and inside the Rear Unit (when the Middle Optional Cassette hopper Optional Retard Roller
Roller has held the end of the paper).
Paper cassette 2
Feeding path from the Paper Cassette 2
In this product, the temperature and humidity of the operating environment is
Automatic Duplex Printing feeding path
detected by loading a Temperature and Humidity Sensor, and the throughput is
improved by setting an appropriate drying time in accordance with the
operating environment.
Figure 3-28. Paper loading/feed path (2)

Confidential
3.3.3.3 Detail of Paper Loading/Feed Mechanism

Release rib Hopper Lock Hopper Stopper Cassette Hopper
PRINTER MAIN UNIT
Lift-up mechanism
This mechanism lifts up the paper set in the paper cassette up to the paper
pickup position by the pickup mechanism.
Release Rib on Frame of main unit
The lift-up mechanism operates the Cassette Hopper by the force of the spring
provided inside the Paper Cassette.
When the Paper Cassette has been removed from the printer, the Cassette
Hopper is locked by the Hopper Lock present in the center part and the Hopper
Stopper on the left and right sides.
When you set the Paper Cassette in the printer, the Hopper Lock and Hopper
Stopper of the Paper Cassette come in contact with the Release Rib, and the
lock is released. The released Cassette Hopper rises due to the tension of the
spring.
Release Rib Hopper Lock
Hopper Stopper
Cassette Hopper
Hopper Stopper
Spring
Paper Cassette 1
Figure 3-29. Lift-up mechanism

Confidential
Front Feeding Mechanism

Separation Roller
The front feeding mechanism is composed of the Pick-up mechanism and the Pickup Roller
intermediate feeding mechanism. One Way Clutch
 Pick-up mechanism
Pickup Drive Shaft B
This mechanism picks up paper from the Cassette Assy and feeds it up to the
intermediate feeding mechanism. The retard separation method is used for
paper separation.
The ASF Motor drives the pick-up mechanism. The pickup roller and
separation roller uses a oneway clutch to always rotate in a set direction (paper Spur Gear 16.8
One Way Clutch
feed direction) only. When the ASF Motor rotates the opposite direction of
paper feeding, the drive force is cut off by the One Way Clutch, so neither the
Pick-up Roller nor Separation Roller rotates. Spur Gear 15
ASF Motor Compound Gear A
Compound Gear A
Compound Gear B Pickup Drive Shaft A
Pickup Drive Shaft A

Compound Gear B
Spur Gear16.8
ASF Motor
Spur Gear 15
Figure 3-30. Drive path
Spur Gear 16.8
Spur Gear 15
Pickup Drive Shaft B
One Way Clutch
Pickup Roller/Separation Roller

Confidential
 Intermediate feeding mechanism

This mechanism feeds the paper fed from the Cassette Assy to the paper feed Duplex Gear Compound Gear 35.5, 26.4
Middle Roller
mechanism.
Planet Gear
The intermediate feeding mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor.
The Middle Roller always rotates in a set direction (paper feed direction)
because of the Planet Gear, regardless of the ASF motor rotational direction.
ASF Motor Planet Gear

Compound
Gear C
Compound Gear A Pinion Gear of

ASF Motor Compound Gear A
Compound Gear C
Planet Gear Middle Roller
Planet Gear
Planet Gear
Duplex Gear
Compound Gear
35.5, 26.4
Compound Gear 35.5, 26.4
Duplex Gear
Planet Gear
Middle Roller
Planet Gear
ASF Motor
Compound Gear C
Compound Gear A

Confidential
Rear Feeding Mechanism

 Overview
This mechanism feeds the paper set on the Hopper to the intermediate feeding
mechanism. The retard separation method is used for paper separation.
The rear feeding mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor.
Since the ASF Motor drives the pick-up mechanism and intermediate feeding
mechanism, the ASF Clutch Gear and Rear ASF Solenoid Assy turn the drive
force ON/OFF so that the LD Roller rotates during the rear feed only.
ASF Motor
Compound Gear A
Rear ASF
Compound Gear C Solenoid
Planet Gear LD Roller

Planet Gear Spur Gear
Planet Gear
Compound Gear D
Compound Gear ASF Clutch Gear Compound Gear 35.5, 26.4

35.5, 26.4
Planet Gear
Compound Gear D
Planet Gear
Spur Gear
ASF Motor
Spur Gear Compound Gear C
Compound Gear A
Rear ASF Solenoid/ASF Clutch Gear operation
LD Roller

Confidential
 Operation of the rear feeding mechanism When the LD Roller rotates once, the Change Lever engages with the
 Drive force control by the ASF Clutch Gear and Rear ASF Solenoid Assy hook on the ASF Clutch Gear and the roller is locked. Then, the ASF
The Rear ASF Solenoid Assy controls the operation of the Change Motor's drive force to the LD Roller is cut off and the rear feed process
Lever by electrifying the Solenoid.1 The relationship of the electrifying is complete.2
status of the Solenoid and the status of the Change Lever is as follow.
Sideview of rear feeding
Table 3-21. Electrifying status of the Solenoid and the operation of the Change Lever mechanism: Locked ASF Clutch Gear
(When solenoid is not electrified)
Electrifying status of the Solenoid Electrified Not electrified Hook
Solenoid
Change lever Unlocked Locked
When the Change Lever engages with (or locks) the hook on the ASF
Clutch Gear, the clutch of ASF Clutch Gear is cut off and the ASF Change Lever
Motor's drive force is not transmitted to the LD Roller.
When the Change Lever releases (unlocks for driving the rear feeding) Sideview of rear feeding
mechanism: Unlocked
the hook on the ASF Clutch Gear, the clutch of ASF Clutch Gear (When solenoid is electrified)
engages and the ASF Motor's drive force is transmitted to the LD Roller.
 When performing the rear feed The lock of the
Change Lever is
When the printer starts performing the rear feed, the Solenoid of the disengaged
Rear ASF Solenoid Assy is electrified and the Change Lever is moved
down to unlock the hook. Then the clutch of the ASF Clutch Gear
engages and the drive force of the ASF Motor is transmitted to the LD
Roller. After the lock is released, the ASF Motor drives the ASF Sideview of rear feeding mechanism:
Clutch Gear and LD Roller to move the hook on the ASF Clutch Gear When rear feed is driven
away from the lock position. (When solenoid is not electrified)
Therefore, when electrifying the Solenoid is stopped and the Change
Lever is back to the original position, the hook on the ASF Clutch Gear
is positioned lower than the Change Lever due to the rotation of the LD
Roller and not going to be locked again.
After electrifying the Solenoid is stopped, the ASF Motor rotates
clockwise further and the LD Roller rotates in the paper feed direction.
Figure 3-33. Operation of the rear feeding mechanism
A sheet of paper set on the Hopper is separated by the LD Roller and
Retard Roller and fed to the intermediate feeding mechanism.
2. The LD Roller is D-shaped. This shape allows the LD Roller and Retard Roller to release the paper when the
paper reaches the intermediate feeding mechanism so as not to affect the paper feeding process of the
1. Equipped with a pull type Solenoid in which the magnetic body id pulled by the electromagnetic force. intermediate feeding mechanism.

Confidential
Paper Feed Mechanism

This mechanism feeds the paper fed from the intermediate feeding mechanism
and ejects it.
The paper feed mechanism is driven by the PF Motor's drive force. The drive
force of the PF Motor is transmitted by the PF Timing Belt to the PF Roller and
EJ roller to perform paper feeding before/after printing.
PF Motor
PF Roller
PF Timing Belt
Spur Gear 49.32
Spur Gear 28.8 PF Roller Spur Gear

28.8
Spur Gear 49.32
EJ Roller
Spur Gear 21.1
PF Motor
EJ Roller
PF Timing Belt Spur Gear 21.1

Confidential
OPTIONAL CASSETTE UNIT
Lift-up mechanism (Optional cassette)

This mechanism lifts the paper loaded on the Paper Cassette 2 up to the paper
pickup position. This mechanism is driven by the drive force of the Lift Motor. Spur Gear 55.2
Compound Gear C
The Lift Motor's drive force is transmitted via the Lift-up Gear Group to this
mechanism and rotates the Lift-up shaft. Lift Motor
Compound
Gear A
Lift Motor
Hopper
Spur Gear 30
Compound Gear A
Compound Gear B
Compound Gear B
Lift Up Sector Gear 40T

Compound Gear C
Spur Gear 55.2
Spur Gear 30
Spur Gear 30
Lift-up mechanism
Optional Cassette
(Paper Cassette 2)

Confidential
ASF Mechanism (Optional cassette)

This mechanism picks up paper from the Optional Cassette, and conveys it up to
the intermediate feeding mechanism of the printer, and the same retard separation
method as that for the Paper Cassette of the printer is adopted.
The ASF mechanism is configured by the pickup mechanism and the intermediate Vertical Feed Roller
feeding mechanism, and operates by the driving force of the ASF Motor.
 Pick-up mechanism
On the shafts of the Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller, the One Way Clutch is
mounted to always rotate in a set direction (paper feed direction) only. When the Spur Gear 22
ASF Motor rotates the opposite direction of paper feeding, the drive force is cut off
Spur Gear 63
by the One Way Clutch, so neither the Pick-up Roller nor Separation Roller rotates.
 Intermediate feeding mechanism
ASF Motor
A One Way Clutch Gear is provided in the middle of the drive path in the
intermediate feeding mechanism, and the Vertical Feed Roller rotates in only
one fixed direction (paper feed direction). (If it is not in the paper feed
direction, it performs idling and no rotation.)
Spur Gear Pick-up Drive Shaft
ASF Motor
Pick-up Roller/
Spur Gear 23 Separation Roller
Compound Gear A Compound Gear B
Compound
Gear A One Way
Clutch Gear
One Way Clutch Gear Spur Gear
Compound
Gear B
Spur Gear 23 Pick-up Drive Shaft One Way Clutch
Spur Gear 63 One Way Clutch

Retard Roller
Spur Gear 22
Pick-up Roller/ Separation

Vertical Feed Roller Roller Figure 3-36. Drive path

Confidential
3.3.4 Ink Supply Mechanism Ink path simplified Decompression

Ventilation Valve
model Motor
3.3.4.1 Overview
The ink supply mechanism consists of the Ink Supply Unit that is composed of Air chamber Buffer
the Ink Supply Tube, Diaphragm Pump ,Buffer, and Decompression Motor, Spring Diaphragm (rubber film)
and ink is supplied from the ink pack installed in the lower part of the product. Ink Pack
Spring
According to the quantity of ink discharged from the Print Head, ink is sucked
from the ink packs by the Decompress Pump Unit, Diaphragm Pump and
Buffer. Check Valve Check Valve Film Choke
Ink Chamber Diaphragm Pump Valve
The ink path from the Buffer through the ink tube to the selfsealing valve in the
Printhead is always kept pressurized even after the power is turned off by the
Self-sealing Valve (in Printhead)
check valves and the Diaphragm Pump. Therefore, ink can be supplied stably
during high-volume printing. Printhead Ink Tube
3.3.4.2 Operating principles Diaphragm Buffer Printhead

Pump
Ink supply becomes ready by installing the ink pack into the Ink Pack Unit in Ink Tube
the lower part of the product.

The Ink Pack Unit also mounts the CR Contact Module to detect the remaining
ink amount in the ink pack.
The diaphragm is operated when the Decompress Pump Unit reduces the
pressure inside the Diaphragm Pump, and it sucks ink from the ink packs Ink is
supplied through the Buffer and ink tube to the Print Head.
The Decompress Pumps and Diaphragm Pumps supply sufficient ink needed
for the quantity of the Prinhead's ink discharge in high speed printing with high
image quality.
Decompression Motor Ink Pack
Figure 3-37. Ink supply mechanism

Confidential
3.3.4.3 Ink leak detection function

A sensor for detecting an ink leak is provided in this product in order to enable
the quick detection of an ink leak when an ink leak occurs from the ink supply
path due to an abnormality in the product.
The Ink Leak Sensor is provided inside the Ink Pack Unit, and detects an ink
leak by the adherence of ink on it (Porous Pad Cap Lower) when an ink leak Ink Leak Sensor
occurs. It also generates an ink leak error in the printer.
Ink Leak Sensor
Absorber
Figure 3-38. Ink leak sensor

Confidential
3.3.5 Inksystem mechanism

3.3.5.1 Overview
The inksystem mechanism of this product is composed of the Inksystem assy, Maintenance Box
and Maintenance Box.
The ink sucked by the Cap mechanism and Pump mechanism from the
Printhead is drained via the Waste Ink Tube and into the Waste Ink Pad in the
Maintenance Box.
The amount of waste ink is controlled by the counter in the firmware taking the
amount of evaporation into account so as not to let the ink leak out of the
printer because the waste ink exceeds the limit of the storage capacity.
Further, this product uses a mechanism by which the user him/herself can
replace the Maintenance Box.
Inksystem Assy
Figure 3-39. Ink system mechanism

Confidential
3.3.5.2 Operating principles Venting valve Cap Carriage lock lever
Wiper
OVERVIEW
Pump motor
The inksystem mechanism of this product employs the direct acting type1 and
consists of the carriage lock mechanism, wiper mechanism, capping
mechanism, pump mechanism, and venting valve (valve mechanism).
All the mechanisms are driven by the pump motor. The drive force of the pump
motor is transmitted to each mechanism via transmission parts, such as the
pump-drive compound gear, clutch gear, intermittent gear, cam, and drive
lever.
Additionally, this product utilize a maintenance box (waste ink pad) that retains
waste ink from the cap, with which users can replace ink themselves.
Carriage lock mechanism

Printhead
Pump unit Pump-drive compound gear Pump encoder sensor
Valve mechanism
Figure 3-41. Inksystem Mechanism
Cap mechanism
DRIVE PATH
The ink system mechanism is driven by the Pump Motor. The relationship
Pump mechanism
between the Pump Motor rotational direction and operation of each part is as
follows.
Wiper mechanism
Table 3-22. Pump motor rotational direction and operation of the inksystem
Rotational direction of the Pump Motor a
Mechanism
Waste ink tray CW CCW
(waste ink pad)
Wiper Wiping position Passing
Cap Drop Rise (capping)
Figure 3-40. Inksystem Mechanism (Simplified Model) Pump Release Suction
CR Lock Drop (CR Lock release) Rise (CR Lock set)
1. There are two types of the capping: direct acting type and sliding type. In the direct acting type, the cap moves up and Venting Valve Open Close
down independently of the carriage and caps the printhead. In the sliding type, the printhead is capped (the cap is
moved up) when the carriage pushes the cap slider. a. Rotational direction seen from output shaft

Confidential
Driving path is as follow.

Pump Motor
Symbol Parts name Symbol Parts name
Combination Gear A
A Combination Gear A G Intermittent Gear 1
B Combination Gear B H Combination Gear B
Intermittent Gear 2
(with Pump Encoder Scale)
Spur Gear
C Spur Gear I Wiper/cap-drive Cam
D Pump Drive Combination J Pump Drive
Wiper Gear 1 Combination Gear C
Gear Combination Gear
E Combination Gear C K Wiper Gear 2 Clutch
Pump (p 63)
F Clutch L Wiper Gear 3
Intermittent Gear 1
Intermittent Gear 1
Pump Motor F
G G Wiper/cap-drive
H Cam
I
A Cap (p 64) CR Lock Lever Valve (p 66) Wiper Gear 1
(p 65)
Wiper Gear 2
E
B
Drive Drive Wiper Gear 3
disengaged
C
D Wiper (p 65)
Figure 3-43. Inksystem Mechanism Drive Path (2)

L
The Clutch, Intermittent Gear 1, Intermittent Gear 2, and Wiper/cap-drive Cam
move linked to the rotation of Combination Gear C, but if the Wiper moves to
K
J the wiping position, the Intermittent Gear 2 teeth surface separate, and the
Combination Gear C drive is disengaged. At these times, the Wiper, Cap,
E Valve, and CR Lock Lever will not operate even if the Pump Motor is rotating.
If the Pump Motor rotates in the opposite direction, then the Intermittent Gear 2
and Combination Gear C will again mesh, operating each part.
Figure 3-42. Inksystem Mechanism Drive Path (1) This prevents mechanisms except the pump mechanism from driving while the
Pump Motor rotates continuously to drive the pump mechanism.

Confidential
OPERATION OF EACH MECHANISM
Pump Mechanism
Pump Frame
The pump mechanism sucks ink from the printhead at cleaning.
The drive force from the Pump-drive Compound Gear is transmitted to the Pump Tube
pump shaft via the Timing Plate. This Timing Plate allows the Pump-drive
Compound Gear to start rotating at the different timing from the Pump Shaft. Pump Cam
After the PF Motor rotates for a while, the Pump Unit starts its operation. Pump Pulley
When the Pump Motor rotates counter-clock wise as seen from the output-shaft
Pump Shaft
side of the motor, the drive force via the Pump-drive Compound Gear rotates
the Pump Pulley to flatten the tube to suck the air (to generate negative Pump Spacer
pressure) inside the tube.
When the Pump Motor rotates clock wise, the Pump Pulley does not flatten the
tube, and the negative pressure is released.
Furthermore, this products incorporate two pumps, with improved suction
performance.
Pump Shaft
Pump motor counter-clock wise Pump motor clock wise
rotation (suction) rotation (release) Pump Frame
Rotates flattening Pump-drive
the tube. Pump Tube Compound Gear
Pump Spring (x2)
Pump Pulley Pump Cam
Rotates without Timing Plate

flattening the
tube.
Figure 3-44. Pump Mechanism (1)

Figure 3-45. Structure of the Pump Unit

Confidential
Cap Mechanism The cam surface (in red) of the

wiper/cap-drive cam raises and
The direct acting type is employed in the capping mechanism, where the Cap is lowers the cap drive lever.
Cap
moved up and down by the Pump Motor and the printhead is capped at the
suction for cleaning.
Intermittent Gear 2 rotates on drive power from the Pump Motor, and the cam
surface on the Intermittent Gear 2 pushes the Cap, moving it forward. At this time,
the cap tab contacts the printhead surface, guiding the Printhead on the Cap.
Next, the Wiper/cap-drive Cam moves the Cap Drive Lever, raising the Cap, Wiper/cap-drive
capping the Printhead. Cam
Printhead Printhead Cap Drive Lever

Cap
Cap
Figure 3-47. Cap Mechanism (2)
Wiper/cap-drive
Intermittent Cam
Gear (2)
Cap Drive Lever
Tab
Figure 3-46. Cap Mechanism (1)

Confidential
CR Lock Mechanism Wiper Mechanism

The tension of the compression spring at the bottom of the CR Lock moves up The rotation of the Wiper/cap-drive Cam drives the wiper mechanism. After
the CR Lock. When the CR Lock Drive Lever pushes the CR Lock downward, release, if the Wiper Cam rotates, the drive is conveyed to Wiper Gears 1, 2,
the CR Lock is released. and 3, and the Wiper moves along the CR unit path.
Since the CR Lock Drive Lever moves up and down together with the Cap Printhead
Passing status
Drive Lever, the CR Lock also operates together with the movement of the
Cap. This means that the printhead nozzle surface is always capped when the Wiper/cap-drive
Wiper
Cam
CR Lock is set.
Lever down Printhead

(Unlock)
CR lock
Wiper/cap-drive
Cam Wiper Gear 1 Wiper Gear 3
Compression Spring
Wiper Gear 2
Cap Drive Lever
CR Lock Drive Lever

Wiping
Back
Lever up
(Lock)
Figure 3-49. Wiper Mechanism

Figure 3-48. CR Lock Mechanism

Confidential
Venting Valve
Before capping, the Valve Lever interferes with the Link Lever, therefore the
Wiper/cap-drive Cam
Venting Valve opens. (side of 0-digit side)
During the capping sequence, the Valve Lever shaft moves along the Wiper/ The rotation of the Wiper/cap-
drive Cam moves the salient of
cap-drive Cam Slot, and the Valve Lever drops backwards. When this happens, the Wiper Drive Lever along
the cam surface of the Wiper/
the Valve Lever and Link Lever interference is removed, and the return force cap-drive Cam (red part) to
move the valve open and close.
of the Compression Spring makes this slide to the 80-digit side, closing the
Venting Valve.
Compression Spring
Link Lever
Pump Tube (to Cap)
Shaft
Valve Lever
Wiper/cap-drive
Cam
Valve: Open (vented) Valve: Closed
Figure 3-50. Venting Valve

Confidential
3.3.6 Scanner / ADF Mechanism

3.3.6.1 Scanner Mechanism
The scanner mechanism consists of a CIS Module that scans documents and SCN Unit
SCN Motor that drives the Scanner Carriage.

The drive of the SCN Motor is transmitted to the Scanner Carriage by the
Scanner Timing Belt, which moves the CIS Module, and scans the draft.
Additionally, the CIS Module incorporates a Digital Translation Module. This CIS Module
converts read data to a digital signal and sends it to the Main Board, thus
shortening data transfer time.
SCN Motor
Bottom
Digital
Translation
Module
Figure 3-51. Scanner Mechanism

Confidential
3.3.6.2 ADF Mechanism

s
The ADF mechanism of this product uses a stationary image sensor that scans
documents transported by the mechanism. It consists of ADF motor, ADF
Encoder, ADF PE Sensor, ADF Doc Sensor, PF Roller, EJ Roller, Pickup
Roller and etc. ADF DOC Sensor Pickup Roller Separation Roller ADF PE Sensor
Lever Lever
The mechanism is also capable of turning over the documents when finished
scanning their one side, and then scanning the other side (automatic double-
sided scanning).
ADF Unit
Solenoid
For reverse
ADF Encoder side scanning
Pickup Roller EJ Roller CIS Module

PF Roller
Lock Lever
Figure 3-53. Document Feed Path
ADF Motor ADF Doc Sensor
EJ Roller
ADF PE Sensor
PF Roller
Figure 3-52. ADF Mechanism

Confidential
To prevent the next document from being fed while the previous document is The drive path from the ADF Motor to the Pickup Assy Drive Gear is as
being reversed inside the ADF, the drive of the Pickup Assy drive gear is shut follows.
off by the Planet Gear and Solenoid so that the Pickup Assy does not move If the Solenoid is energized, then the Plunger pushes up the protruding lever.
until the reverse operation is finished. The drive from the ADF Motor is conveyed through the Spur Gear 28.9 to the
In addition to that, the Pickup Assy includes a Cam and Clutch inside it to connected Planet Gear Holder, and the Planet Gear Holder rotates clockwise.
enable its upward/downward movements and switching of Pickup Roller As a result, the drive from the Planet Gear is conveyed to the LD Gear, rotating
rotation according to the rotational direction of the Pickup Assy Drive Gear. the Pickup Assy Drive Gear.
If the Solenoid is no longer energized, then the Plunger will retract, with the
Pickup Roller lever returning the Planet Gear Holder to its original location, disconnecting
the Planet Gear drive.
Pickup Assy Drive

Planger
Gear
Solenoid Lever Pickup Assy Drive
Gear
Solenoid
Planet Gear Separation Roller LD Gear
Cam / Clutch
ADF Motor
Planet Gear Holder
Figure 3-54. Pickup Roller / Separation Roller Planet Gear

Spur Gear 28.9
ADF Motor
Figure 3-55. Drive Path to the Pickup Assy Drive Gear

Confidential
CHAPTER
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Confidential
4.1 Troubleshooting Workflow C H E C K This flowchart is compiled based on the following contents.
P O IN T  Our experience regarding the quality problem.
The workflow for troubleshooting is described below.
 Printer Mechanism specification for the product.
START
Is there no problem No  See 4.2.3 Troubleshooting from Failure

Turn on the printer. printing results? Symptom (P. 132).
Yes
Does printer turn on the No

 See 4.2.3 Troubleshooting from Failure
power? Printer failure only
Symptom (P. 132).
What is returned reason? Finish
Yes
ADF/SCN unit
 When a message is displayed failure
Is Power-on sequence No
See 4.2.1 Normal Errors (P. 73).
Copy an image
finished without error?  When an error code is displayed
See 4.2.2 Fatal Errors (P. 88).
Yes
No  When an error code is displayed
Is printing operation
finished without error? See 4.2.2 Fatal Errors (P. 88).
Standby condition
Yes
Print check pattern
Is there no problem No
 See ADF/scanner trouble (P. 154).
printing results?
 When a message is displayed
Has the printing finished No See 4.2.1 Normal Errors (P. 73).
without displaying an
 When an error code is displayed Yes
error or a message?
See 4.2.2 Fatal Errors (P. 88).
A p. 72
Figure 4-1. Troubleshooting Workflow (1)
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Workflow 71

Confidential
A p. 71
No
ADF failure?
Yes
Copy an image by ADF
 When a message is displayed

See ADF/SCN section in 4.2.1 Normal
Has the printing finished
No Errors (P. 73).
without displaying an
error or a message?  When an error code is displayed
See ADF/SCN section in 4.2.2 Fatal Errors
(P. 88).
Yes
Is there no problem No  4.2.3 Troubleshooting from Failure

printing results? Symptom (P. 132)
See ADF/scanner trouble (P. 154).
Yes
Finish
Figure 4-2. Troubleshooting Workflow (2)
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Workflow 72

Confidential
4.2 Troubleshooting procedure

4.2.1 Normal Errors
Table 4-1. Normal errors
Category Error name Error details Error solution
Printer Printer fatal error Notifies that since an error has occurred in the printer mechanism, the Restart the printer.
power must be turned on again. (See 4.2.2 Fatal Errors (P. 88).)
Paper jam error Notifies that since an error has occurred due to paper jam in the printer Remove the jammed paper. The recovery process is
mechanism, the paper must be removed. performed when either the cover is closed or the cassette
is inserted in accordance with the jammed location.
Left outside CAP error Notifies that since there is a possibility that the nozzle may be clogged, Press the Release key.
it is recommended to attempt nozzle check printing.
CR protective material removal Notifies a message indicating that removal of the CR protective Remove the cause of jamming. The recovery process
forgotten error material or protective tape was forgotten, and that it must be removed. is performed when the cover is closed.
No paper error Notifies that since there is no paper, the paper must be set before  If there is no paper, set a paper, and press the Start key.
starting printing.  Set the paper, and either wait for a fixed period of
time, or press the Error cancellation key.
 Set the paper in the target paper feeder.
Double feeding error Notifies that since multiple sheets of paper were fed at the same time, Reset the paper and press the Error cancellation key.
the paper must be reset before starting printing.
Automatic duplex paper size mismatch Notifies that because of failed printing due to a different paper length at Reset the paper and press the Error cancellation key.
error the time of automatic duplex/FAX printing, paper of appropriate size
must be set.
Scanner cover open error Notifies that the scanner unit must be closed. Close the ADF/SCN Unit.
Front cover open error Notifies that the Front Cover must be closed. Close the Front Cover.
Rear cover open error Notifies that the Rear Cover must be closed. Close the Rear Cover.
Rear cover open error Notifies that the Rear Cover of the Optional Cassette must be closed. Close the Rear Cover of the Optional Cassette.
(Optional cassette)
Ink case open error Notifies that the ink case must be closed. Close the ink case.
Memory full error Notifies that due to insufficient memory during processing, some pages Press the Error cancellation key.
could not be printed during the course of printing.
Memory insufficient error Notifies that due to insufficient memory during processing, pages were Reduce the amount of memory used for print page data
ejected during the course of printing, and could not be printed. by, for example, splitting up the print pages.
Duplex printing not possible error Notifies that duplex printing is not possible, and that printing is started Press the Error cancellation key.
on one side.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting procedure 73

Confidential

Printer Memory insufficient error (number of Notifies that due to insufficient printer memory, not all set number of  Check the job and memory capacity.
print copies) pages could be printed, and that only some pages were printed.  Reduce the amount of memory used for print page
Memory insufficient error (resolution Notifies that due to insufficient printer memory, printing could not be data by, for example, splitting up the print pages.
reduction) performed at the set resolution, and that printing was performed by
reducing the resolution.
Memory insufficient error (reverse Notifies that due to insufficient printer memory, not all set jobs could be
printing) saved, and that only some jobs were printed in normal sequence.
Printing disabled data error Notifies that the data could not be printed as it was invalid print data. Press the Error cancellation key.
Paper size mismatch error Notifies that the paper size of the feeder and the paper size in the print 1. When printing is performed based on the feeder
settings is different. settings of the printer
Set the paper according to the feeder settings, and
Paper type mismatch error Notifies that the paper type of the feeder and the paper type in the print then select “Yes”.
settings is different. 2. When printing is performed based on the print
settings specified in the driver
Select “No”, set the paper according to the specified
print settings, and then press the Cancel button.
Paper size and type mismatch error Notifies that the paper size/type of the feeder and the paper size/type in
the print settings is different. 3. Press the Cancel button to cancel printing, and then Exit.
Maintenance box full error Notifies that since the permissible capacity of the Maintenance Box has Replace the Maintenance Box, close the Maintenance
reached the limit, the Maintenance Box must be replaced. Box Cover, and then press the Error cancellation key.
No maintenance box error Notifies that the Maintenance Box must be installed.
Maintenance box recognition error Notifies that the Maintenance Box is not recognized.
Remaining amount of maintenance box Notifies that the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Box necessary 1. Press the Error cancellation key.
insufficient error for performing forced cleaning is insufficient. 2. Replace the Maintenance Box and close the
Maintenance Box Cover.
Initial waste liquid end Notifies that since the Maintenance Box has exceeded the limit value, Replace the Maintenance Box with new one.
the Maintenance Box must be replaced.
Post-reset waste liquid end Notifies that since the Maintenance Box has exceeded the limit value, 1. Press the Error cancellation key.
the Maintenance Box must be replaced. 2. Perform the operation according to the instructions
displayed on the LCD.
Initial waste liquid near-end Notifies that since the Maintenance Box is reaching the limit value, the 1. Press the Error cancellation key.
Maintenance Box must be replaced. 2. Prepare a Maintenance Box.
Post-reset waste liquid near-end Notifies that since the Maintenance Box is reaching the limit value, the 1. Press the Error cancellation key.
Maintenance Box must be replaced. 2. Prepare a Maintenance Box.
Ink not attached error Notifies that since the ink pack is not installed, it must be installed. Install the correct ink pack.

Confidential

Printer Ink recognition error Notifies that since the ink pack cannot be recognized, the ink must be  Install the correct ink pack.
reset.  Remove and then insert the ink pack.
Remaining amount of ink for initial Notifies that the ink pack for setup must be installed. Install the ink pack for setup.
filling insufficient warning error
Ink recognition error (non-genuine) Notifies that since the ink pack cannot be recognized, the ink pack must Install the correct ink pack.
be replaced.
Ink end error Notifies that since no amount of ink is remaining, the ink pack must be Replace with the correct ink pack.
replaced.
Ink low Error before the ink end error (Notice). “!!” is displayed on the Press the Error cancellation key.
operation panel.
Remaining amount of ink insufficient Notifies that the remaining capacity of ink necessary for performing 1. Press the Error cancellation key.
error cleaning is insufficient. 2. Install a new ink pack.
Cleaning disabled error Notifies that since there is no remaining amount of ink, cleaning cannot Either replace the ink pack, or select “No” (Replace
be performed and the ink pack must be replaced. later) when “Do you want to replace now” is
displayed.
Error for initial filling I/C Notifies that the ink pack for initial filling cannot be used. Install an ink pack for other than the one for initial
filling.
3rd party ink provision Notifies that the ink pack is not genuine.  In the “Do you want to continue usage?” dialog box,
(when the power is switched on or select “No”, and install the genuine ink pack.
when ink is replaced)  In the “Do you want to continue usage?” dialog box,
select “Yes”.
Driver mismatch error Notifies that an error has occurred. 1. Press the Error cancellation key.
2. Perform re-installation.
Not feeding error (Paper jam) Notifies that paper feeding from the cassette has undergone load Take out the cassette and reset the paper. Make sure
shifting and thus failed. there is no paper in the path, and then insert the
cassette.
Optional cassette excess connection Notifies that more than the supported number of optional cassettes have Turn off the power, connect the appropriate number of
error been connected. The user is asked to turn off the power and change the optional cassettes, and then turn on the power again.
number of connected optional cassettes to a number within the support (Visually check to ensure that there aren’t two or more
range. levels.)
Optional cassette failure error When the cassette breaks down during the lift-up operation of paper due  Take out the cassette and reset the paper.
to cassette installation, and the operation cannot be performed properly.  Take out and then insert the Optional Cassette
Connector.
 Turn the main power supply off and then on again.
 Check the lift gear.

Confidential

Scanner Scanner fatal error Notifies that since an error has occurred in the scanner mechanism, the  Turn on the power again.
power must be turned on again.  Follow the procedure for the SCN fatal error.
(See 4.2.2 Fatal Errors (P. 88) ADF/SCN (error
code: 100001~))
ADF fatal error Notifies that since an error has occurred in the ADF mechanism, the  Turn on the power again.
power must be turned on again.  Follow the procedure for the ADF fatal error.
(See 4.2.2 Fatal Errors (P. 88) ADF/SCN (error
code: 100001~))
ADF paper jam  Notifies that since an error has occurred due to paper jam in the ADF  Remove the jammed paper and press the Error
mechanism, the paper must be removed. cancellation key.
 If during duplex ADF scan specification, and the paper is of a size for  Press the Error cancellation key.
which duplex printing cannot be performed, the paper is ejected, and (See 4.2.2 Fatal Errors (P. 88) ADF/SCN (error
a jam error is displayed. code: 100001~))
External device Unsupported device connection error Notifies that the inserted device cannot be used. The error is removed after a fixed period of time
connection No response device error elapses, or when the Cancel button is pressed.
Scan to Memory Device not inserted The user is asked to insert the storage media. Insert the storage media.
Device Insufficient capacity Notifies that the upper limit of the storage media capacity has been  Increase the storage space in the memory device.
reached.  Reduce the number of documents.
 Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
compression ratio to reduce the size of the scanned
image.
Write protection Notifies that the storage media is write protected. Disable write protection on the memory device.
Folder creation Notifies that the folder could not be created in the storage media. Insert another memory device.
Card removal Notifies that the storage media has been removed. Reinsert the memory device.
Insufficient memory Notifies that the execution memory is insufficient, and asks the user to Wait until other ongoing jobs are finished.
check jobs that are running simultaneously.
Reading from the PC Notifies that the storage media is being accessed from the computer. Wait for a while and then try again.
Other Notifies that some error has occurred during storage. Since an unexpected error has occurred, request the
division for analysis.
Addition limit exceeded Notifies that the number of drafts that can be read has reached the upper Send or save the scanned file, and scan the remaining
limit. drafts as another job.

Confidential

Scan to Email Address not entered The user is asked to enter the destination. Enter the destination.
DNS error The user is asked to check the DNS setting.  Check the DNS settings of the printer.
 Check the DNS server settings.
 Check if the host name specified in the address book
is matching.
 Re-run after setting the server to the normal state
from the sleep or dormant state.
Authentication error The user is asked to check the authentication settings and account  Check the authentication method.
settings.  Check the SMTP server address and port.
 Check the POP3 server address and port.
 Check the account name.
 Check the password.
Communication error The user is asked to check the network connection.  Check the SMTP server address and port.
 Check the network setting related items.
IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
→ Perform email server connection diagnosis
(Scan to Email function only)
 Check that the network cable is physically
connected.
 Check whether or not the address is correct.
 Check the access point settings.
 Check the firewall settings.
 Check the server (possibility of server being down).
Single Size exceeded Notifies that the upper limit of the size has been reached. Increase the Attached File Max Size setting in the scan
settings.
Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
image.
Multiple Size exceeded Notifies that the upper limit of the size has been reached. Also, it is Increase the Attached File Max Size setting in the scan
displayed that either transmission of the part that has not reached the settings.
upper limit, or cancellation of the job can be selected. Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
image.

Confidential

Scan to Email Insufficient memory Notifies that the execution memory is insufficient, and asks the user to Wait until other ongoing jobs are finished.
check jobs that are running simultaneously.
Email server not set Notifies that mail server settings have not been performed. Perform mail server settings.
No connection to email server Notifies that connection with the mail server has not been checked. Establish a connection to the mail server.
Scan to Network Missing input items The user is asked to enter the missing items. Set the storage destination.
Folder Scanning disabled Notifies that only monochrome start is enabled for TIFF (multi). Either run in monochrome, or select TIFF (single).
(TIFF (Multi)/Color)
DNS error The user is asked to check the DNS setting.  Check the DNS settings of the printer.
 When the destination host name is invalid (such as when the host  Check the DNS server settings.
name is not registered in the DNS server, etc.)  Check if the host name specified in the address book
 The server is in either the sleep mode or dormant state (network is matching.
communication cannot be performed)  Re-run after setting the server to the normal state
from the sleep or dormant state.
Authentication error The user is asked to check the storage destination, user name, and Set the following storage destination settings
password settings. correctly:
Communication mode, folder path, user name,
password, port number
Communication error The user is asked to check the network connection.  Set the following storage destination settings
correctly:
Communication mode, folder path, connection
mode, port number
 Make sure the network cable is physically
connected.
File name duplicated The user is asked to change the file name. Delete the file with the same name, or change the file
name prefix in File Settings.

Confidential

Scan to Network Single Size exceeded Notifies that the upper limit of the storage destination capacity has been Secure enough storage area in the storage destination.
Folder reached. Alternatively, set the resolution and compression rate
to a lower value so that the size of the scan data
reduces.
Multiple Size exceeded Notifies that the upper limit of the storage destination capacity has been Secure enough storage area in the storage destination.
reached. Alternatively, either reduce the number of drafts, or set
Display the number of pages that were successfully saved. the resolution and compression rate to a lower value so
that the size of the scan data reduces.
Insufficient memory Notifies that the execution memory is insufficient, and asks the user to Wait for the simultaneously running jobs to complete,
check jobs that are running simultaneously. and then try again.
Invalid destination The user is asked to check the storage destination, user name, and Set the following storage destination settings
Scan to Cloud NW rebooting Notifies that a re-connection to the network is in progress. Wait for a while and then try again.
Communication error The user is asked to check the network connection.  Check the removal and connection of LAN.
 If the address settings are different, change them.
 In the case of a specific PC, check the security
settings, etc.
 If the error occurs from multiple PCs, check the
server, hub, and router.
Not logged in Notifies that communication with the server has failed. Wait for a while and then try again.
Check the network connection.
Service not registered Notifies that the printer is not registered in the Epson Connect service. Register the printer in the Epson Connect service.
Service stopped Notifies that the Epson Connect service is set to Pause. Enable the service in the Epson Connect settings in
Setup.
Destination not registered Notifies that the destination has not been registered. Register the destination in Epson Connect service.
Destination not selected The user is asked to select the destination. Set the destination.
Size exceeded Notifies that the size that can be sent to the server has been exceeded. Reduce the number of drafts and then try again.
Invalid destination Notifies that the selected destination has been changed on the server. Re-select the destination.
Other (sending error) Notifies that some error has occurred. Resend.

Confidential

Scan to Computer NW rebooting Notifies that a re-connection to the network is in progress. Wait for a while and then try again.
PC not selected The user is asked to select the destination. Set the destination.
PC in use Notifies that the destination computer is in use. Make sure the destination computer is not
communicating with another printer.
Communication error The user is asked to check the connection with the computer.  Check the removal and connection of LAN.
settings, etc.
 If the error occurs from multiple PCs, check the
server, hub, and router.
Scan to Document NW rebooting Notifies that a re-connection to the network is in progress. Wait for a while and then try again.
capture Pro No applicable PC Notifies that the PC supporting Document Capture Pro was not found. Make sure a connection has been established to the PC
supporting Document Capture Pro.
Destination not selected The user is asked to select the computer and job. Set the computer and job.
PC in use Notifies that the destination PC is in use. Make sure the destination computer is not
communicating with another printer.
Communication error The user is asked to check the connection with the PC.  Check the removal and connection of LAN.
settings, etc.
DCP mode mismatch Notifies that the settings of Document Capture Pro have been changed. Check the Document Capture Pro settings.

Confidential

Scan NW rebooting Notifies that a re-connection to the network is in progress. Wait for a while and then try again.
(Scan to DCP No answer error Notifies that there has been no response from the server. Make sure a connection has been established to the
server) server supporting Document Capture Pro Server.
Job not selected The user is asked to select a job. Set the job.
Server in use Notifies that access to the server is concentrated. Wait for a while and then try again.
Communication error The user is asked to connect to the server.  Check the removal and connection of LAN.
settings, etc.
Server not set Notifies that the server has not been set. Perform server settings in Document Capture Pro
settings.
No job error Notifies that the job has not been registered. Register the job in Document Capture Pro Server.
DCP mode mismatch Notifies that the settings of Document Capture Pro have been changed. Check the Document Capture Pro settings.
Network setting in progress error Notifies that the network settings are being updated. Wait for a while and then try again.
Scan NW rebooting Notifies that a re-connection to the network is in progress. Wait for a while and then try again.
(Scan to WSD) No applicable PC Notifies that the computer supporting WSD was not found. Make sure a connection has been established to the
computer supporting WSD.
Communication error The user is asked to check the connection with the computer.  Check the removal and connection of LAN.
settings, etc.
Setup Date input error Enter the correct value. Enter the correct date.
[Invalid date setting]
Time input error Enter the correct value. Enter the correct time.
[Invalid time setting]
Invalid settings Enter the correct value. Enter the correct setting value.
Internal memory data deletion selection Do you want to delete the downloaded font and macro?
---
Font and macro deletion
Internal memory data deletion selection Do you want to delete the entire print data saved in the internal
Full format memory? ---
The downloaded font and macro will also be deleted.
Initialization selection to return to Do you want to initialize the FAX settings?
initial settings ---
FAX settings

Confidential

Setup Initialization selection to return to Do you want to initialize the copy settings?
Copy settings
Initialization selection to return to Do you want to initialize the scan settings?
Scan settings
Network setting in progress error The settings are being updated.
(Return the network settings to initial Please wait for some time. ---
settings)
Initialization selection to return to Do you want to initialize the network settings?
Network settings
Initialization selection to return to All settings will be initialized. This may take some time. Do you want
initial settings to perform initialization? ---
All settings
External memory External memory recognition not Notifies that the inserted external memory cannot be recognized. Take out the external memory.
possible
Simultaneous operation execution error Notifies that since another function is running, the requested external Make sure the running function has ended, and then
memory print function cannot be executed. try again.
Copy Memory full error Notifies that since the memory was full, the copying process was Erase the memory. Ask the customer to delete
suspended. unnecessary files.
FAX Send memory storage error Notifies that the memory is insufficient during fax transmission before  Check the % display of the Fax Top screen, and if
the start of transmission. the % display is not “0”, print the cumulative
[Supplement] document list, and check the documents
If an attempt is made to send documents exceeding 100 pages per accumulated in the memory.
document, the transmission is complete at the 100th page, and the drafts  If unnecessary documents are remaining, delete
thereafter remain in ADF. (One-time transmission page specification = them to create space in the memory.
Max. 100 pages)  If the capacity of the drafts to be sent is large,
separate and transmit the drafts, or specify direct
transmission and send them without accumulating
in the memory.

Confidential

FAX Receive memory storage error Notifies that the memory is insufficient at the time of fax reception Check the % display of the Fax Top screen.
during communication. If the % display is not “0”, print the cumulative
document list, and check the documents accumulated
in the memory. If unnecessary documents are
remaining, delete them to create space in the memory.
If the transmission side is known, contact it and ask to
separate and send the drafts to be sent.
[Supplement]
If the remaining amount of FAX memory becomes
less during reception, then in order to avoid the
insufficient memory error, printing is started before
the reception of all pages even if “Print Start Setting =
After receiving all pages”. Therefore, even if Normal
Sequence Output = ON, stacking is performed in the
reverse order.
Communication error Notifies that FAX communication has failed during communication. Wait for a while and then try again.
Sending incomplete (no dial tone) Before communication start - Connection - Transmission  Try again after checking the telephone line.
Notifies that FAX transmission is not possible, and also notifies the  Press the [On-hook] button, or attach an external
cause. telephone, and make sure the dial tone is heard
clearly and transmission is possible.
 Perform line recording and make sure the dial tone
is of the specified value. If the dial tone is not of the
specified value, adjust it in the CE mode.
Sending incomplete (busy) Before communication start - Connection - Transmission  Try again after checking the telephone line.
Notifies that FAX transmission is not possible, and also notifies the  Press the [On-hook] button, or attach an external
cause. telephone, and make sure the dial tone is heard
 Perform line recording and make sure the dial tone
is of the specified value. If the dial tone is not of the
specified value, adjust it in the CE mode.
Send incomplete (no response) Before communication start - Connection - Transmission  Wait for a while and then try again.
 Press the [On-hook] button, or attach an external
telephone, and make sure the dial tone is heard
 Make sure that when the ring tone is heard, a
connection is established to the other party, and the
FAX signal is returned.

Confidential

FAX Sending incomplete Before communication start - Connection - Transmission  Establish the correct connection between “LINE”
(reverse insertion) and “EXT”.
 Press the [On-hook] button, or attach an external
Sending incomplete Before communication start - Connection - Transmission  Connect to the telephone line.
(no connection)  Press the [On-hook] button, or attach an external
Broadcast error Indicates that during broadcast (transmission to multiple destinations), Check the FAX report, and retry transmission to the
the transmission to some destination failed. failed destination.
DNS error (email) The user is asked to check the DNS setting.  Check the DNS settings of the printer.
DNS error (folder)  Check the DNS server settings.
Authentication error (email) The user is asked to check the authentication settings and account  Check the authentication method.
settings.  Check the SMTP server address and port.
 Check the account name.
 Check the password.
Authentication error (folder) The user is asked to check the storage destination, user name, and Set the following storage destination settings
Communication error (email) The user is asked to check the network connection.  Check the SMTP server address and port.
connected.
 Make sure the address is correct.

Confidential

FAX Communication error (folder) The user is asked to check the network connection.  Check the folder path.
connected.
 Check the network settings.
IP address, subnet mask, default gateway
 Make sure the file with the same name in the storage
destination has not been placed in an open state.
 Make sure the file with the same name in the storage
destination is not write protected.
Destination invalid error (folder) The user is asked to check the storage destination, user name, and Set the following storage destination settings
Save destination space insufficient Notifies that no free space is available in the storage destination because Provide free space at the storage destination.
error (folder) of which writing could not be performed.
No received data Notifies that re-printing could not be performed. ---
Destination not input The input of the FAX number is requested. Enter the correct FAX number.
Preview not possible Notifies that the transmission preview is not possible.  Disable the direct transmission.
 Change the color mode to Monochrome.
Color transmission not possible for Notifies that polling transmission is possible only in monochrome. Select Monochrome.
polling transmission
Color not possible when pending Notifies that accumulation of pending documents is possible only in Select Monochrome.
document storage monochrome.
Color transmission to multiple Multiple destinations were specified, color mode was set to Color, and If colored transmission is to be performed, transmit to
destinations not possible the Start key was pressed. one destination at a time.
Select Monochrome if you want to perform broadcast.
Color transmission not possible when The color mode was set to Color when the ECM settings were disabled, To perform color transmission, enable the ECM
ECM off and the Start key was pressed. settings.
If ECM settings cannot be changed, select
Monochrome.
Duplex direct transmission not possible Notifies that duplex reading and direct transmission cannot coexist. Disable either setting.
Invalid input value Notifies that the input value is incorrect. Re-enter the correct setting value.
No FAX log Notifies that there is no communication management data. ---

Confidential

FAX Cannot add destination Notifies that a destination cannot be added. The number of destinations must be less than the
number of destinations that can be set.
Different input number Notifies that during the confirmation input of the destination number, Re-enter the correct destination number.
the entered number is different from the first time.
Hook operation disabled Notifies that currently on-hook dialing is not possible. Wait for the line to be free.
Dial buffer full Notifies that since the dial buffer of the on-hook dial is full, the input Wait for the entered dial data to be processed so that
cannot be received. space can be created in the buffer.
Off-hook fax use prohibited TBD TBD
Transmission not possible error Notifies that FAX transmission is not possible. Wait for a while and then try again.
Starting fax printing not possible Notifies that since another printing is in progress, the printing requested Wait for a while and then try again.
by the user cannot be performed.
Paper size mismatch error Notifies that the correct size of the paper has not been set. Set the paper of the correct size and start printing.
No ADF draft Notifies that there is no draft in ADF. Set a draft in ADF.
Reception box password mismatch The reception box password is different. Re-enter the correct reception box password.
PC-FAX reception check Notifies that the PC-FAX reception can be enabled only from the PC. Enable the PC-FAX reception by using the FAX
Utility of the PC.
Media error Notifies that the media for reception fax storage has been removed. Insert the media and try again.
Notifies that the media for reception fax storage does not have any free Use a media with free space.
space.
Notifies that the media is write protected. Cancel the write protection.
Notifies that writing has failed.  Insert the media again.
 In “Create Dedicated Storage Folder”, insert a
separate media in which a folder has been created.
Incorrect printing stop specified time Notifies that a different time must be specified in the Stop Time and Specify a different time in Start Time and Resume
Resume Time of Print Stop Time. Time.
No external call number Notifies that an external call number has not been entered. Enter an external call number.
Reception box password character Notifies that the reception box password has not been entered. Enter a password having one or more characters.
count error
New reception box password mismatch Notifies that a different reception box password has been entered. Re-enter the correct password.
Fax function in use Notifies that since the fax function is in use, fax-related settings cannot Wait for a while and then try again.
be made.
PC in use Notifies that since the fax settings are being changed from the PC, fax- Wait for a while and then try again.
related settings cannot be made.

Confidential

FAX Other function being executed Notifies that since another function is running, the requested fax Wait for a while and then try again.
function cannot be executed.
Email server not set Notifies that mail server settings have not been performed. Perform mail server settings.
No connection to email server Notifies that connection with the mail server has not been checked. Establish a connection to the mail server.
Security usage Printing restrictions Notifies that the user does not have the PC printing authority, and Assign the PC printing authority to the target user
restrictions therefore, printing could not be performed. under Web Config, Net Config.
Authentication error Notifies that user authentication has failed. 1. Make sure the user name and password are correct.
2. Make the setting for allowing execution of a job
without authentication information to “Allow”.
Security password Loss of stored job due to power off. Notifies that due to power off, the password printing job lined up in the Resend the same printing job.
printer was erased.
Common Job cancellation due to power outage --- ---
System error Notifies that the power must be turned on again. Turn on the power again.
Wireless LAN failure The wireless LAN has failed. Press the Error cancellation key.
Notifies that repair must be performed at the support center.
Internal memory failure Since the internal memory has failed, some functions cannot be Press the Error cancellation key.
operated normally. Notifies that repair must be performed at the support
center.

Confidential
4.2.2 Fatal Errors Table 4-2. Fatal Errors

Troubleshooting
Table 4-2. Fatal Errors Error code Error details
procedure
Troubleshooting 000033 CR load position reverse error P. 102
Error code Error details
procedure
000040 PF PID driving time error P. 106
100001 ADF PID excess speed detection P. 90
000041 PF PID excess load error P. 107
100002 ADF PID reverse detection
000042 PF PID excess speed error P. 109
100003 ADF PID lock detection P. 91
000043 PF PID reverse error
100005 ADF PID excess load P. 107
000044 PF PID lock error
100006 ADF PID driving time P. 92
000050 PF load position driving time error P. 106
100016 HP detection failure P. 93
000051 PF load position excess load error P. 107
100017 Contact detection distance exceeded P. 94
000052 PF load position excess speed error P. 109
100032 LED light failure P. 95
000053 PF load position reverse error P. 107
100054 Paper jam error P. 96
000060 ASF PID driving time error P. 110
100065 FB PID excess speed detection P. 97
000061 ASF PID excess load error P. 111
100066 FB PID reverse detection
000062 ASF PID excess speed error P. 113
100067 FB PID lock detection P. 98
000063 ASF PID reverse error
100069 FB PID excess load P. 111
000064 ASF PID lock error
100070 FB PID driving time P. 99
000070 ASF load position driving time error P. 110
100073 FB BS+ excess speed detection P. 97
000071 ASF load position excess load error P. 111
100074 FB BS+ reverse detection
000072 ASF load position excess speed error P. 113
100075 FB BS+ lock detection P. 98
000073 ASF load position reverse error P. 111
100077 FB BS+ excess load
000080 2nd ASF PID driving time error P. 114
100078 FB BS+ driving time P. 99
000081 2nd ASF PID excess load error P. 115
190000 Calibration error P. 100
000082 2nd ASF PID excess speed error P. 116
000020 CR PID driving time error P. 101
000083 2nd ASF PID reverse error
000021 CR PID excess load error P. 102 P. 115
000084 2nd ASF PID lock error
000022 CR PID excess speed error P. 104
000090 2nd ASF load position driving time error P. 114
000023 CR PID reverse error
P. 102 000091 2nd ASF load position excess load error P. 115
000024 CR PID lock error
000092 2nd ASF load position excess speed error P. 116
000025 CR PID underspeed error P. 105
000093 2nd ASF load position reverse error P. 115
000030 CR load position driving time error P. 101
000100 IS PID driving time error P. 117
000031 CR load position excess load error P. 102
000032 CR load position excess speed error P. 104

Confidential
Table 4-2. Fatal Errors Table 4-2. Fatal Errors

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Error code Error details Error code Error details
procedure procedure
000101 IS PID excess load error P. 117 032156 Addition communication error 6
000102 IS PID excess speed error P. 118 032157 Addition communication error 7
000103 IS PID reverse error P. 118 032158 Addition communication error 8
000104 IS PID lock error P. 119 032159 Addition communication error 9 P. 129
000180 LFT2 PID driving time error P. 121 032160 Addition communication error 10
000181 LFT2 PID excess load error P. 122 032161 Addition communication error 11
000182 LFT2 PID excess speed error P. 123 032162 Addition communication error 12
000184 LFT2 PID lock error P. 122 033001 CRCM fuse blown error P. 129
001012 DCP1 driving time error P. 119 033003 Other ink device error
030004 Emergency stop error caused by cover opening P. 124 033004 Other ink device error P. 130
031001 X-Hot detect error (pre printing) P. 125 033005 Other ink device error
031002 X-Hot detect error (after flushing) P. 125 033006 CRCM access error (read)
P. 130
031003 Transistor temperature error P. 125 033007 CRCM access error (write)
031004 Head temperature error P. 125 033008 CRCM access error (firmware failure)
P. 130
031006 Printhead fuse blown error P. 126 033010 CSIC access error (hardware failure)
031008 VBS over-voltage error P. 126 034001 Home position seek error P. 124
031011 HCS error P. 127 034841 Ink leak error P. 120
032001 Over adding connection error P. 127 060001 Error caused by other than printer device P. 131
Unsupported additional cassette connection 060002 Driver mismatch error P. 131
032002 P. 127
error 060003 Error due to PCD verify command P. 131
032051 Addition contact state error 1 (Stop IR)
Addition contact state error 2 P. 128
032052
(except Stop_IR)
032101 Addition recovery mode error P. 128
032151 Addition communication error 1
032153 Addition communication error 3 P. 129

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (1)

 Error name
 ADF PID excess speed detection (error code: 100001)
 Cause
 State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
 Suspected cause
 Mechanical load error (light)
 Main Board failure
 ADF Encoder board failure
 ADF Scale is dirty or damaged.
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No

Visually check the FFCs of the ADF/SCN Unit.  Correctly insert the two FFCs.
Check the FFCs (x2) in ADF/SCN to make sure that it is not inserted  If FFC is damaged, replace the ADF/SCN
1 Go to step 2
obliquely, disconnected, or damaged. Unit. (Replace the unit even if one of the two
FFCs is damaged.)
Visually check the gear train parts.  Remove the foreign object.
2 Check the gear train parts to make sure that there is no foreign object on or Go to step 3  Replace the ADF/SCN Unit if the gear is
damage to them. damaged.
Replace the ADF/SCN Unit. Replace the Main Board Assy.
3 Does the error occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit? (If the trouble is not resolved, contact the End
EPSON Service Department.)

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (2)

 Error name
 ADF PID reverse detection (error code: 100002)
 ADF PID lock detection (error code: 100003)
 ADF PID excess load (error code: 100005)
 Cause
 When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction
(There was a sudden load error, and the ADF motor rotated in the opposite direction in reaction to it)
 State in which load of the ADF Motor exceeds expected load, and the motor does not rotate at all
 State in which load of the ADF Motor exceeds expected load
 Suspected cause
 Collision with a foreign object
 Excess sliding load (such as grease shortage, etc.)
 FFC disconnection insertion failure in ADF/SCN
 ADF Encoder failure
 ADF Scale is dirty or damaged.
 ADF Motor failure
 Troubleshooting

1 Go to step 2
FFCs is damaged.)
Visually check the gear train parts.  Remove the foreign object.
2 Check the gear train parts to make sure that there is no foreign object on or Go to step 3  Replace the ADF/SCN Unit if the gear is
Replace the ADF/SCN Unit. Replace the Main Board Assy.
3 Does the error occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit? (If the trouble is not resolved, contact the End

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (3)

 Error name
 ADF PID driving time (error code: 100006)
 Cause
 The driving time of the ADF Motor exceeded the set time.
(Rotation does not stop)
 Suspected cause
 FW failure
 Troubleshooting
Check for the firmware.
1 Go to step 2 Update the firmware.
Check whether or not the firmware is the latest version.
Replace the Main Board Assy.
2 Contact the EPSON Service Department. End
Does the error occur after replacing the Main Board Assy?

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (4)

 Error name
 HP detection failure (error code: 100016)
 Cause
 The zero-point mark cannot be scanned.
 Suspected cause
 CIS Module failure
 FFC disconnection in ADF/SCN
 Troubleshooting

1 Go to step 2
FFCs is damaged.)
Replace the ADF/SCN Unit.
2 Go to step 3 End
Does the error occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit?

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (5)

 Error name
 Contact detection distance exceeded (error code: 100017)
 Cause
 Gradual fitting cannot be performed when gradual fitting drive is performed at the zero-point side.
 Suspected cause
 FW failure
 Wheel column, belt runout
 Troubleshooting

Visually check the FFCs of the ADF/SCN Unit.  Properly connect the FFC of ADF/SCN.
2 Check the FFC (thin) in ADF/SCN to make sure that it is not inserted Go to step 3  Replace the ADF/SCN Unit if the FFC is
obliquely, folded, or damaged. damaged.

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (6)

 Error name
 LED light failure (error code: 100032)
 Cause
 The LED on the CIS Module is not lit up.
 Suspected cause
 Troubleshooting

1 Check the FFC (thick) in ADF/SCN to make sure it is not inserted obliquely, Go to step 2  Replace the ADF/SCN Unit if the FFC is
folded, or damaged. damaged.
2 Go to step 3 End

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (7)

 Error name
 Paper jam error (error code: 100054)
 Cause
 Occurs if a paper jam occurred in the document feed path of the ADF.
 Suspected cause
 Jammed paper or foreign object remained
 ADF PE Sensor failure
 Troubleshooting

Visually check the paper feed path.
1 Go to step 2 Remove the jammed paper or foreign object.
Is there no jammed paper remaining in the paper feed path?
2 Check the FFC (thick) in ADF/SCN that is connected to the main board to Go to step 3  Replace the ADF/SCN Unit if the FFC is
make sure that it is not inserted obliquely or disconnected. damaged.

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (8)

 Error name
 FB PID excess speed detection (flatbed) (error code: 100065)
 FB BS+ excess speed detection (flatbed) (error code: 100073)
 Cause
 State in which driven at unexpected speed (PID: fast, BS: slow) for control.
 Suspected cause
 Mechanical load error (light)
 SCN Encoder failure
 SCN Scale is dirty or damaged.
 Troubleshooting

1 Go to step 2
obliquely or disconnected. Unit. (Replace the unit even if one of the two
FFCs is damaged.)
2 Go to step 3 End

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (9)

 Error name
 FB PID reverse detection (error code: 100066)
 FB PID lock detection (error code: 100067)
 FB PID excess load (error code: 100069)
 FB BS+ reverse detection (error code: 100074)
 FB BS+ lock detection (error code: 100075)
 FB BS+ excess load (error code: 100077)
 Cause
(There was a sudden load error, and the SCN motor rotated in the opposite direction in reaction to it)
 State in which load of the SCN motor exceeds expected load, and motor does not rotate at all
 State in which load of the SCN Motor exceeds expected load
 Suspected cause
 SCN Encoder failure
 SCN Scale is dirty or damaged.
 SCN Motor failure
 Troubleshooting

1 Go to step 2
FFCs is damaged.)
2 Go to step 3 End

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (10)

 Error name
 FB PID driving time (error code: 100070)
 FB BS+ driving time (error code: 100078)
 Cause
 The driving time of the SCN Motor exceeded the set time.
 Suspected cause
 FW failure
 Troubleshooting

2 Go to step 3
FFCs is damaged.)
3 Go to step 4 End

Confidential
ADF/SCN ERROR (11)

 Error name
 Calibration error (error code: 190000)
 Cause
 Cannot perform proper image reading.
 Suspected cause
 Main board failure
 Troubleshooting

1 Check the FFC (thick) in ADF/SCN that is connected to the main board to Go to step 2  Replace the ADF/SCN Unit if the FFC is
make sure that it is not inserted obliquely or disconnected. damaged.
2 Go to step 3 End

Confidential
CR ERROR (1)
 Error name
 CR PID driving time error (error code: 000020)
 CR load position driving time error (error code: 000030)
 Cause
 The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time.
 Suspected cause
 CR Motor cable disconnection or contact failure
 Troubleshooting
Visually check the CR Motor cable.  Correctly insert the motor cable.
1 Check the CR Motor cable to make sure that there is no error (disconnection/ Go to step 2  Replace the CR Motor if the motor cable is
contact failure). disconnected.

Confidential
CR ERROR (2)
 Error name
 CR PID excess load error (error code: 000021)
 CR PID reverse error (error code: 000023)
 CR PID lock error (error code: 000024)
 CR load position excess load error (error code: 000031)
 CR load position reverse error (error code: 000033)
 Cause
 State in which load of CR Motor exceeds expected load
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite direction in reaction to it)
 Suspected cause
 CR Lock Lever failure (Inksystem Assy failure)
 High sliding load (oil cutoff, paper dust, mist)
 CR Scale is dirty or damaged.
 Contact damage (contact failure)/disconnection/half insertion of CR Encoder FFC
 CR Motor failure
 Troubleshooting
Visually check the CR scanning section
1 Go to step 2 Remove the jammed paper and foreign object.
Is there no paper jam paper and foreign object in the CR scanning section?
Check the CR Lock Lever operation
2 Does the CR Lock Lever operate correctly when the power is on? Go to step 3 Replace the Inksystem Assy.
(Is the lowering operation performed correctly?)
Check the status of the CR Guide Frame
Lubricate the CR Unit and CR Gudie Frame
3 Is the CR Guide Frame dirty from paper dust or mist? Is a lubrication Go to step 4
contacting point after cleaning.
shortage occurring?
Check the status of the CR Scale.  Clean, if dirty.
4 Go to step 5
Is the CR Scale dirty or damaged?  Replace the CR Scale in the case of damage.

Confidential

Check the status of the CR Encoder FFC  Properly connect the CR Encoder FFC.
5 Check the CR Encoder FFC to make sure that it is not inserted obliquely or Go to step 6  Replace the CR Encoder FFC (head FFC) in
damaged. the case of damage.
Perform CR Motor operation check
6 Go to step 7 Replace the CR Motor.
Does the CR Motor operate (rotate)?
7 Replace the Printer Mechanism. End

Confidential
CR ERROR (3)
 Error name
 CR PID excess speed error (error code: 000022)
 CR load position excess speed error (error code: 000032)
 Cause
 Suspected cause
 CR Timing Belt detached or broken
 Troubleshooting
Check the CR Timing Belt Replace the following parts in sequence.
Is the timing belt detached or broken?  CR Motor
 When the belt is detached, reattach it.
1  Main Board Assy
 When the belt is broken, replace the CR Unit.
(If the trouble is not resolved, contact the

Confidential
CR ERROR (4)
 Error name
 CR PID underspeed error (error code: 000025)
 Cause
 When lower than the expected speed is detected
 Suspected cause
 Jammed paper remained
 Foreign object remained
 Contamination of CR scale
 Troubleshooting
Visually check the CR scanning section Remove the jammed paper and foreign object.
1 Go to step 2
Is there no paper jam paper and foreign object in the CR scanning section?
Check the status of the CR Scale.  Clean, if dirty.
2 Go to step 3
Is the CR Scale dirty or damaged?  Replace the CR scale in the case of damage.
Check the connection of the CR Encoder FFC.  Properly connect the CR Encoder FFC.
3 Check the CR Encoder FFC to make sure that it is not inserted obliquely. Go to step 4  Replace the CR Encoder FFC (head FFC) in
the case of damage.
Perform CR Motor operation check
4 Go to step 5 Replace the CR Motor.
Does the CR Motor operate (rotate)?

Confidential
PF ERROR (1)
 Error name
 PF PID driving time error (error code: 000040)
 PF load position driving time error (error code: 000050)
 Cause
 The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time.
 Suspected cause
 Troubleshooting

Confidential
PF ERROR (2)
 Error name
 PF PID excess load error (error code: 000041)
 PF PID reverse error (error code: 000043)
 PF PID lock error (error code: 000044)
 PF load position excess load error (error code: 000051)
 PF load position reverse error (error code: 000053)
 Cause
 State in which load of PF Motor exceeds expected load
 Suspected cause
 Feed rollers are worn out.
 Gears locking due to foreign object
 PF gear train parts damaged
 Contact damage (contact failure)/disconnection/half insertion of PF Encoder FFC
 PF Encoder failure
 PF Scale failure
 PF Motor failure
 Troubleshooting
1 Go to step 2 Remove the jammed paper and foreign object.
Is there no jammed paper or foreign object remaining in the paper feed path?
Check the status of the feed rollers.  Replace the Paper Guide Upper Assy.
2 Is the PF Roller or Paper Guide Upper Assy damaged or worn out? Go to step 3  Replace the Printer Mechanism if there are
any scratches or wearout on the PF roller.
Visually check the PF gear train parts.  Remove any foreign objects, if present.
3 Check the PF gear train parts to make sure that there is no foreign object on or Go to step 4  Replace the Printer Mechanism if the gear is

Confidential

Check the status of the PF Encoder and FFC  Replace the PF Encoder Board if parts are
Check the PF Encoder to make sure that it is not damaged, and there is no damaged.
4 disconnection or contact failure in the FFC. Go to step 5  Properly connect the FFC.
 Replace the Printer Mechanism if the FFC is
damaged.
Check the status of the PF Scale.  Clean, if dirty.
5 Go to step 6
Is the PF Scale dirty or damaged?  Replace the PF Scale, if damaged.

Confidential
PF ERROR (3)
 Error name
 PF PID excess speed error (error code: 000042)
 PF load position excess speed error (error code: 000052)
 Cause
 Suspected cause
 PF Timing Belt detached or broken
 PF gear train part damaged
 PF Motor failure
 Troubleshooting
Check the PF Timing Belt  When the belt is detached, reattach it.
1 Is the timing belt detached or broken? Go to step 2  When the belt is broken, replace the Printer
Mechanism.
Visually check the PF gear train parts.
2 Check the PF gear train parts to make sure that there is no foreign object on or Go to step 3 Replace the Printer Mechanism.
damage to them.
Replace the Main Board Assy. Contact the EPSON Service Department.
3 End

Confidential
ASF ERROR (1)

 Error name
 ASF PID driving time error (error code: 000060)
 ASF load position driving time error (error code: 000070)
 Cause
 The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time.
 Suspected cause
 Motor cable disconnection or cable contact failure
 Troubleshooting
Visually check the status and connection of ASF Motor Cable (CN80).  Correctly insert the ASF Motor Cable
1 Is the ASF Motor Cable (CN80) connected properly? (Refer to P. 592) Go to step 2 (CN80).
 Replace the Printer Mechanism if damaged.

Confidential
ASF ERROR (2)

 Error name
 ASF PID excess load error (error code: 000061)
 ASF PID reverse error (error code: 000063)
 ASF PID lock error (error code: 000064)
 ASF load position excess load error (error code: 000071)
 ASF load position reverse error (error code: 000073)
 Cause
 State in which load of ASF Motor exceeds expected load
 Suspected cause
 Paper path damaged and feed roller worn out
 ASF gear train parts failure
 Contact damage (contact failure)/disconnection/half insertion of ASF Encoder FFC
 ASF Encoder failure
 ASF Scale failure
 ASF Motor failure
 Troubleshooting
Check the status inside paper conveyance path_1
1 Check the paper conveyance path (LD Frame Assy to PF Roller) to make sure Go to step 2 Remove the jammed paper and foreign object.
that there is no remaining jammed paper (paper fragments) or foreign objects.
Check the status inside paper conveyance path_2
Replace the Printer Mechanism if there are
2 Check the paper conveyance path (LD Frame Assy to PF Roller) to make sure Go to step 3
scratches or damage.
that there are no scratches or damage.
Check the feed roller and conveyance roller state. Replace the LD Frame Assy or Rear Unit if
3 Go to step 4
A conveyance roller is not damaged or worn out. there are scratches or damage.
Check the connection of the ASF Motor connectors. Correctly insert the ASF Motor Cable (CN80).
4 Go to step 5
Is the ASF Motor cable (CN80) properly connected? (Refer to P. 592) (Replace the Printer Mechanism if damaged.)

Confidential

Visually check the ASF gear train parts.  Remove any foreign objects, if present.
5 Check the ASF gear train parts to make sure that there is no foreign object on Go to step 6  Replace the Printer Mechanism if the ASF-
or damage to them. related gear is damaged.
Check the status of the ASF Encoder and FFC.  Properly connect the ASF Encoder FFC.
Make sure there is no damage in the ASF Encoder, and no contact point  Replace the Printer Mechanism if the contact
6 Go to step 7
damage, disconnection, or half insertion, etc. in the FFC. point is damaged or the ASF Encoder FFC is
disconnected.
Check the status of the ASF Scale.
7 Go to step 8 Replace the Printer Mechanism.
Is the ASF Scale dirty or damaged?

Confidential
ASF ERROR (3)

 Error name
 ASF PID excess speed error (error code: 000062)
 ASF load position excess speed error (error code: 000072)
 Cause
 Suspected cause
 Disconnection or contact failure of the ASF Encoder FFC
 ASF gear train part damaged
 ASF Encoder failure
 Troubleshooting
Check the connection of the ASF Encoder FFC. Properly insert the ASF Encoder FFC.
1 Check the ASF Encoder FFC to make sure that there is no disconnection or Go to step 2 (Replace the Printer Mechanism if the FFC is
contact failure. damaged.)
Check the ASF gear train parts. Replace the Printer Mechanism if it drops out,
2 Go to step 3
Is the ASF gear train parts detached or broken? is damaged, or deviates.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL ASF ERROR (1)

 Error name
 2nd ASF PID driving time error (error code: 000080)
 2nd ASF load position driving time error (error code: 000090)
 Cause
 The drive time of the ASF Motor (Optional Cassette Unit) exceeded the set time.
 Suspected cause
 Cable disconnection or contact failure in the Optional Cassette ASF Motor
 Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy failure
 Troubleshooting
Check the connection of the optional cassette ASF motor cable.  Correctly insert the Optional Cassette ASF
Is the Optional Cassette ASF Motor Cable (CN13) connected properly? Motor Cable (CN13).
1 Go to step 2
(Refer to P. 592)  Replace the Optional Cassette Unit in the
case of damage of the motor cable.
Replace the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy.
2 Does the error occur after replacing the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Contact the EPSON Service Department. End
Assy?

Confidential

 Error name
 2nd ASF PID excess load error (error code: 000081)
 2nd ASF PID reverse error (error code: 000083)
 2nd ASF PID lock error (error code: 000084)
 2nd ASF load position excess load error (error code: 000091)
 2nd ASF load position reverse error (error code: 000093)
 Cause
 Jammed paper remained  Locked because ASF gear train part failure
 ASF Encoder Assy failure  ASF Motor (Optional Cassette Unit) failure
 Paper path damaged and feed roller worn out  Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy failure
 Gears locking due to foreign object
 Suspected cause
 Disconnection or contact failure of the ASF Encoder FFC in the optional cassette
 State in which load of ASF (Optional Cassette Unit) motor exceeds expected load
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite direction in reaction to it)
 Troubleshooting
1 Go to step 2 Remove the jammed paper.
Is there no jammed paper remaining in the paper feed path?
Check the Vertical Feed Roller state  Clean or replace the Vertical Feed Roller
2 The Vertical Feed Roller is not damaged or worn out. Go to step 3  Replace the Vertical Feed Roller in the case
of damage.
Check the ASF gear train parts of the Optional Cassette Unit. Replace the Optional Paper Cassette Main  Remove the foreign object.
Check the optional cassette ASF wheel column components to make sure that Board Assy.  Replace the Optional Cassette Unit in the
3
foreign objects are not stuck, and there is no damage. (If the trouble is not resolved, contact the case of damage.

Confidential

 Error name
 2nd ASF PID excess speed error (error code: 000082)
 2nd ASF load position excess speed error (error code: 000092)
 Cause
 Suspected cause
 ASF gear train parts detached or broken
 Troubleshooting
Check the ASF gear train parts of the Optional Cassette Unit. Correct any drop-out or shifting.
1 Is the ASF gear train parts detached or broken? Go to step 2 (Replace the Optional Cassette Unit in the case
of damage.)
Replace the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy. Replace the Optional Cassette Unit.
2 Does the error occur after replacing the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board (If the trouble is not resolved, contact the End
Assy? EPSON Service Department.)

Confidential
IS ERROR (1) IS ERROR (2)

 Error name  Error name
 IS PID driving time error (error code: 000100)  IS PID excess load error (error code: 000101)
 Cause  Cause
 The IS Motor is continuously running for 30 seconds or more.  State in which load of I/S Motor exceeds expected load
 Suspected cause  Suspected cause
 Contamination of IS Scale  Gears of the Inksystem Assy locked due to foreign object
 F/W runaway  Inksystem Assy failure
 Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No Step Check and measure Yes No
Check the power connection. Visually check the gears of Inksystem Assy. Replace the Remove the
1 Does the error recur when the printer power is Go to step 2 End Is there no foreign object on the gears? Inksystem foreign
turned off/on? Assy. object.
Check for the firmware. Update the (If the trouble
firmware. is not
Check whether or not the firmware is the latest 1
resolved,
version using the Adjustment program. (If firmware
contact the
cannot be
EPSON
2 Go to step 3 updated,
Service
contact the
Department.)
EPSON
Service
Department.)
Visually check for the IS Scale. Clean the IS
Check the dirt on the IS Scale, and make sure there Scale.
is no problem. (Replace the
3 Go to step 4 Inksystem
Assy if
cleaning is
difficult.)
Replace the Inksystem Assy. Contact the
Does the error occur after replacing the Inksystem EPSON
4 End
Assy? Service
Department.

Confidential

 IS PID excess speed error (error code: 000102)  IS PID reverse error (error code: 000103)
 Cause  Cause
 State in which rotation speed of I/S Motor exceeds expected rotation  The IS Motor drive has been reversed.
speed
 Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  Contamination of IS Scale
 Contamination of IS Scale
 Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No Visually check for the IS Scale. Clean the IS
Visually check for the IS Scale. Clean the IS Check the dirt on the IS Scale, and make sure there Scale.
Check the dirt on the IS Scale, and make sure there Scale. is no problem. (Replace the
is no problem. (Replace the 1 Go to step 2 Inksystem
1 Go to step 2 Inksystem Assy if
Assy if cleaning is
cleaning is difficult.)
difficult.) Replace the Inksystem Assy. Contact the
Replace the Inksystem Assy. Contact the Does the error occur after replacing the Inksystem EPSON
2 End
Does the error occur after replacing the Inksystem EPSON Assy? Service
2 End Department.
Assy? Service
Department.

Confidential

 IS PID lock error (error code: 000104)  DCP1 driving time error (error code: 001012)
 Cause  Cause
 The IS Motor is not running.  The Decompression Pump Motor (DCP1) is continuously running for
30 seconds or more.
 Suspected cause
 Gears of the Inksystem Assy locked due to foreign object  Suspected cause
 Gear phase shift  F/W runaway
 Decompression Pump Assy failure
 Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting
Visually check the gears of Inksystem Assy. Replace the Remove the Step Check and measure Yes No
Is there no foreign object on the gears? Inksystem foreign Check for the firmware.
Assy. object. Update the
1 Check whether or not the firmware is the latest Go to step 2
(If the (Replace the firmware.
version using the Adjustment program.
trouble is not Inksystem
1 Replace the Decompression Pump Assy. Contact the
resolved, Assy if
Does not an error occur after replacing the EPSON
contact the removal is 2 End
Decompression Pump Assy? Service
EPSON not possible.)
Department.
Service
Department.)

Confidential
IS ERROR (7)
Ink Leak Sensor
 Error name
 Ink leak error (error code: 034841)
 Cause
 There is ink or moisture in the Ink Leak Sensor.
 Suspected cause
 Mis-detection due to condensation
 Ink leakage
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No RIPS Housing
Visually check the printer exterior. Place in an

There is no condensation on printer exterior. environment
with 10 to
35°C
temperature
and 20 to
80%
1 Go to step 2
humidity for
10 min. or
more, and
then turn on
the power
supply
again.
Replace the Ink Leak Sensor* Contact the Ink Leak Sensor Ink Tube Guide Holder
The error recurs even after replacing the Ink Leak EPSON
2 Service End
Sensor. (Under the Tube Guide and at the RIPS
Unit bottom surface) Department. Figure 4-3. Ink Leak Sensor
*: There are three Ink Leak Sensors in the RIPS Housing, and one under the RIPS Unit
and the printer’s ink tube joint (Ink Tube Guide Holder). Check the status of the Ink
Leak Sensor by removing the RIPS Unit.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL LIFT ERROR (1)

 Error name
 LFT2 PID driving time error (error code: 000180)
 Cause
 The drive time of the Optional LIFT Motor has exceeded a fixed value.
 Suspected cause
 Optional Cassette ASF Motor cable failure
 Troubleshooting
Check the Optional Cassette ASF Motor cable.  Correctly insert the optional cassette ASF
Is the optional cassette ASF motor cable (CN13) connected properly? (Refer motor cable (CN13).
1 Go to step 2
to P. 592)  Replace the Optional Cassette Unit in the
case of cable damage.

Confidential

 Error name
 LFT2 PID excess load error (error code: 000181)
 LFT2 PID lock error (error code: 000184)
 Cause
 The load became unexpectedly high with hopper lift driving.
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does not rotate at all
 Suspected cause
 Foreign object in Paper Cassette  Lift Phase Sensor failure
 Paper incorrectly loaded or number of sheets loaded exceeds maximum  Lift Motor failure
 Damage to or foreign object trapped in lift gear train parts  Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy failure
 Troubleshooting
Check for the Paper Cassette (1)
1 Go to step 2 Remove the foreign object.
Check that there is no foreign object in the paper cassette.
Check for the Paper Cassette (2)  Reduce the number of sheets of paper loaded.
2 Check that more than the maximum number of sheets of paper is not loaded. Go to step 3  Properly set the paper.
Furthermore, is the paper loaded correctly?
Check for the Paper Cassette (3)  Replace the Paper Cassette if there is an error
Check the hopper-up mechanism of the paper cassette to make sure that it is in the hop-up action.
3 working correctly. Go to step 4  Replace the (1) Lift Up Gear 30T or (2) Lift
(Check if the Hopper operates when the left-side gear of the paper cassette is Up Sector Gear 40T if the left-side gear of
touched by hand.) the Paper Cassette is replaced.
Visually check the Lift gear train parts.  Remove any foreign objects, if present.
4 Check the Lift gear train parts to make sure that there is no foreign object on Go to step 5  Replace the Optional Cassette Unit if the Optional
or damage to them. Lift Wheel Column components are damaged.
Check the connection of the Optional Lift Phase Sensor. Properly connect the Optional Lift Phase
Check the connection of the Optional Lift Phase Sensor Connector (CN4), Sensor Connector (CN4).
5 Go to step 6
and make sure there are no problems. (Refer to P. 592) (Replace the Optional Cassette in the case of
cable damage.)
Replace the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy.
6 Does the error occur after replacing the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Replace the Optional Cassette Unit. End
Assy?

Confidential

 Error name
 LFT2 PID excess speed error (error code: 000182)
 Cause
 Suspected cause
 The Optional Lift Wheel Column components are damaged or a foreign object has entered
 Troubleshooting
Check the Lift gear train parts.  Correct any drop-out or shifting.
1 Is the Lift gear train parts detached or broken? Go to step 2  Replace the Optional Cassette Unit in the
case of damage.

Confidential
EMERGENCY STOP ERROR CAUSED BY COVER OPENING HOME POSITION SEEK ERROR
 Emergency stop error caused by cover opening  Home position seek error (error code: 34001)
(error code: 030004)
 Cause
 Cause  Occurs if the home position seek failed.
 Occurs if the rear cover or Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover is
 Suspected cause
opened during motor driving.
(This error is not displayed on the Printer, and only the information is  Paper jam or foreign object in CR operation area
retained internally as history.)  CR Lock Lever failure
 Suspected cause  Troubleshooting
 The cover opened during motor driving Step Check and measure Yes No
Check for paper jam and foreign object Remove the
Check that there is no paper jam or foreign object jammed paper
1 Go to step 2
in the CR operation area. and foreign
object.
Check the CR Lock Lever operation Contact the
Replace the
Turn on the power and check that the CR Lock EPSON
2 Inksystem
Lever is operating. Service
Assy.
Department.

Confidential
PRINTHEAD ELECTRICAL ERROR(1) PRINTHEAD ELECTRICAL ERROR (2)

 Transistor temperature error (error code: 031003)  X-Hot detect error (pre printing) (error code: 031001)
 Cause  X-Hot detect error (after flushing) (error code: 031002)
 Occurs if the main board exceeds a set temperature.  Head temperature error (error code: 031004)
 Suspected cause  Cause

 The ambient temperature around the Main Board has exceeded 95  Occurs if the head temperature exceeds a set temperature.
degrees C.  Suspected cause
 Main Board failure  The ambient temperature around the Printhead has exceeded 80
 Troubleshooting degrees C.
 Head FFC inserted slanted
 Printhead failure
Does the error occur when turning the power off Replace the
and back on? Main board  Troubleshooting
Assy.
(If the trouble Step Check and measure Yes No
1 is not Visually check for the Head FFC connection Properly

End
resolved, state. connect the
contact the Check the Head FFC to make sure that it is not Head FFC.
EPSON 1 Go to step 2
inserted obliquely or disconnected, and that all (Replace the
Service connections are proper. Head FFC,
Department.) if damaged.)
Replace the Printhead. Contact the
Does the error occur after replacing the Printhead? EPSON
2 End
Service
Department.

Confidential
PRINTHEAD ELECTRICAL ERROR (3) PRINTHEAD ELECTRICAL ERROR (4)

 Printhead fuse blown error (error code: 031006)  VBS over-voltage error (error code: 031008)
 Cause  Cause
 Occurs if the Printhead fuse has blown.  Occurs when an abnormal voltage is applied to the head drive circuit
during printing.
 Suspected cause
 Fuse blown due to overcurrent, etc.  Suspected cause
 Printhead failure  Head FFC oblique insertion and protective solution leakage
 Printhead drive circuit failure in main board  Printhead failure
 Head FFC oblique insertion and protective solution leakage  Printhead drive circuit failure in main board
 Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No Step Check and measure Yes No
Visually check for solution leakage. Replace the Visually check for solution leakage. Replace the
Printhead and Check the Head FFC to make sure that there is no Printhead and
1 Check the Printhead FFC to make sure that there is Go to step 2 1 Go to step 2
Head FFC solution leakage or discoloration. Head FFC
no solution leakage or discoloration.
Assy. Assy.
Visually check for the Head FFC connection Properly Visually check for the head FFC connection Properly
state. connect the state. connect the
Head FFC. Check the Head FFC to make sure that it is not Head FFC.
Check the Head FFC to make sure that it is not 2 Go to step 3
2 Go to step 3 inserted obliquely or disconnected, and that all (Replace the
inserted obliquely or disconnected, and that all (Replace the
connections are proper. Head FFC, connections are proper. Head FFC,
if damaged.) if damaged.)
Replace the Printhead. Replace the Printhead.

3 Go to step 4 End 3 Go to step 4 End
Does the error occur after replacing the Printhead? Does the error occur after replacing the Printhead?
Replace the Main Board Assy. Contact the Replace the Main Board Assy. Contact the
EPSON Does the error occur after replacing the Main Board EPSON
4 Does the error occur after replacing the Main Board End 4 End
Service Assy? Service
Assy?
Department. Department.

Confidential
PRINTHEAD ELECTRICAL ERROR (5) ADDITIONAL CASSETTE FW ERROR (1)

 HCS error (error code: 031011)  Over adding connection error (error code: 032001)
 Cause  Cause
 Occurs if communication is not possible between the print head and  State in which more than two additional cassettes connected
Main Board Assy.
 Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  More than the maximum number of additional cassettes connected
 Troubleshooting
 Head FFC disconnection or oblique insertion
 Install within the specified number of additional cassettes.
 Disconnection or short-circuiting of main board
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No ADDITIONAL CASSETTE FW ERROR (2)
Check for the firmware. Update the
 Error name
Check whether or not the firmware is the latest firmware.
version using the Adjustment program. Go to step 2  Unsupported additional cassette connection error
1 Go to step 2
if recovery (error code: 032002)
is not
possible  Cause
Visually check for the Head FFC connection Properly  Occurs when an unsupported additional cassette is connected.
state. connect the
Head FFC.  Suspected cause
Check the Head FFC to make sure that it is not
2 Go to step 3
inserted obliquely or disconnected, and that all (Replace the  Unsupported additional cassette connected
connections are proper. Head FFC,
if damaged.)  Troubleshooting
Replace the Printhead.  Use supported additional cassettes.
3 Go to step 4 End
Does the error occur after replacing the Printhead?
Replace the Main Board Assy. Contact the
Does the error occur after replacing the Main Board EPSON
4 End
Assy? Service
Department.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL CASSETTE FW ERROR (3) ADDITIONAL CASSETTE FW ERROR (4)

 Addition contact state error 1 (Stop IR) (error code: 032051)  Addition recovery mode error (error code: 032101)
 Addition contact state error 2 (except Stop_IR)  Cause
(error code: 032052)
 Occurs when the recovery mode is entered due to a failure of the
 Cause firmware update of the additional cassette.
 Optional Cassette Unit installation failure  Suspected cause
 Foreign object in connection part  Firmware update is failure
 Drawer Connector failure
 Troubleshooting
 Suspected cause
Update the firmware. Replace the
 The connection terminal is thought to have a connection failure at the Check if the error is displayed even after firmware Optional
Printer and optional cassette connection part. update when the Optional Cassette has been Paper
1 End
connected. Cassette
 Troubleshooting Main Board
Assy.
Check the Optional Cassette Unit installation Reinstall the
state. Optional
1 Go to step 2
Check that the Additional Cassette is properly Cassette
installed. Unit.
Check the foreign material in connection part Remove the
Check that there is no foreign object trapped in the foreign
2 contact point between the main unit and the Go to step 3 object from
Optional Cassette Unit. connection
part.
Replace the Drawer Connector. Replace the
Does the error occur after replacing the Drawer Optional
Connector? Paper
3 End
Cassette
Main Board
Assy.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL CASSETTE FW ERROR (5) CSIC ERROR (1)

 Addition communication error 1 (error code:032151)  CRCM fuse blown error (error code: 033001)
 Addition communication error 2 (error code:032152)
 Addition communication error 3 (error code:032153)  Cause
 Addition communication error 4 (error code:032154)  Decline in CRCM input voltage (VHV)
 Addition communication error 6 (error code:032156)  Suspected cause
 Addition communication error 7 (error code:032157)  FFC disconnection in CRCM
 Addition communication error 8 (error code:032158)  Short-circuiting due to oblique insertion of FFC in CRCM
 Addition communication error 9 (error code:032159)  Communication failure in main board and CRCM Board
 Addition communication error 11 (error code:032161)  Main Board failure
 Addition communication error 12 (error code:032162)  Troubleshooting
 Cause
 Communication data abnormality due to noise etc.
Visually check for the FFC of CRCM. Reconnect
 Occurs when changing the number of stages of additional cassettes the FFC that
Check the CRCM FFC to make sure that it is not
while the power is on. inserted obliquely. connects the
 Suspected cause CRCM and
the main
 Drawer Connector failure board.
1 Go to step 2
 Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy failure (Replace the
 Main Board failure FFC if it is
 Troubleshooting disconnecte
d or there
Step Check and measure Yes No are burrs.)
Check if the error occur with turning the printer Replace the Main Board Assy. Contact the
off and on. Does the error occur after replacing the Main Board EPSON
1 Go to step 2 End 2 End
Does the error occur when turning the power off and Assy? Service
back on? Department.
Check the replacement of the Optional Cassette Replace the
2 Replace the Optional Cassette with a normal Go to step 3 Main Board
product, and then check the status. No error occurs. Assy.
Replace the Drawer Connector. Replace the
Does the error occur after replacing the Drawer Optional Paper
3 End
Connector? Cassette Main
Board Assy.

Confidential
CSIC ERROR (2) CSIC ERROR (4)

 Other ink device error (error code: 033003)  CRCM access error (read) (error code: 033006)
 Other ink device error (error code: 033004)  CRCM access error (write) (error code: 033007)
 Other ink device error (error code: 033005)  Cause
 Cause  Communication error when reading/writing data from the CRCM
 Other ink device error  Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  Main Board failure
 Incorrect destination settings in the Printer  CRCM failure
 Communication error due to Main Board failure  FFC disconnection in CRCM
 Troubleshooting  Short-circuiting due to oblique insertion
 Replace the Main Board Assy.  Communication failure in main board and CRCM Board
(Since the settings are made by using the inspection program before  Troubleshooting
shipment, resetting is not possible at the workplace.)
 Contact the EPSON Service Department.
Visually check for the FFC of CRCM. Replace the Reconnect
Check the CRCM FFC and make sure that it is not Main Board the FFC that
CSIC ERROR (3) Assy. connects the
inserted obliquely or disconnected.
CRCM and
 Error name the main
 CRCM access error (firmware failure) (error code: 033008) 1 board.
 CSIC access error (hardware failure) (error code: 033010) (Replace the
FFC if it is
 Cause disconnected
or there are
 Communication error due to main unit failure burrs.)
 Suspected cause
 Main board failure
 SOC failure
 Troubleshooting
 Replace the Main Board Assy.

Confidential
FW ERROR (1) FW ERROR (3)

 Error caused by other than printer device (error code: 060001)  Error due to PCD verify command (error code: 060003)
 Cause  Cause
 Internal error in the printer due to a fatal error of the scanner.  Error due to PCD verify command
 Suspected cause  Suspected cause
 A fatal error has occurred in the scanner.  Error that occurs when the process inspection has failed.
Normally, does not occur at the workplace.
 Troubleshooting
 Cancel the fatal error in the scanner.  Troubleshooting
 Contact the EPSON Service Department.
FW ERROR (2)
 Error name
 Driver mismatch error (error code: 060002)
 Cause
 Driver mismatch error
 Suspected cause
 Occurs during the combination of the regular printer and custom
driver, etc.
 Troubleshooting
 Install the regular driver.

Confidential
4.2.3 Troubleshooting from Failure Symptom

Table 4-3. Symptom List
Symptom Reference
Nozzles missing p. 133
Ink bleed p. 135
White or black bands p. 138
Print position offset in CR operation direction p. 141
Print position offset in feed direction p. 143
Lines not smooth and ruled-line deviation p. 145
Print smudges p. 148
Blank printout (blank paper ejected) p. 151
ADF/scanner trouble p. 154
Paper damaged or bent p. 157
Double feeding p. 159
The product cannot be powered on p. 161

Confidential
NOZZLES MISSING
 Symptom
Nozzles missing
 Cause
 Nozzles clogged
OK NG
Figure 4-4. Nozzles Clogged
 Inksystem Assy dirty (Cap or Wiper dirty)

 Air bubbles collected in ink tubes
 Inksystem Assy failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

Check the nozzle check pattern Execute the head cleaning.
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. The standard cleaning strength depending on the number of
missing nozzles is as described below.
1 Nozzle condition is excellent? End (No reproduction) • CL1: No. of missing nozzles (1 to 5)
• CL2: No. of missing nozzles (6 to 20)
• CL3: No. of missing nozzles (21 or more)
If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 3.
Check the Inksystem Assy  When cap/wiper is dirty
Check the following point about the Inksystem Assy. Clean the cap surface / wiper part (p. 583).
(Before implementation, refer to “6.2.2.1 Unlocking the CR Unit (P. 235)”, and then unlock  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is confirmed
the CR.) Replace the Inksystem Assy (p. 378).
1. Check the cap parts  When the wiper part breakage / wiper operation failure is
confirmed
• Check that the cap surfaces are not dirty.
2 Go to step 3 Replace the Inksystem Assy (p. 378).
• Manually turn the gear of the Inksystem Assy, move the cap up and down, and visually
check that the nozzle surface has been appropriately capped.
If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above,
2. Check the wiper parts
go to step 3.
• Check that there is not soiling or damage to the wiper parts
• Manually turn the gear of the Inksystem Assy, and make sure the wiper is properly
moving to the front and backward.
Inksystem Assy is correct condition?
Check the ink tubes Execute the head cleaning and then check that the bubbles
Visually check that air bubbles have not collected in the ink tubes. have been removed from inside the tubes If nozzle missing is
3 (If there are parts where the color is unmistakably pale in the supply system ink tubes, air Go to step 4 not improved after performing the above, go to step 4.
bubbles may have collected.)
Ink tube is correct condition?
Replace the printhead.
4 End Contact the EPSON Service Department.
Has the phenomenon (missing nozzle) been resolved?

Confidential
INK BLEED
 Symptom
Characters and images are distorted or blurred
Figure 4-5. Ink bleed

 Cause
 ADF/SCN Unit failure
 Miss-match the Printer setting and print paper.
 Paper
 Ink
 PG adjustment value deviation
 Temperature and Humidity Sensor failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

Check whether printing or copying  Occurs with copying only  Occurs with printing and copying.
1 Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. See ADF/scanner trouble (P. Go to the step 2
154).
Check the settings Change the settings.
Check that the print settings and paper type setting is correct.  When the phenomenon is improved
Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to an
2 Go to step 3
erroneous print setting, and get the setting corrected.
 When the phenomenon is not improved
Go to step 3
Check the paper Recommend using the standard paper.
3 Go to step 4
Print with standard paper and check that there is no character distortion or blurring.
Check the ink Recommend using genuine ink packs.
Check that genuine ink packs are attached. Also, confirm recurrence by a genuine ink pack.
Note that it is necessary to fill ink due to ink replacement
4 Go to step 5
inside the ink path.
If the symptom continues to occur after changing to the
genuine ink packs, go to step 5.
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. The standard cleaning strength depending on the number
of missing nozzles is as described below.
Nozzle condition is excellent? • CL1: No. of missing nozzles (1 to 5)
5 Go to step 6 • CL2: No. of missing nozzles (6 to 20)
*If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles
missing (P. 133).
Check the PG Perform the PG Adjustment (p. 559).
Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value range If the symptom continues to occur after performing the PG
6 Go to step 7
(1.55 ±0.10 mm). adjustment, go to step 7.
Is the PG within the standard value?

Confidential

Check the Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Make sure the Temperature and Humidity Sensor is operating properly.
1. Perform the Temperature and Humidity Sensor check from the adjustment program, and
check the output value.
The following abnormal values occur when the Temperature and Humidity Sensor fails:
7  Error judgment standard Replace the Printhead (p. 403). Replace the Temperature and Humidity Sensor (p. 263).
• Disconnection: 0 degrees C or below
• Short-circuiting: 60 degrees C or above
2. Touch the Temperature and Humidity Sensor with your hand, and check the change in the
output value.
Does the Temperature and Humidity Sensor operate normally?

Confidential
WHITE OR BLACK BANDS

 Symptom
White or black (dark) bands occur in the horizontal direction on images.
Sub scanning line (feed) direction

Main scanning line (CR operation) direction
Figure 4-6. White or black bands

 Cause
 Rear Unit installation failure
 Paper settings of main unit or printer driver settings are inappropriate.
 Nozzles missing
 Adjustment values are inappropriate
 Paper skewed

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

Check for the installation status of the Rear Unit. Reinstall the Rear Unit properly.
1 Check that the Rear Unit is installed properly. Go to step 2 If the symptom continues to occur after
performing the above, go to step 2.
Check the settings Change the settings.
Check for the settings listed below.  When the phenomenon is improved
1. Check that the paper type and size are appropriate. Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to
2 Go to step 3 an erroneous setting, and get the setting
2. Check that the rubbing avoidance mode is “off”.
corrected.
Is the setting appropriate?
Go to step 3
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. The standard cleaning strength depending on the
Nozzle condition is excellent? number of missing nozzles is as described below.
* If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to
Nozzles missing (P. 133).
Perform adjustments.
Perform adjustments listed below.
4 • PF/EJ adjustment (p. 577) End Go to step 5
• PF band adjustment (p. 578)
Has the phenomenon been improved upon?
Use the Print Quality Adjustment feature.
From the User Menu, implement Print Quality Adjustment.
[Print Quality Adjustment execution method]
1. Press the Help button, and then select “In the case of a problem”.
5 End Go to step 6
2. Select “Incorrect printing results”.
3. Select “Stripes and lines are present”.
4. Select “Resolve print problem”.

Confidential

Check whether or not skewing
1. Check that there is no paper skewing when feeding.
6 Contact the EPSON Service Department. Replace the Printer Mechanism.(p. 490)
2. Is there a difference between the banding on the left and right
(left black and right white, etc.)

Confidential
PRINT POSITION OFFSET IN CR OPERATION DIRECTION

 Symptom
The image is offset in the main scanning direction (left and right margins
are not equal) and the left or right edge of the image is cut off.
Figure 4-7. Print Position Offset in CR Operation Direction

 Cause
 Paper load position offset
 Print start position process adjustment value deviation
 Paper feeding failure
 PW Sensor is dirty or has deteriorated.
 PW Sensor adjustment value incorrect
 CR Scale dirty, damaged, or defective

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

Check the Paper Cassette. Correct the guide position.
Check that the paper size and guide position are appropriate.  When the phenomenon is improved
Are the paper size and guide position appropriate? Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to
1 Go to step 2 improper paper guide position, and get the
paper guide position setting corrected.
Go to step 2
Check the settings. Change the settings.
Check the settings of the main unit/printer driver listed below.  When the phenomenon is improved
 Check that the paper type/size settings are appropriate. Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to
2  Check that a value other than “0” is not input for the offset in the extended Go to step 3 an erroneous setting, and get the setting
settings of the printer driver. corrected.
Have the printer/driver settings been made correctly?  When the phenomenon is not improved
Go to step 3
Perform the First dot position adjustment.
3 End Go to step 4
Perform the First dot position / PW adjustment (p. 576).
Check the rollers. If roller is damaged, replace the rollers listed
Check that the pickup/conveyance rollers are not deformed or worn out. below.
Are the pickup and conveyance rollers normal? • Pickup Roller Assy (p. 453)
4 Go to step 5
• Retard Roller (p. 453)
• Paper Guide Upper Assy (p. 468)
• Rear Unit (p. 453)
Check the CR Scale.  If the CR Scale is dirty
Visually check the CR Scale to confirm that it is not dirty or damaged. Clean the CR Scale with a dust-free cloth.
5 Is the CR Scale normal. Go to step 6  If there are scratches on the CR Scale
Replace the CR Scale (p. 389).
Replace the CR Unit.
6 Replace the CR Unit. (p. 417) End Go to step 7
7 Replace the Main Board Assy. (p. 328) End Contact the EPSON Service Department.

Confidential
PRINT POSITION OFFSET IN FEED DIRECTION

 Symptom
The image is offset in the sub scanning (feed) direction (top and bottom
margins are not equal) and the top or bottom edge of the image is cut off.
Figure 4-8. Print Position Offset in Feed Direction

 Cause
 The paper that is being used is inappropriate.
 Paper feeding failure
 PE Sensor Lever failure
 PE Sensor is dirty, failure, or has deteriorated.
 CR Unit (PW Sensor) is dirty or failure.

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

Check the paper. Change the paper to suitable paper.
Check that suitable paper (1. paper is not printed. 2. paper don't have punch holes,  When the phenomenon is improved
etc.) is being used. Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to
1 Has the appropriate paper been used. Go to step 2 the paper, and make sure the appropriate paper
is used.
Go to step 2
Check the settings of the main unit/printer driver listed below.  When the phenomenon is improved
 Check that the paper type/size settings are appropriate. Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to
2  Check that a value other than “0” is not input for the offset in the extended Go to step 3 an erroneous setting, and get the setting
settings of the printer driver. corrected.
Have the printer/driver settings been made correctly?  When the phenomenon is not improved
Go to step 3
Check the rollers. If roller is damaged, replace the rollers listed
Check that the pickup/conveyance rollers are not deformed or worn out. below.
Are the pickup and conveyance rollers normal? • Pickup Roller Assy (p. 453)
3 Go to step 4 • Retard Roller (p. 453)
• Paper Guide Upper Assy (p. 468)
• Rear Unit (p. 453)
Check the PE Sensor Lever.
Replace the PE Sensor Lever (p. 468).
4 Check that the state and movement of the PE Sensor Lever are normal. Go to step 5
Is the PE Sensor Lever operating normally?
Replace the CR Unit.
5 Replace the CR Unit. (p. 417) End Replace the Printer Mechanism. (p. 490)

Confidential
LINES NOT SMOOTH AND RULED-LINE DEVIATION

 Symptom
 Printed lines are not smooth.
 Lines printed in double in parts
 Color deviation of part of mixed colors
1 2 3
4 5 6
Figure 4-9. Ruled-Line Deviation And Lines Not Smooth

 Cause
 Nozzle failure (nozzles missing or deflection)
 CR Scale reading failure
 Foreign matter on CR scanning lines
 Overload when CR operation
 PG right and left difference
 Adjustment value failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the paper. Change to the standard paper, or a paper without any folds or
Check that the paper surface is flat. creases.
Is a paper with a flat surface being used?  When the phenomenon is improved
Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to the paper,
1 Go to step 2
and make sure the standard paper free of any folds or
creases is used.
Go to step 2
2 • Check that the paper settings of the main unit/printer driver are appropriate. Go to step 3 If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 3.
• Make sure the print quality is set to Standard, or Quality First.
Nozzle condition is excellent? missing nozzles is as described below.
* If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles missing
(P. 133).
Check the CR Scale.  If the CR Scale is dirty
Visually check the CR Scale to confirm that it is not dirty or damaged. Clean the CR Scale with a dust-free cloth.
4 Is the CR Scale normal. Go to step 5  If there are scratches on the CR Scale
Replace the CR Scale (p. 389).
Check the CR operation  When load is applied in the CR operation
Check the following CR operation. Clean the CR Guide Frame and apply grease to it (p. 588).
* Unlock the CR Unit before the following checks (refer to 6.2.2.1 Unlocking the CR  When foreign objects are adhering on the CR Guide Frame
Unit (P. 235)) Remove the foreign object.
 Move the CR left and right while holding the belt and check that it moves smoothly. Go to step 6  When there are scratches on the CR Guide Frame
5
 Check that there is no foreign object on or damage to the CR Guide Frame. Replace the mechanical unit if there is damage on the CR
Guide Frame that may interfere with the CR operation. (p.
 Check that the CR Timing Belt is not damaged or worn out.
490)
Is there any problem with the check results of the above three points?
 If there are scratches or wear on the CR Timing Belt
Replace the CR Unit (CR Timing Belt) (p. 417).

Confidential

Check the PG
Perform the PG Adjustment (p. 559).
Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value
6 Go to step 7 If the symptom continues to occur after performing the PG
range (1.55 ±0.10 mm).
adjustment, go to step 7.
Perform the adjustments.
Perform the adjustments listed below.
1. Head angular mecha adjustment
7 2. Head angular adjustment End Replace the Printer Mechanism. (p. 490)
3. Bi-D adjustment
4. Paper skew adjustment

Confidential
PRINT SMUDGES
 Symptom
Unexpected smudges can be seen somewhere (including back side) on
printouts.
Figure 4-10. Print smudges

 Cause
 Contamination of Scanner Glass
 Contamination of Glass for ADF scanning
 Curling/waviness of the paper used
 Dirt transferred or foreign objects attached from feed path
 Dirt transferred or foreign objects attached from the printhead
 Dirt transferred from the CR Unit

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check whether printing or copying  Occurs with copying only.  Occurs with printing and copying.
1 Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. Refer to ADF/scanner trouble Go to step 2
(P. 154).
Confirm the contamination adherence. Clean the corresponding parts.
Check the items listed below to confirm that there is no dirt on the product. * If there are large ink deposits, check that there is no ink
 Check inside the product leaking.
Check that there is no noticeable dirt inside the product. If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 3.
 Check the platen
2 Check that there is no noticeable dirt on the platen. Go to step 3
 Check the feed path (roller surfaces)
Check that there is no dirt on the various feed rollers on the feed path.
 CR side surface
Check that there is no dust or ink adhered.
Are the check results OK (no dirt)?
Check the paper and settings 1. Change the paper or paper settings.
 Paper 2. Use the rubbing avoidance mode.
Check that the paper is in an appropriate state (no curling).  When the phenomenon is improved
 Settings Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to the paper or settings, and
3 Go to step 4
Check whether or not the paper settings are appropriate. make sure the appropriate paper and paper settings are used.
Are the paper status and paper settings appropriate? Also, recommend the user to use the wear (rubbing) prevention mode.
Go to step 4

Confidential

Visually check the Inksystem Assy.  When cap/wiper is dirty
Perform the following checks to make sure there is no problem in the Inksystem Assy Clean the cap surface / wiper part (p. 583).
related components.  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is confirmed
* Unlock the CR Unit before the following checks (refer to 6.2.2.1 Unlocking the CR Unit (P. Replace the Inksystem Assy (p. 378).
235))
 When the wiper part breakage / wiper operation failure is
1. Check the cap parts confirmed
Replace the Inksystem Assy (p. 378).
4 • Check that the cap surfaces are not dirty. Go to step 5
• Manually turn the gear of the Inksystem Assy, move the cap up and down, and
visually check that the nozzle surface has been appropriately capped. If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 5.
2. Check the wiper parts
• Check that there is not soiling or damage to the wiper parts.
• Manually turn the gear of the Inksystem Assy, and make sure the wiper is properly
moving to the front and backward.
Is the Inksystem Assy normal?
Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value If the symptom continues to occur after performing the PG
5 Go to step 6
range (1.55 ±0.10 mm). adjustment, go to step 6.
Check the nozzle surface of the Printhead.  When the nozzle surface of the Printhead is dirt.
Check the condition of the Printhead (nozzle surface). Clean the nozzle surface of the Printhead using a dust-free
Make sure there are no scratches or dirt in the Printhead (nozzle surface). cloth.
6 Go to step 7
 When the Printhead (nozzle surface) is damaged
Replace the Printhead (p. 403).
Check around the CR Unit Clean the bottom of the CR Unit.
Replace the Printer Mechanism.
7 Remove the CR Unit and check that there is no dirt on the bottom surface. If the symptom continues to occur, replace the Printer
(p. 490)
Make sure there is no dirt on the bottom of the CR Unit. Mechanism. (p. 490)

Confidential
BLANK PRINTOUT (BLANK PAPER EJECTED)

 Symptom
Blank paper is printed when printing.
Blank paper
Figure 4-11. Blank Printout (Blank Paper Ejected)

 Cause
 Double feeding
 Network failure
 Pickup Roller Assy (pickup/separation roller) is dirt, installed
incorrectly, worn out, or damaged.
 Head FFC failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the operation when blank pages are ejected.
Check the operation during blank paper ejection according to the procedure described
below.
 When blank pages
 Double feeding: are ejected
Two pages are ejected simultaneously; the first page is already printed, and the Go to step 2  When occurring double feeding
1 second page is blank.
 When blank pages Refer to Double feeding (P. 159).
 Blank pages are ejected: are printed
The CR Unit is not operating, and the pages are ejected. Go to step 6
 Blank pages are printed:
The CR Unit is performing the print operation (operating to the left and right), but
pages are ejected without being printed.
Check the paper 1. Change the standard paper.
1. Check whether or not using paper that is thick such as paper that has already been 2. Set the edge guide of paper cassette correctly.
printed on.  When the phenomenon is improved
2 2. Check whether or not the paper size and edge guide position are appropriate. Go to step 3 Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to the paper, and
Check if the paper used and the paper setting condition are normal. improper paper guide position, and get the paper and paper
guide position setting changed.
Go to step 3
Check the settings Change the paper settings.
Check whether or not the paper settings of the main unit and driver are appropriate.  When the phenomenon is improved
Check whether or not blank paper parts are included in the print data. Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to an erroneous
3 Go to step 4
Is the paper setting appropriate? paper setting, and get the paper setting corrected.
Go to step 4
Check the network. If printing wirelessly, check whether prints with a wired
If the data does not arrive for 5 or more minutes after the print command, blank paper is Go to step 5 connection.
4
ejected due to a timeout error. If the symptom continues to occur, contact the EPSON Service
Check whether or not blank print is occur by internal printing (status sheet, etc.). Department.
Check the Pickup Roller Assy (pickup/separation roller).  When the Pickup Roller Assy is not installed properly
Check the status of the Pickup Roller Assy according to the procedure below. Reinstall the Pickup Roller Assy properly.
 Check if the Pickup Roller Assy is installed properly.  When the rollers is dirt
 Check if the rollers of the Pickup Roller Assy is dirt. Clean the rollers.
5 Go to step 6
 Check if the rollers of the Pickup Roller Assy is worn out.  When the rollers is worn out
Make sure the Pickup Roller Assy is in the normal state. Replace the Pickup Roller Assy (p. 453) and Retard Roller
(p. 453).

Confidential

Check the nozzle check pattern. Execute the head cleaning.
Nozzle condition is excellent? missing nozzles is as described below.
* If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles missing
(P. 133).
Check the Head FFC.
Replace the Main
7 Visually check the FFC terminals to make sure they are not bent up or damaged. Replace the Head FFC.
Board Assy. (p. 328)
Check if the Printhead FFC is normal.

Confidential
ADF/SCANNER TROUBLE
 Symptom
Does not occur during printing (printing from a PC) and occurs only when
copying from the ADF or scanning glass.
 Cause
 Glass dirty
 Scanning sensor dirty
 Feed path roller dirty/deteriorated
 Feed path foreign object/damaged

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Symptom Check and measure Correspondence after confirmation

Image defect 1  ADF Unit If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the ADF/SCN
Streaks in the image Check the contamination of the ADF scan glass surface. Unit (p. 309).
[Measure] Clean the ADF scan glass surface. (If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit,
contact the EPSON Service Department.)
 SCN Unit
Check the contamination of the SCN glass surface.
[Measure] Clean the SCN glass surface.
Image defect 2 1. Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after taking measures on the left,
Some or all of an image is not scanned [Measure] Clean the glass surface of the ADF/scanning glass. replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 309).
2. Check the scanner cable connection. (If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit,
1. Check if the scanner cable is connected properly. contact the EPSON Service Department.)
[Measure] Reconnect the Scanner cable properly.
2. Check if the scanner cable is damaged.
[Measure] Replace the ADF/SCN Unit.
Image defect 3 Check the contamination of the ADF scan glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the ADF/SCN
Light, discolored [Measure] Clean the ADF scan glass surface. Unit (p. 309).
(If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit,
Image defect 4 Check that the height of the ADF is appropriate in relation to the If the ADF position is offset from the scanning glass even after replacing
Image skewed on paper scanning glass. the hinges, replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 309).
Check that the ADF is attached parallel to the scanning glass. (If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit,
Image defect 5 Check if the rollers of the LD Frame Assy are dirt or worn out. 1. If the rollers are worn out or deformed, replace it.
Image is elongating [Measure] Clean the rollers of the LD Frame Assy. 2. If the symptom continues to occur, replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 309).
Image defect 6 1. Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after taking measures on the left,
Image defects other than the above that occur [Measure] Clean the glass surface of the ADF/scanning glass. replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 309).
only when copying 2. Check the scanner cable connection. (If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit,
1. Check if the scanner cable is connected properly. contact the EPSON Service Department.)
[Measure] Reconnect the Scanner cable properly.
2. Check if the scanner cable is damaged.
[Measure] Replace the ADF/SCN Unit.

Confidential
Symptom Check and measure Correspondence after confirmation

Feed defect 1 Clean the rollers of the LD Frame Assy and the ADF Pad Assy. If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the following
Double Feeding parts.
 LD Frame Assy (p. 318)
 ADF Pad Assy (p. 318)
* If the symptom continues to occur after replacing them, replace the
ADF/SCN Unit (p. 309).
Feed defect 2 Check that there is no foreign object or damage in the ADF feed path. If a part is found to be damaged, etc. after cleaning the path, replace the
Document bending corresponding part or ADF/SCN Unit (p. 309).
Feed defect 3  Check that the ADF is closed properly. Replace the ADF/SCN Unit (p. 309).
Paper jam occurs when feeding from the ADF  Check that the height of the ADF is appropriate. (If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit,
 Clean the ADF feed path. contact the EPSON Service Department.)
 Clean the roller surface of the LD Frame Assy and the ADF Pad
Assy.

Confidential
PAPER DAMAGED OR BENT

 Symptom
 Printed paper is damaged or bent
FIGURE 4-12. PAPER DAMAGED OR BENT
 Cause
 Environment
 Paper (curled, printed etc.)
 Feed path foreign object
 Star Wheel Assy failure
 PG value abnormal (narrow)
 Ink density excessive

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the operating environment Recommend using in an appropriate environment.
Check that the operating environment is within the specifications.
1 Go to step 2
* Refer to 2.1 Product Hardware Specifications (P. 14)
Has the phenomenon occurred?
Check the paper
Make sure the appropriate paper has been used according to the procedure described
below.
 Use suitable paper.
 Check that there is no damage to the paper before it pases through.
 Use the rubbing avoidance mode.
2  Check that the paper is in an appropriate state (no curling). Go to step 3
* If the symptom continues even after using the rubbing
 Check that using suitable paper (not paper already used for printing).
avoidance mode, refer to the avoidance measures.
* When, for example, A4 paper is used cut to A5 size, the long grain becomes the short
grain so there is a tendency for edges to bend easily.
Make sure the appropriate paper has been used.
Check the feed path Remove the foreign object and then clean.
3 Go to step 4
Check that there is no damage to or foreign object on the feed path. If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 4.
Check the Star Wheel Assy Replace the Star Wheel Assy (p. 439).
4  Check that the jagged roller of the Star Wheel Assy rotates normally. Go to step 5
 Check that there are no cuts or other damage locally on the EJ Roller surface.
Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value Contact the EPSON If the symptom continues to occur after performing the PG
5
range (1.55 ±0.10 mm). Service Department. adjustment, contact the EPSON Service Department.
If the symptom continues even in the rubbing avoidance mode
1. Reduce the print density (default is -20 for duplex, but -5 or -10 from that).
Avoidance
measures 2. Increase the drying time.
3. Make sure that a high density image does not come at the trailing edge of the first
side (rotate, change the print order, etc.).

Confidential
DOUBLE FEEDING
 Symptom
 Multiple paper sheets are output at the same time.
Figure 4-13. Double Feeding
 Cause
 Environment
 Paper (curled, printed etc.)
 Settings for the main unit
 Retard roller is worn out or not installed correctly

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the operating environment. Recommend using in an appropriate environment.
Check that the operating environment is within the specifications.
1 Go to step 2
* Refer to 2.1 Product Hardware Specifications (P. 14)
Has the phenomenon occurred?
Check the paper. Use suitable paper and set paper properly.
Check the paper and paper setting status according to the procedure below.  When the phenomenon is improved
 Check that using suitable paper (not paper already used for printing, paper). Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to the paper, or
2  Check that the paper guide positions are appropriate. Go to step 3 improper paper setting, and get the paper and paper setting
 Check that the paper edges are aligned in the cassette. corrected.
Make sure the paper and paper setting are appropriate.  When the phenomenon is not improved
Go to step 3
Check the settings. Use suitable paper and set paper properly.
Check that the paper setting size and actual paper size match.  When the phenomenon is improved
Make sure the actual paper size and paper size setting are appropriate. Explain that the phenomenon is caused due to an erroneous
3 Go to step 4
paper size setting, and get the paper size setting corrected.
Go to step 4
Check the paper loading related rollers. Replace components with abnormalities as shown below.
Check the wear condition of the paper loading related rollers as shown below.  Front paper loading
 If wearing occurs in the front feed paper • Pickup Roller Assy (p. 453)
• Pickup Roller Assy Replace the Printer • Retard Roller (p. 453)
4
• Retard Roller Mechanism. (p. 490)  Rear paper loading
 If wearing occurs in the rear feed paper • Rear ASF Assy (p. 458)
• Rear ASF Assy (LD roller) If the symptom continues to occur, replace the Printer
Make sure the various rollers are normal. Mechanism (p. 490).

Confidential
THE PRODUCT CANNOT BE POWERED ON

 Symptom
The power does not turn on even if the Power button is pressed.
 Cause
 Panel Assy failure
 Relay Cable (Panel to Main) connection failure, disconnection
 Power Supply Assy failure
 Troubleshooting
Check the Relay Cable (Panel to Main)
 When the cable is not connected correctly
Check the Relay Cable (Panel to Main) according to the procedure below.
Reconnect the Relay Cable (Panel to Main) correctly.
1  Check if the Relay Cable (Panel to Main) is connected correctly. Go to step 2  When the cable is damaged
 Check if the Relay Cable (Panel to Main) is damaged. Replace the Relay Cable (Panel to Main).
Make sure there is no problem in the connection or state of the Relay Cable (Panel to If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 2.
Main).
Check with a normal panel unit.
Check by replacing the panel unit with a normal unit (with which normal operation can Replace the Panel
2 Go to step 3
be confirmed). Assy. (p. 368)
Check with a normal Power Supply Board.
Check by replacing the Power Supply Board with a normal board (with which normal Replace the Power
3 Replace the Main Board Assy. (p. 328)
operation can be confirmed). Supply Assy. (p. 345)

Confidential
4.3 Fax Troubleshooting  Output Sample
4.3.1 Outline of the FAX Troubleshooting

This material describes the information related to “Reports/Logs”, “Error (1)
Codes”, “Service Parameters”, “Basic information”, and “Troubleshooting”
based on these information that can be used to solve the problems related to (2)
FAX.
(3)
4.3.2 Reports/Logs related to FAX
4.3.2.1 FAX Communication Log
A history report of sent and received 30 fax jobs.
Settings are available for Display, Auto or Manual Print (every 30/time/off).
Codes of communication error are not displayed on the report by default To
display the error codes, set [Report Format] to [Detail].
 Output Procedure
Manual [FAX] → [(Menu)] → [FAX Report] → [FAX Log] = Select [Print]
[Setup] → [General Setting] → [FAX Settings] → [Report Settings]
Auto → [FAX Log Auto Print]
= [Off] / [On (Every 30)] / [On (Time)]
 Output Settings
[Setup] → [General Setting] → [FAX Settings] → [Report Settings]
Report Format
→ [Report Format] = [Simple] / [Detail]
Troubleshooting Fax Troubleshooting 162

Confidential
Title Report name  Indications of destination number (in priority order)

Number of pages to be reported Sender 1. Registered name in the contact list
(1) PAGE
(number of pages/total number of pages) (Send/Polling 2. Dialed telephone number
Date /Time Printed time (yyyy.mm.dd hh:mm) Recive)(*3) 3. Destination fax ID (*1)
Name Sender’s name registered to the product Receiver 1. Sender’s telephone number (when notifying number with the caller
(2) ID)(*2)
Fax Sender’s fax number registered to the product (Receive/Polling
Send)(*3) 2. Destination fax ID (*1)
Job number
Receipt No. Common to other reports and job management. NOTE 1 : Usually the destination fax ID signals (CSI/TSI/CIG) are registered with
This helps to identify the job. numbers (telephone number is used in most cases). If these are registered
Date / Time Starting time of communication with text, the registered text are displayed as they are. When registering in
this product, select [Setup] → [General Settings] → [FAX Settings] →
Sending/Receiving/Polling Sending/Polling Reception/ [Basic Settings] → [Header] → [Your Phone Number] (number, space, or
Type
PC Sending/Forwarding + only).
ID See “Indications of destination number” 2 : For a product with Caller ID, the Destination fax ID is displayed when the
Duration mm:ss caller ID is enabled ([Fax settings] → [Basic settings] → [Caller ID
display]), and the sender notifies its telephone number. If the notified
(3) Sending from memory: Number of pages of communication telephone number has been registered in the contact list, the registered
succeeded/total number of pages name is displayed on the panel of the receiver. However, the telephone
Pages
Direct sending/reception: Number of pages of communication number is used for fax log.
succeeded When a fax is sent without notification, the destination fax ID is
displayed.
 Succeeded: OK
3 : Usual settings are Sending/Polling Reception for sender, Receiving/
 Failed: Error details (Line Busy, No answer, Communication Polling sending for receiver. However if Manual send/Manual receive is
Result Error enabled, these settings may be reversed. In addition, if a fax is sent with
Line is not connected/Incorrect port connection/ [Connected telephone] or [On hook dial] and Manual Send/Manual
Cancel, etc.) Receive is turned on, the “destination fax ID” is always displayed.
Error xxx (Report Format = only when set to Detail)
Example)
Case Indications of destination number

When receive a fax through caller ID line, Sender is displayed. However, “sender’s
then response with connected telephone telephone number” is displayed other than
and perform Manual Send; “destination fax ID”.
When send a fax with a connected Receiver is displayed. However, “destination
telephone and perform Manual Send; fax ID” is displayed other than the dialed
telephone number.
When send a fax with on hook dial Receiver is displayed. However,
(Contact list/Direct dial) “destination fax ID” is displayed other than
the registered name in the list or dialed
telephone number.

Confidential
4.3.2.2 Protocol trace  Output Sample

A detailed report for the previous sent or received fax.
Settings are available for Manual Print, or Auto Print after communication by
changing the RAM Edit. (1)
(2)
If a communication does not start until send/receive operation (when it did not
enter Phase B after Phase A), the log is displayed as a blank space. (3)
 Output Procedure (4)

(5)
[FAX] → [(Menu)] → [FAX Report] → [Protocol trace]
Manual
= Select [Print]
Use Fax parameter Setting mode #006 to automatically print the log
Auto for every communication.
See “Communication Protocol trace” in Service Parameter List.
 Output Setting
Use FAX parameter setting mode #005 to save and print error
Save / Print
communication only.
error only
Use Fax parameter Setting mode #007 to save one log/ save three log/
Auto print the Protocol trace.
(1) Title etc. Same as FAX log

(2) Name, Fax Sender’s name registered to the product

Confidential
Receipt No. ~ Logs of the received faxes.

(3) Communication Description is same as Fax log.
result
Refer to Ability bit table of DIS (DTC) (P. 166) and
(4) DIS(DTC) / DCS
Ability bit table of DCS (P. 170)
Command / Response Refer to How to use command/response log (P. 174)
(5)
Log
 Viewpoint of DIS(DTS)/DCS
Before starting communication, faxes communicate their own functions on
the sending side and the receiving side, and then determine the
communication function and speed.
The receiving side fax machine transmits its own function to the sending
side fax machine by the DIS signal.
The sending fax machine receives the DIS signal from the receiving fax
machine and can use the information on the sending side and the receiving
side.
After selecting the maximum function set by the transmission side, you can
check the communication mode selected by the DCS signal
By checking the information of DIS (DTC), the contents of the capability
of the receiving side fax can check the communication mode selected by
the sending side fax by checking the information of the DCS.
The protocol monitor log is recorded and printed on only one sheet by one
communication.
If the protocol becomes long due to communication of a plurality of pages
and it does not fit on one page, the head protocol log is deleted and only the
last protocol log is recorded and printed.
Fax communications are created according to ITU, and the main ITUs
involved are T30. and T4.
DIS (DTC) DCS reads out the content of FIF (facsimile information field)
by referring to the bit allocation table of DIS (DTC) / DCS.

Confidential
 Ability bit table of DIS (DTC)

To refer to the bit allocation table and data, rearrange the following high order bits for every 2 bytes of data.
 Example of DIS　 8020C28AC480D5838018 　FCS=80 　FIF=20 C2 8A C4 80 D5 83 80 18
hex 2 0 C 2 8 A
bin 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
bit no. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
bit no. DIS/DTC data Content

1 1 Accumulation exchange Internet facsimile simple mode (TTC standard JT-T37) 0
2 On hold 0
3 Real time Internet facsimile (TTC standard JT-T38) 0
4 Third generation mobile communication network 0
5 On hold 0
6 ITU-T Recommendation V.8 ability 1 Function enabled
7 Frame size 0=256 Octet priority 1=64 Octet priority 0 ECM frame size=256
8 On Hold 0
2 9 Transfer of facsimile document 0 No standard for polling transmission
10 Receive fax operation 1 Ability
11 Data Signal Speed 0000=2.4kbps V.27terFB 0010=Unused 0001=Unused 0011=Unused 0 V.27terFB
12 0100=V.27ter 0100=On hold 0101=On hold 0111=On hold 0 *When the V8 mode (S-G3) starts, this
1000=V.29 1010=Unused 1001=Unused 1001=Unused bit becomes invalid (0000).
13 1100=V.27ter,V29 1110=Unused 1101=V.27ter,V29,V17 1111=On hold 0
14 0
15 Line density (delicate FINE) R8 x 7.7 l/mm or 200 x 200 dpi 1 Ability
16 Encoding method (MR) 0 Ability
3 17 Recording width ability 00=A4 10=A4/B4 0 A4/B4/A3
18 01=A4/B4/A3 11=Invalid 0
19 Ability to record length 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4(297mm) and B4(364mm) 0 No limit
20 01=No limit 11=Invalid 1
21 The receiver's minimum scanning time capability 000=20/20ms 100=5/5ms 101=40/20ms 1 20/20ms
22 001=40/40ms 011=10/5ms 111=0/0ms 1
010=10/10ms 110=2-/10,s
23 1
24 Extended field 1 Extension

Confidential

hex C 4 8 0 D 5
bin 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
bit no. 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41

4 25 On hold 0
26 Uncompressed mode 0
27 Error correction mode (ECM) 1 Ability
28 Set to 0 0
29 On hold 0
30 On hold 0
31 Encoding method (MMR T.6) 1 Ability
32 Extended field 1 Extended
5 33 Invalid field signal capability 0
34 Multiple Polling Capability (DIS) Multiple polling instructions (DIC) 0
35 Polling sub-address capability (DIS) PSA Polling sub -address transmission (DTC) 0
36 Encoding method (T.43) 0
37 Plain interleave 0
38 32 k ADPCM speech coding (TTC JT-G726) 0
39 Hold for using the extended audio encoded. 0
6 41 Line density (high delicate / S-FINE) R8 x 15.4 l/mm 1 Ability
42 Line density(300) 300 x 300 dpi 0
43 Line density (Ultrahigh delicate / E-FINE) R16 x 15.4 l/mm or 400 x 400 dpi 1 Ability
44 Inch system resolution selection 0
45 Milli-system resolution selection 1 Milli-system resolution selection
46 Minimum scan line time capability at high linear density 0:T15.4=T7.7 1:T15.4=1/2 T7.7 0
47 Selected professional ability (DIS) Select polling sending (DTC) 1 Ability

Confidential

hex 8 3 8 0 1 8
bin 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
bit no. 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

7 49 Sub-address Ability 1 Ability
50 Password / sending identification ability (DIS) Password sending (DTC) 1 Ability
51 Preparation for data file transfer (polling) 0
52 On hold 0
53 Binary file transfer (BFT) 0
54 Document transfer mode (DTM) 0
55 EDIFACT transfer mode (EDI) 0
8 57 Basic transfer mode (DTM) 0
58 On hold 0
59 Preparation for transferring (polling) documents in character / mixed mode 0
60 Character mode 0
61 On hold 0
62 mixed mode 0
63 On hold 0
9 65 Processable Mode 26 0
66 Digital network capability 0
67 Full duplex /half duplex capability 0:Half duplex control 1: Half duplex/full duplex control 0
68 Encoder mode (JPEG) 1 Ability
69 Full color mode 1 Ability
70 Set to 0 0
71 12 bit pixel / element 0

Confidential

hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

10 73 No sub-sampling (1:1:1)
74 Nonstandard irradiation light
75 Non-standard color gamut range
76 North American(215.9 ×279.4 mm) letter capacity
77 North American (215.9 × 355.6 mm) legal ability
78 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) basic ability
79 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) Optional L = 0 ability
80 Extended field

Confidential
 Ability bit table of DCS

To refer to the bit allocation table and data, rearrange the following high order bits for every 2 bytes of data.
 Example of DCS 830042F844 FCS=83 FIF=00 42 F8 44
hex 0 0 4 2 F 8
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
bit no. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

1 1 Accumulation exchange Internet facsimile simple mode (TTC standard JT-T37) 0
2 On hold 0
3 Real time Internet facsimile (TTC standard JT-T38) 0
4 Third generation mobile communication network 0
5 On hold 0
6 Invalid 0
7 Invalid 0
8 On hold 0
2 9 Set to 0 0 No polling transmission standard
10 Received fax data 1 Ability
11 Data signal speed 0000=2.4kbps V.27ter 0010=Invalid 0001=14.4kbps V.17 0011=On hold 0 V.27terFB
12 0100=4.8kbps V.27ter 0100=Invalid 0101=12kbps V.17 0111=On hold 0 *When the V8 mode (S-G3) starts, this
1000=9.6kbps V.29 1010=On hold 1001=9.6kbps V.17 1001=On hold bit becomes invalid (0000).
13 1100=7.2kbps V.29 1110=On hold 1101=7.2kbps V.17 1111=On hold 0
14 0
15 Line density (delicate FINE) R8 x 7.7 l/mm or 200 x 200 dpi 1 R8 x 7.7 l/mm
16 Encoding method (MR) 0
3 17 Recording width ability 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4/B4 0 A4
18 01=A4/B4/A3 11=Invalid 0
19 Ability to record length 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4(297mm) and B4(364mm) 0 No limit
20 01=No limit 11=Invalid 1
21 The receiver's minimum scanning time 000=20/20ms 100=5/5ms 101=40/20ms 1 0ms
22 (Line density = Std/Fine) 001=40/40ms 011=10/5ms 111=0/0ms 1
010=10/10ms 110=20/10ms
23 1

Confidential

hex 4 4
bin 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41

4 25 On hold 0
26 Uncompressed mode 0
27 Error correction mode (ECM) 1 ECM
28 Frame size 0= 256 oct 1=-64 oct 0 Frame size 256 oct
29 On hold 0
30 On hold 0
31 Encoding method (MMR T.6) 1 MMR
32 Extended field 0 Non Extended
5 33 Invalid field signal capability
34 Set to 0
35 Set to 0
36 Encoding method (T.43)
37 Plain interleave
38 32 k ADPCM audio coding (TTC JT-G726)
39 Hold for using the extended audio encoded
40 Extended field
6 41 Line density (high delicate / S-FINE) R8 x 15.4 l/mm
42 Line density(300) 300 x 300 dpi
43 Line density (Ultrahigh delicate / E-FINE) R16 x 15.4 l/mm or 400 x 400 dpi
44 Select resolution type 0: inch system resolution 1:milimater resolution
45 unused
46 unused
47 Set to 0
48 Extended field

Confidential

hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

7 49 Send Sub-address
50 Sending function identification sending
51 Set to 0
52 On hold
53 Binary file transfer (BFT)
54 Document transfer mode (DTM)
55 EDIFACT transfer mode (EDI)
56 Extended field
8 57 Basic transfer mode (DTM)
58 On hold
59 Set to 0
60 Character mode
61 On hold
62 mixed mode
63 On hold
64 Extended field
9 65 Processable Mode 26
66 Digital network capability
67 Full duplex / half duplex capability 0:half duplex control 1:full duplex control
68 Encoder mode (JPEG)
69 Full color mode
70 Huffman code table for preferential use
71 12 bit pixel / element
72 Extended field

Confidential

hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

10 73 No sub-sampling (1:1:1)
74 Nonstandard irradiation light
75 Non-standard color gamut range
76 North American(215.9 ×279.4 mm) letter capacity
77 North American (215.9 × 355.6 mm) legal ability
78 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) basic ability
79 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) Optional L = 0 ability
80 Extended field

Confidential
 How to use command/response log

The following explains the T.30 Protocol commands/responses in fax log.
Communication procedure can be checked in details.
Table 4-4. Commands/responses log_ Sample Example (Type = Sending)
Time Commands/
Direction Data Description
(10ms) responses name
01136 -> CSI 402020202020202020343332312035353520323430 Received a caller subscriber ID (numeric ID).
The value of sender’s number registered in the receiver is transmitted.
The number is entered with ASCII character codes. (Same as TSI)
FCF=40
FIF=020202020202020343332312035353520323430
(ASCII character codes 20=space(S), 30 to 39=0 to 9, 2b=+)
ASCII conversion >“SSSSSSSS1234S555S240”
If the order is reversed, >”042 555 1234 “
01136 -> DIS 8020C28AC480D5838018 Received a digital identification signal. (receiving capability)
01257 <- TSI 432020202020202020202031333231313233353330 Sent a transmitting subscriber ID (numeric ID).
The value of sender’s number registered in the sender is transmitted.
The number is entered with ASCII character codes. (Same as CSI)
FCF=43
FIF=2020202020202020202031333231313233353330
(ASCII character codes 20=space (S), 30 to 39=0 to 9, 2b=+)
ASCII conversion >“SSSSSSSSSS1321123530”
If the order is reversed, >”0353211231 “
01265 <- DCS 830042F844 Received a digital identification signal. (Sending mode).
<- TCF Sent a training signal (V17/V29/V27ter only)
01268 -> CFR 84 Received a confirmation for receive signal.
01331 <- PIX FF Received the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) /MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 0(E:0)] The communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol) : 33.6kbps(V.34)

Encoding method : MMR
Paper width : A4
Resolution : 8x7.7 (Fine)
Number of line (number of error line): 0(E:0) * when ECM = OFF

Confidential

Time Commands/
03130 <- PPS-EOP BF2F0000FD Received a end of procedure signal (the 1st page finished without next page).
FCF=BF2F?FIF=0000FD (00=1st page, 00=1st block, FD=254 frames)
If the number of frame exceeds 256, separates the page with PPS-NULL to send.
The frame size of PPS-NULL is always FF.
PPS-MPS is a signal of ECM mode. MPS is used in non-ECM mode.
03131 -> PPR BC00000000F8FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Since there was an error in received PIX, specifies the error frame and requests
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF retransmission. (A signal of ECM mode)
How to specify the error frame: Regard FFFF as one unit to represent 1 to 16 frames.
16 sets of FFFF mean 256 frames in total.
Since 254 frames were sent, entry 1 to the 255th to 256th frame.
Entry 1 to the reception error frame. The request starts from 0000 0000 F8FFF FFFF.
This means that 35 frames (1st to 35th) are succeeded, and 259 frames
(the 36th to 254th) are required to retransmit.
03239 <- PIX FF Received a frame retransmission request for the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) / MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 0(E:0)] Communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol) :33.6kbps(V.34)
Paper width : A4
Number of line (number of error line) : 0(E:0) *. when ECM = OFF
04770 <- PPS-EOP BF2F0000DA Received a end of procedure signal (the 1st page finished without next page).
FCF=BF2F FIF=0000DA (00=1st page, 00=1st block, DD = 219 frames)
04771 -> PPR BC0000000000000000000000F0FFFFFFFFFFFF Since there was an error in received PIX, specifies the error frame and requests
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF retransmission. (A signal of ECM mode)
How to specify error frames: Regard FFFF as one unit to represent 1 to 16 frames.
16 sets of FFFF mean 256 frames in total.
Entry 1 to the reception error frame.
The request starts from 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00F0 FFFF.
This means that 57 frames (36th to 92nd) are succeeded, and 162 frames
(the 93rd to 254th) are required to retransmit.

Confidential

Time Commands/
03239 <- PIX FF Received the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) / MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 960(E:1)] Communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol) :33.6kbps (V.34)
Paper width : A4
Number of line (number of error line) : 960(E:1)
　⇒ An error occurs after receiving the 960th line.
06612 <- DCN FB The communication became impossible due to the error. It ended in failure by
receiving a disconnect command from the sender.
PROTOCL V.34 Displays the protocol set when starting communication (V.34/V.17/V.29)
SPEED 33.600Bps (3429) Displays the speed of the last communication.
Symbol rates are shown in ()
CODING MMR Displays the encoding method set when starting communication (MMR/MR/MH)

Confidential
 Outline of the Command Response Log

Table 4-5. Outline of the command response log
Item Content
Time (10ms) The time when sent/received the signal. The difference of both time means the time of the signal.
Example) 02467 -> PIX
03289 -> PPS-MPS 03289 – 02467 = 822 x 10 ms = approx. 8.2 s (time of image signal)
Direction Sending or Receiving direction for signals. This differs from that of the sending or receiving in fax communication.
When sending a fax, signals (including image signal) and response signal become sending and receiving respectively.
These are reversed when receiving a fax.
Command/Response Name Defined in the first 2 digits or 4 digits of data in the FCF (Facsimile Control Field).
See “1.4.5.2 Abbreviation list of fax communication (fax recommendation T.30)”.
Data Data is composed of FCF (Facsimile Control Field) and FIF (Facsimile Information Field).
The first 2 digits (8 bits) or 4 digits (16 bits) stands for FCF, the latter means FIF.
Example 1) 03289 -> PPS-MPS?BF4F000031
FCF=BF4F=PPS-MPS
FIF=00=PC (page counter) page 1 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255= add 1 to make it 1 to 256 pages)
00=BC(block counter) Block in the page is 1 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255= add 1 to make it 1 to 256 blocks)
31=FC(flame counter) number of frame 50 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255=add 1 to make it 1 to 256 frames)
1 block consists of 256 frames.
If the number of frame exceeds 256,separates the page with PPS-NULL to send.
Example 2) PPS-NULL BF00xxxxFF

FCF=BF00
FIF=FIF of the first PPS-NULL in the 1st page:0000FF=1st page, 1st block, 256th frame
FIF=FIF of the 2nd PPS-NULL in the 1st page:0001FF=1st page, 2nd block, 256th frame
FIF=FIF of the first PPS-NULL in the 2nd page:0100FF=2nd page, 2nd block, 256th frame

Confidential
4.3.2.3 FAX Function Check Report  Output Sample

Self check of Fax function is available.
Perform Fax Function Check to check the basic items of fax function and line (1)
connection.
(2)
 Check Procedure
(3)
[FAX] → [(Menu)] → [FAX Settings] → [Check FAX Connection]
Manual
= Perform the check, then select [Print] to print the result.
NOTE : Remote check is also available using FAX Utility.

(4)
(5)
(1) Title etc. Same as FAX log.

(2) Name, Fax Same as FAX log.
For the description of check item, see “Fax Function
Check Operation flow”.
(3) Check Items
“5. Dial Tone Detection” is also checked even when it
is disabled in Fax Settings.
(4) Status Displays the check result.
(5) Solution Displays the remedy.

Confidential
4.3.3 FAX Error Code 4.3.3.2 Error code list
4.3.3.1 Overview Error Code

Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
There are 2 types of error codes; 1) job’s error codes that are displayed in job communication Job history
report
history, 2) Fax communication’s error codes that are shown in fax report.
Memory Full/Page Full (100 pages)
Failure
occurs during accumulation of TX
Job’s error code Error Codes related to FAX 201
transmitted drafts.
Displayed in job history. Displayed in fax related report (such Failure
Display Insufficient Memory Full/Page Full (100 pages)
as fax log, communication result RX C
position memory 201 occurs during reception.
report).
Failure
Unit Job Fax Communication No tone
203
Target All jobs (Fax/Scan/Copy/Print) Fax job only Failure
Speaking
Format A 3 digit number Text or 3 alphanumeric characters 204
Before starting fax communication (Phase A, line connected): The same Failure
No response
contents of job and fax communication are displayed with different codes. 205
Remark After starting fax communication (Phase B or later): “Failure 202” is Port Failure
displayed for all jobs, “communication procedure error” is shown in fax inversion 206
communication. No circuit Failure
connection 207
During sequential broadcast,
Failure transmission to some destination
TX
208 failed from among multiple
destinations.
Failure Received document length exceeds
012 TX C
202 the set value
Failure (Modem): Data sending end error
212 RX/TX
202
Failure An MCF is not sent after receiving
220 RX D
202 data
Failure T1 timer timeout
400 TX B
202
Failure Received a DCN after sending DCS.
401 TX B
202
Failure Received a DCN during sending the
402 TX B
202 phase B.

Confidential
Error Code Error Code

Result of Error description TX/RX Phase Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
communication Job history communication Job history
report report
Failure Receiver dose not have polling RX Failure Received a DCN after sending DIS
403 B 427 RX B
202 sending capability. (POL) 202
Failure No response after sending DCS. Failure (Modem): Frame length error
404 TX B 433 RX/TX B,D
202 202
Failure Fall back is not possible in sending. Failure (Modem): Frame wait timeout
405 TX B 434 RX/TX B,D
202 202
Failure A DCN is sent after receiving DCS/ RX/TX Failure Received a DCN after sending CFR/
406 B 436 RX C
202 DTC. (POL) 202 FTT
Failure No response or received a DCN Failure A DCN is sent after receiving DCS/ RX/TX
407 TX D 438 B
202 after sending Postcommand. 202 DTC. (POL)
Failure Received a RTN. Failure Training error occurs when
408 TX D 459 RX C
202 202 receiving PIX.
Failure Received a PIN. Failure Number of error line exceeds the
409 TX D 490 RX C
202 202 limit value when receiving PIX.
Failure Received a DCN during receiving Failure (Modem): Timeout during EOL
410 RX D 494 RX C
202 phase D. 202
Failure Received a DCN after sending RX Failure Carrier disconnection during
411 B 495 RX C
202 DTC. (POL) 202 receiving phase D
Failure Cannot receive DSN after sending Failure (Modem): Data sending start error
412 RX B 496 TX B,C
202 FTT. 202
Failure No response after sending DTC. RX Failure (V.34) Modem inconsistency error V.34
414 B 501 B
202 (POL) 202 RX/TX
Failure No document for polling sending. TX Failure (V.34) Primary channel end error V.34
415 B 502 C
202 (POL) 202 RX/TX
Failure Cannot receive Postcommand Failure (V.34) Control channel end error V.34
416 RX D 503 B,C,D
202 202 RX/TX
Failure Sent RTN Failure (V.34) Polling sending request is RX
417 RX D 504 B
202 202 rejected in step V.8 (POL)
Failure T1 timer timeout Failure (V.34) Rejected the polling sending TX
420 RX B 505 B
202 202 request in step V.8 (POL)
Failure Settings of DIS/DTC are disabled. Failure (ECM) No response or received a
422 TX B 540 TX D
202 202 DCN after sending CTC

Confidential
Error Code
Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
communication Job history
report
Failure (ECM) No response or received a

541 TX D
202 DCN after sending EOR
Failure (ECM) No response or received a
542 TX D
202 DCN after sending RR
Failure (ECM) T5 timer timeout
543 TX D
202
Failure (ECM) Sent DCN after sending
544 TX D
202 EOR.
Failure (ECM) (Modem): Timeout between
550 RX C
202 frames
Failure (ECM) An ERR is sent after
554 TX D
202 receiving EOR.
Failure The receiver dos not have F code
580 TX B
202 (password) capability.
Failure The receiver (polling sending) does
RX
582 202 not have F code (password) B
(POL)
capability.
Failure SUB/SID or SEP/PWD does not RX/TX
826 B
202 match. (POL)

Confidential
4.3.4 Telephone Line Check Modes Related to FAX 1-3. After entering the ID number, press the [#] button, and make sure the
following confirmation screen appears.
In this product, the “Line Measurement Mode” is provided as a function for
checking the telephone line status. UP:[2] / DOWN:[8]
SHIFT:[6] / Fin:[#]
C H E C K By using this function, the product can be used as a simple
*****
P O IN T oscilloscope.
OK:FIN Retry:SHIFT
4.3.4.1 Line Measurement Mode Startup Method

1. Start the “FAX Maintenance Mode”. 1-4. On the confirmation screen, press the [#] button, and make sure the
product is running in the “Authentication Mode”.
1-1. Press and hold down the power button while pressing the [#] button
from the power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD. Authentication Mode
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
UP:[2] / DOWN:[8]
SHIFT:[6] / Fin:[#] 1. FAX Support Mode
2. FAX Maintenance Mode
1-5. With the [2][8] buttons, select [FAX Maintenance Mode], and then
press the [#] button.
1-2. Enter ID number.
Enter the ID number according to the following operation method. Authentication Mode
 Operating procedure Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
• Number input (move in ascending order): [2] button
1. FAX Support Mode
• Number input (move in descending order): [8] button 2. FAX Maintenance Mode
• Input digit shift: [6] button
• Execute: [#] button
C H E C K Enter “48938” when starting the FAX Maintenance

P O IN T Mode.

Confidential
2. Start the “Line Measurement Mode”. 4.3.4.2 Confirmation method for each step of Line Measurement Mode
2-1. With the [2][8] buttons, select [Line Measurement Mode], and then C H E C K  After starting the Line Measurement Mode, perform
press the [#] button. P O IN T check according to the following steps:
FAX Maintenance Mode 1. No-line Voltage Check
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8] (Voltage check when the line is connected)
1. Line Measurement Mode
2. Line Voltage (Onhook)
2. FAX Parameter Setting (Voltage check during on-hook when the line is
connected)
3. Line Voltage (Offhook)
(Voltage check during off-hook when the line is
connected)
2-2. The following preparation screen appears. Wait for the screen to
switch. 4. Line Status DT/BT
(Dial tone/busy tone status check)
Preparation the select mode 5. Line Status IR
(Call signal status check)
Please wait. 6. EXT Voltage (Offhook)
(Voltage check during off-hook when an external
telephone is connected)
 To skip a check item, press the * button on the screen in
each step.
 The confirmation results in the Line Measurement Mode
can be checked in a list after the end of all items. Also,
data can be saved by using an external memory (USB
memory).
 If the following settings are selected, the Line
Measurement Mode cannot be properly checked.
While checking, temporarily change the following settings
to a numeric value other than those below.
• Calling frequency = “0”
• Number display support = “ON”

Confidential
1. No-line Voltage Check (Line Voltage Check when the Line is Not 2. Line Voltage (Onhook)
Connected) (Line voltage check during on-hook when the line is connected)
1-1. The following screen appears after the “Line Measurement Mode” is 2-1. The “Line Voltage (Onhook)” screen shown below appears.
started.
FAX Line Measurement
FAX Line Measurement 2. Line Voltage (Onhook)
1.No-Line Voltage Check
Please contact the line and
Please remove the line and push “Run”.
push “Run”.
Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
Figure 4-16. Line Voltage (Onhook) Work Procedure (1)
Figure 4-14. No-line Measurement Check Work Procedure (1) 2-2. Connect the telephone line to the Line port, and then press the [#]
1-2. Remove the telephone line from the Line port, and then press the [#] button.
button.
2-3. The line voltage check results are displayed as shown below.*1
FAX Line Measurement 2. Line Voltage (Onhook)
1.No-Line Voltage Check Now measuring...
Now measuring... 48.0 [V]
0.0 [V] If you want to go to next step,
If you want to go to next step, push “Run”.
push “Run”.
Run:[#]
Run:[#]
Figure 4-17. Line Voltage (Onhook) Work Procedure (2)
Figure 4-15. No-line Measurement Check Work Procedure (2) 2-4. Press the # button and proceed to the check in the next step.
1-4. Press the [#] button and proceed to the check in the next step.
C H E C K The # button must be pressed two to three seconds after the
P O IN T line voltage fluctuation has stabilized, or when the fluctuation
is more or less understood if it continues.
*1: The values shown on the screen are for reference.

Confidential
4. Line Status (DT/BT) (Dial tone/busy tone status check)

(Line voltage check during off-hook when the line is connected) In this step, the two states of dial tone and busy tone are
C H E C K
3-1. The “Line Voltage (Offhook)” screen shown below appears. P O IN T checked and recorded.
The recording of the status check results is performed when
the # button is pressed in the respective status.
Since the dial tone shifts to busy tone after a fixed time has
Please push “Run”.
elapsed, note that if recording is not performed during the
dial tone, the check results cannot be correctly recorded.
4-1. Next, the “Line Status (DT/BT)” screen shown below appears.
Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
4. Line Status (DT/BT)
Figure 4-18. Line Voltage (Offhook) Work Procedure (1)

Please push “Run”
3-2. Make sure the telephone line is connected, and then press the [#] button.

3. Line Voltage (Offhook) Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
Now measuring... Figure 4-20. Line Status (DT/BT) Work Procedure (1)
6.0 [V]
4-2. Press the [#] button, and then perform the DT (dial tone) status check.
If you want to go to next step,
push “Run”.
Run:[#]
Figure 4-19. Line Voltage (Offhook) Work Procedure (2)

C H E C K The [#] button must be pressed after two to three seconds

P O IN T since the line voltage fluctuation has stabilized, or when the
fluctuation is more or less understood if it continues.

Confidential
4-3. When the dial tone status check results appear as shown in the screen 4-4. Next, the following screen appears.
below, press the [#] button.*1 The dial tone shifts to busy tone, and make sure the numeric value
shown on the screen changes.*1
C H E C K  The [#] button must be pressed when the fluctuation of the
P O IN T numeric value stabilizes and before the shift to the busy tone. C H E C K If the signal level is too high during the busy tone, “Lv:
(While the shift from the dial tone to the busy tone P O IN T Too high” is displayed.
depends on the telephone switchboard, it normally
switches in around 20 to 30 seconds.)
 When the dial tone continues to be heard,
“On:Continuous” is displayed. 4. Line Status (BusyTone)
 If the signal level is too high during the dial tone, “Lv:
Now measuring...
Too high” is displayed. Lv : -20.0 [dBm]
On : 500 [ms]
FAX Line Measurement Off : 500 [ms]
4. Line Status (DialTone)
When you save the BT Info,
Now measuring... push “Run”.
Lv : -20.0 [dBm] Then you go to next step.
On : Continuous [ms]
Off : ----- [ms] Run:[#]
When you save the DT Info, Figure 4-23. Line Status (DT/BT) Work Procedure (4)
push “Run”.
Run:[#]
Figure 4-21. Line Status (DT/BT) Work Procedure (2)
In the case of an intermittent dial tone of PBX, the display is as shown below.
4. Line Status (DialTone)
Now measuring...
Lv : -20.0 [dBm]
On : 120 [ms]
Off : 130 [ms]
When you save the DT Info,
push “Run”.
Run:[#]
Figure 4-22. Line Status (DT/BT) Work Procedure (3) *1: The values shown on the screen are for reference.

Confidential
5. Line Status (IR) (Call signal status check) 6. EXT Voltage (Offhook)
(Voltage check during off-hook when an external telephone is
5-1. Next, the “Line Status (IR)” screen shown below appears.
connected)
6-1. Next, the “EXT Voltage (Offhook)” screen shown below appears.
5. Line Status (IR)
Please push “Run” and call it. 6. EXT voltage (Offhook)
If you use ext-telephone,

Please connect the telephone.
And pick up the handset,
then push “Run”.
Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
Figure 4-24. Line Status (IR) Work Procedure (1) Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
5-2. Press the [#] button and make a call to the telephone number of the Figure 4-26. EXT Voltage (Offhook) Work Procedure (1)
Printer FAX.
6-2. Connect the telephone to the EXT port of the product, and press the [#]
5-3.Make sure the check results appear as shown in the screen below.*1 button when the receiver has been lifted.
FAX Line Measurement 6-3.Next, the check results are displayed as shown below.*1
5. Line Status (IR)
Now measuring...
6. EXT Voltage (Offhook)
Freq : 16.0 [Hz]
On : 1000 [ms] Now measuring...
Off : 2000 [ms] 6.0 [V]
If you want to go to next step.
If you want to go to next step,
stop calling and push “Run”.
hang up and push “Run”.
Run:[#]
Figure 4-25. Line Status (IR) Work Procedure (2) Run:[#]
5-4. Press the [#] button to end the call, and then proceed to the check in the Figure 4-27. EXT Voltage (Offhook) Work Procedure (2)
next step.
6-4. Press the [#] button and place the receiver.
C H E C K The [#] button must be pressed after two to three seconds

P O IN T since the line voltage fluctuation has stabilized, or when the
fluctuation is more or less understood if it continues.

Confidential
7. List of check results 8. Saving the check results

After the check is complete in all steps, the list table of check results shown  The data is saved in the USB memory as shown below.
C H E C K
below appears. P O IN T • Data save format: Text format (.txt)
“Skipped” is displayed for items that were skipped. • File name: LM_RESULT yyymmddhhmmss.TXT
C H E C K
P O IN T (The date and time of saving appears after
LM_RESULT)
 If there is no USB memory, record the check results
manually.
7-1. The check results screen (first screen) is displayed.
Press the [*] button and proceed to the next screen.  If you press the # button without connecting a USB
memory, “Fail” is displayed.
7-2. The check results screen (second screen) is displayed. (After “Fail” is displayed, you can connect a USB memory
To proceed to the next step, press the [#] button, and to return to the and retry.)
check results screen (first screen), press the [*] button.
8-1. Connect the USB memory from the screen shown below, and then
FAX Line Measurement FAX Line Measurement press the [#] button.
Result Result
No-Line : **.** - **.** [V] IR Freq : FAX Line Measurement
Line (OnHk) : **.** - **.** [V] IR-On :
Line (OffHk) : Skipped IR-Off : Save Result (USB)
DT Lv : ****** [dBm] EXT (OffHk) :
DT-On : Continuous Please connect the USB-Memory,
DT-Off : Skipped then push “Run”
BT Lv : Too high If you want to go to next step.
BT-On : ****** [ms] push “Run”.
BT-Off : ****** [ms]
NextPage:[*] Run:[#] / PrePage:[*] Run:[#] / Skip:[*]

Figure 4-28. Display of Check Results Screens
Figure 4-29. Check Results Storage - Work Procedure (1)

Confidential
8-2. When the screen shown below appears, the storage of check results in  Sample stored check data
the USB memory is complete.
No-Line : 0.0 - 0.0 [V]
Line (OnHk) : 48.0 - 48.0 [V]
Save Result (USB)
Line (OffHk) : 6.0 - 6.0 [V]
Success!
DT Lv : -20.0 [dBm]
DT-On : Continuous
If you want to go to next step. DT-Off : ------- [ms]
Push “Run”
BT Lv : -20.0 [dBm]
BT-On : 　500 [ms]
Run:[#] BT-Off : 500 [ms]
IR Freq : 16.0 [Hz]
Figure 4-30. Check Results Storage - Work Procedure (2) IR-On : 1000 [ms]
8-3. Press the [#] button and proceed to the End screen. IR-Off : 2000 [ms]
8-4. On the End screen, press the [Power] button to end “FAX Line EXT(OffHk) : 6.0 - 6.0 [V]
Measurement”.
Finish Figure 4-32. Sample stored check data
Push “Power” to turn off.
Figure 4-31. Check Results Storage - Work Procedure (3)

Confidential
4.3.5 FAX Service Parameter  Make sure not to change the parameter before identifying
To support by country or trouble, this product is equipped with the service the phenomenon and cause of the trouble.
parameters in addition to user mode parameters. Make sure to identify the phenomenon and cause of the trouble before
changing the parameter. Otherwise, the essential trouble may be hidden
Start the “FAX Maintenance Mode” from the special mode to change settings that result in recurrence the trouble or cause of another problem.
with the service parameters. According to the explanation in 4.3.7.1 Fax troubleshooting basics (→P.
210), perform in the following procedure.
4.3.5.1 Outline of setting change in FAX Maintenance Mode • Step1: Check the symptom
• Step2: Identify the cause
The following shows the procedure for settings change in FAX Maintenance • Step3: Correction
Mode. When the identification of the cause is difficult, check the symptom as
accurately as possible to acquire setting information of the product, then
1). Enter “FAX Parameter Mode”. contact the EPSON Service Department.
2). Start “FAX Parameter Settings”.  Since the parameters are different from the products of
other types, do not use the RM-Edit mode in this product.
3). Select the item to be changed, then input the value.
Change the parameters after checking the setting items from “FAX Parameter
4). Press the [Power] button to turn off the power. Setting”.
 Initialize the FAX Service Parameter Setting
While the items for which the settings were changed in the user parameters
are initialized from “Return to initial settings” → “Fax settings”, the items
changed in the service parameters are not initialized.
The items changed in the service parameters are initialized from “Return to
initial settings” → “All settings”, but at the same time, the settings other than
FAX and the address book information are also initialized.
Initialize the items changed in the service parameters from “FAX Support
Mode” → “FAX All Data Initial”.
(In such a case, the address information is not initialized. However, note that
the jobs and images in the FAX (such as the jobs in the Inbox, the documents
waiting to be collected, and the jobs waiting to be executed) will be
initialized.

Confidential
4.3.5.2 Parameter changing procedure 1-4.Push the [#] button on confirmation screen, and confirm that
“Authentication Mode” is started.
1. Star the “FAX Maintenance Mode”.
Authentication Mode
1-1.From Power Off Condition, push the [#] button and [Power] button Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
until the message is displayed on Panel LCD.
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]] 1. FAX Support Mode
SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#] 2. FAX Maintenance Mode
1-5. Select the “FAX Maintenance Mode”, and push the [#] button.
Authentication Mode
1-2.Input the ID Number by the following operation method. Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
Operation method _
1. FAX Support Mode
• Number input (move in ascending order) : [2] button 2. FAX Maintenance Mode
• Number input (move in descending order) : [8] button
• Input digit shift 　　 : [6] button
• Execute : [#] button
C H E C K Enter “48938” when starting the FAX Maintenance

P O IN T Mode.
1-3.Push the [#] button after input the ID number, and confirm that
following screen is displayed on panel LCD.
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]]
SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#]
*****
OK:FIN Retry:SHIFT

Confidential
2. Start the “FAX Parameter Settings” 3. Select the changing item, and enter the setting number.
2-1. Select the “FAX Parameter Setting”, and push [#] button. Enter the number of changing item (3 digit), and push the [#] button.
FAX Maintenance Mode
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8] C H E C K  If “---” is displayed on the right side of the number of
P O IN T changing number (3 digit), it is an item with no
parameter assignment.
1. Line Measurement Mode
2. FAX Parameter Settings  There are the following two types of setting change
items, and the changing method is different.
• Parameter of selection type : Select Setting value
• Parameter of input type : Enter Setting value
Regarding detail of changing method, refer to the

2-2.Following screen is displayed on Panel LCD. next pages.
Waiting until the screen is changed. (About 1 minute)
Preparing the selected Mode
Please Wait
FAX Parameter Setting
[000]
000 PARAMLIST PRINT
001 RAMEDIT PRINT
002 ---
003 ---
004 ---
005 PTCL LOG ON ERROR
006 PTCL LOG AUTO PRINT
007 PTCL LOG MULTI SAVE
008 RPT FWD/SAVE
009 RPT FWD/ADDR
Select: [0-9] or [:]] / Enter:[#]

Confidential
 Example of setting change in selection type parameter 3. The following complete message is displayed.
 Initial setting value of “DIAL TONE DETECT” is changing from [On] when changing the parameter setting continuously, push the [#] button
to [Off] condition. and move to the parameter select screen.
When finish the parameter setting, push the [Power] button and turn
1. Input the applicable item’s number (060), and push the [#] button.
off the printer.
Input number [060]
060 DIAL TONE DETECT 060 DIAL TONE DETECT
Value after Current: Off
061 DT DET TIME
062 DT OFF IGNR TIME change
063 DT OFF IGNR TIME (PBX)
064 DT OFF PRE-PAUSE TIME
065 ---
066 --- Parameter is set
067 ---
068 --- Back to Parameter List: [#]
069 --- Finish: [Power]
Select:[0-9] or [*] / Enter:[#]
2. Setting change screen is displayed.

Select the “01. Off” by [*] button, and push the [#] button.
060 DIAL TONE DETECT

Current state Current: On
Select New Value

[00]
Selection items 00. On
01. Off
Select:[0-9] or[*] / Enter:[#]

Confidential
 Example of setting change in input type parameter 3. The following complete message is displayed.
 Initial setting value of “TX SIGNAL LEVEL” is changing from when changing the parameter setting continuously, push the [#] button
[-10dBm] to [-15dBm]. and move to the parameter select screen.
When finish the parameter setting, push the [Power] button and turn
1. Input the applicable item’s number, and push the [#] button.
off the printer.
Input number [120] 120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL
120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL Value after Current: 15[-dBm]
121 RX SIGNAL DET LEVEL change
122 TX EQUALIZER
123 RX EQUALIZE
124 ---
125 --- Parameter is set
126 ---
127 ---
128 --- Back to Parameter List:[#]
129 --- Finish: [Power]
Select:[0-9] or [*] / Enter:[#]
2. Setting change screen is displayed.

Input the setting value (15) by number key, and push the [#] button.

120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL
Current state Current: 10 [-dBm]
Input New Value
Input setting [ 15] ( 0 - 15 )

value
Settable range of
setting value Input: [0-9] / Set:[#]

Confidential
4.3.5.3 FAX Service Parameter Table

Table 4-6. FAX Service Parameter Table
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Initial value Unit Remark
On Off
000 PARAMLIST PRINT
Off
On
001 RAMEDIT Off
Off
002 ---
003 ---
004 ---
On When set to ON, only the protocol monitor log of the communication error is
005 PTCL LOG ON ERROR Off
Off saved.
On When set to on, the protocol monitor log is automatically printed after
006 PTCL LOG AUTO PRINT Off
Off communication.
On When set to on, up to three protocol monitor logs are saved.
007 PTCL LOG MULTI SAVE Off
Off Available in combination with errors.
008 ---
009 ---
Minimum call signal detection level
It is possible to avoid troubles by changing the setting value in the case where
the call signal is erroneously detected due to the influence of noise.
However, if the set value is set too high, it is impossible to detect the calling
signal itself, so caution is required.
NTT line standard for call signal detection is 75 (65 to 83) Vms, but generally
ONU of PBX / optical line is lower than this standard.
010 IR DETECT LEVEL 13~60 13 Vrms
When changing this value, the ringing signal is measured with an
oscilloscope, the ringing signal can be detected and no noise is detected. It is
necessary to search for set values.
[Supplement]
Conversion formula of effective value and call signal value measured by
oscilloscope
Rms value

Confidential

011 IR DET FRQ MIN 11~21 12 Hz Set the lower limit value / upper limit value of the ringing signal detection
frequency.
012 IR DET FRQ MAX 27~80 66 Hz In the case of connection line PSTN, the initial value is detected in the range
of 12 to 66 Hz
013 IR DET FRQ MIN (PBX) 11~21 11 Hz Set the lower limit value / upper limit value of the ringing signal detection
frequency.
014 IR DET FRQ MAX (PBX) 27~80 80 Hz In the case of connection line PBX, the initial value is detected in the range of
11 to 80 Hz
Minimum time to recognize call signal ON
If it is shorter than this time, it does not judge it as a call signal and does not
015 IR ON TIME MIN 9~30 15 x10ms answer incoming call.
(The ringing tone sounds when ON at 80 ms)
Maximum time to recognize call signal ON
016 IR ON TIME MAX 50~80 80 x100ms If it is longer than this time, it does not judge it as a call signal and does not
answer incoming call.(The ringing tone sounds)
Call signal off confirmation time
When the calling signal OFF time longer than this setting is detected, the
017 IR OFF TIME MIN 6~10 10 x100ms calling signal is counted as 1 time.
Do not count if the off interval is shorter than this.
Reference value for connection line PSTN.
If the off time is longer than this, it is judged that the call signal has
018 IR OFF TIME MAX 40~125 40 x100ms disappeared.
The call signal count is reset, the calling display disappears
Call signal off confirmation time
When the calling signal OFF time longer than this setting is detected,
019 IR OFF TIME MIN (PBX) 300~1000 600 ms
the calling signal is counted as 1 time.
Reference value when connection count = PBX
020 RING DETECT COUNT 0~15 1 times Linked with [number of times of call] of fax setting
021 ---
022 ---
023 ---
024 ---
025 ---
026 ---

Confidential

027 ---
028 ---
029 ---
Tone
030 DIAL TYPE 10PPS Tone Linked with [Dial type] of fax setting
20PPS
Used to register a fax number in the address book.
031 DIAL PAUSE TIME 1~255 30 x100ms
Changing the pause waiting time to enter with the pause button.
This function changes when the response of the partner fax is slow and
032 FAX SIGNAL WAIT TIME 1~255 55 sec exceeds the response waiting time.
It is the same effect as putting a pose with a pause button after dialing.
When executing multiple destination sequential broadcasting, if it is only
sending set it short.
033 BROADCAST INTVAL TIME 1~65536 6 sec If you also want to receive, leave a longer interval to set incoming calls
longer.
Change “038 JOB INTERVALTIME” by a set.
034 REDIAL INTERVAL 0~15 3 min Linked with [Automatic Redial Interval] of fax setting
035 REDIAL COUNT 0~15 3 times Linked with [Number of automatic redials] of fax setting
036 FORWARD RETRAY INTERVAL 0~255 0 min In the fax to folder / fax to mail transfer, the transfer retry period and number
setting when a transfer error occurs (server side power off).
 Setting Example
• FORWARD RETRY INTERVAL = 30
• FORWARD RETRY COUNTER = 144
Retry 144 times with 30 minute cycle
037 FORWARD RETRAY COUNT 0~255 0 times Continue retry for 3 days
 Precautions for setting
When multiple transfer destinations are set, one transfer job is in a retry
wait state due to an error
Other jobs are not executed until the retry waiting job is completed (remain
in the execution waiting state)

Confidential

In the case of an environment where a plurality of transmission jobs are
always accumulated as execution waiting jobs,
038 JOB INTERVAL TIME 1~65536 6 sec If you only send, set it to shorter.
If you also want to receive, leave a longer interval to set incoming calls
longer.
039 ---
040 DTMF HI SIG LVL 0~15 8 -dBm Adjustment of sending level of DTMF transmission (high group frequency)
Adjustment of sending level of DTMF transmission (low group
frequency)
Difference from high group frequency
+2.0dB ~
041 DTML LO SIG LVL (DIF) -2.0dB  Example
-5.5dB
High group frequency transmission level = -8dBm
Difference in low group frequency transmission level= -2dBm
→ Low group frequency transmission level= -10dBm
042 DTML SEND TIME 5~25 10 x10ms Transmission time of high group frequency DTMF transmission.
Adjusting inter-digit pause time.
Dial speed can be increased by decreasing set value.
However, too late may cause dial tone false detection, incorrect connection.
043 DTMF INTER-DIGIT TIME 5~25 12 x10ms
Do not set it shorter than 70-70 ms.
Make sure to perform dial confirmation test after change to confirm that there
is no incorrect connection.
044 ---
045 ---
046 ---
047 ---
048 ---
049 ---

Confidential

050 TONE DETECT LEVEL 28~43 28 -dBm
051 TONE DET FRQ MIN 24~38 30 x10Hz
052 TONE DET FRQ MAX 47~67 50 x10Hz Share with dial tone / busy tone.
053 TONE DET FRQ MIN (PBX) 245~350 245 Hz
054 TONE DET FRQ MAX (PBX) 470~670 670 Hz
055 ---
056 ---
057 ---
058 ---
If there is no problem with telephone line or telephone line connection, set to
On
059 AUTO LINE CHECK On off when [automatic line check function] false detection [line unconnected] or
Off
'line reverse insertion' error occurs.
On
060 DIAL TONE DETECT On
Off
In the initial setting, if the dial tone is detected for 1000 ms, it is judged that
061 DT DET TIME 5~25 10 x100ms there is a dial tone.
*The dial tone detection waiting time is fixed at 10s.
The dial tone off time of this set value is regarded as a dial tone continuation.
062 DT OFF IGNR TIME 5~28 28 x100ms
‘Connection line = PSTN
The dial tone off time of this set value is regarded as continuation of dial tone.
063 DT OFF IGNR TIME (PBX) 50~280 280 ms
‘Connection line = PBX
When dial tone detection = OFF, pause of this setting value is entered before
064 DT OFF PRE-PAUSE TIME 20~2550 30 x100ms
dialing.
065 ---
066 ---
067 ---
068 ---

Confidential

069 ---
On
070 BUSY TONE DETECT On
Off
Minimum time to recognize busy tone signal on.
071 BT DET ON TIME MIN 5~65 40 x10ms
Shorter than this time does not judge it to be a busy tone.
Maximum time to recognize busy tone signal on.
072 BT DET ON TIME MAX 30~100 60 x10ms
Longer than this time does not judge it as a busy tone.
Busy tone signal off confirmation time.
073 BT DET OFF TIME MIN 4~65 40 x10ms Upon detecting the busy tone signal off time longer than this setting, the
number of busy tone signals is counted as one.
If the OFF time is longer than this, it is judged that the busy tone signal has
074 BT DET OFF TIME MAX 30~100 60 x10ms disappeared.
(Busy tone signal count is reset)
075 BT DET COUNT 2~4 4 times
076 ---
077 ---
078 ---
079 ---
Normal Level of judgment of line training.
080 TCF CHECK Normal
Long If you make it long, more train the line situation. (It makes fall back easier)
Set the signal interval time between the CED signal and the DIS signal
75ms
081 CED-DIS INTERVAL 75ms selected at incoming call.
1sec
To disable the echo suppressor overseas communication, set it to 1s.
082 REMOTE RX DET TIME 1~255 3 x10ms Adjust detection time of remote reception push signal.
Rate Switching of error judgment mode of No-ECM reception.
083 ERROR LINE MODE Rate
Line Select number of error lines or error line rate.

Confidential

0 line If this setting value is exceeded during reception, judge that the error is over
64 line and turn off the line.
128 line * “0 line” operates with internal initial value = “128 line”.
084 ERROR LINE NUM 192 line 0 line
256 line
1024 line
2048 line
0% If this setting value is exceeded during reception, judge that the error is over
5% and turn off the line.
085 ERROR LINE RATE 10% 0% * “0%” operates with internal initial value = “10%”.
15%
20%
086 ---
087 ---
088 ---
089 ---
Use this when you want to disable color reception.
(Disable)
Disable Drop the color reception capability bit from the DIS signal sent at the
A4 incoming call.
090 RX COLOR SUPPORT A4/B4/A3
A4/B4 Since the transmitting side has no color receiving ability, color transmission is
A4/B4/A3 not performed.
When you enable “A4” “A4 / B4” “B4 / A3” “A3” paper with fax, reduction
color reception capability bit from DIS signal sent at incoming call.

Confidential

Regardless of the paper size set in the apparatus,
It is used when you want to specify the paper width to receive fax fixed.
When changed, the receiving sheet width capability bit of the DIS signal to be
sent at the time of incoming call changes.
 Example of use
 When sending an A3 / B4 document on the sender side, judge whether
A4 to transmit with A3 / B4 width or reduced size by looking at the
091 RX PAPER WIDTH A4/B4 Auto receiving paper width capability bit of the DIS signal of the receiver.
A4/B4/A3 When the receiving sheet width capability bit = A 4, the image is
reduced / cut to A 4 and transmitted.
 A3 / B4 paper is not set on the device, but fax reception is done with A3
/ B4 and received as electronic data of A3 / B4 size by external memory
save / transfer
(Used when split printing is performed in full scale with substitution
output)
When the received original length exceeds this set value, the reception is
092 RX MAX LENGTH 1~65536 650
forcibly terminated.
093 ---
094 ---
095 ---
096 ---
097 ---
098 ---
099 ---

Confidential

Process setting when the transmission document width differs from the
Reduction Send recording width of the receiver at the time of transmission
CutOut Send LEFT  Reduction Send = Reduction and sending
100 REDUCT/CUTOUT SEND Reduction Send
CutOut Send CENTER  CutOut Send LEFT = Cut the Left end, and sending on original size.
CutOut Send Right  CutOut Send CENTER = Cut the both end, and sending on original size.
 CutOut Send Right = Cut the Right end, and sending on original size.
When sending V.29 9600 / 7200 bps, add an echo suppressor tone.
On
101 V.29 EP TONE Off It is used when a communication error has occurred due to the influence of
Off
line echo of overseas communication.
On Ignore the first DIS at the time of transmission and receive from the second
102 1ST DIS IGNORE Off
Off DIS.
On Select RTC signal [EOL × 6 / EOL × 12] at the end of the PIX signal
103 RTC (EOL x12) Off
Off (switch from high speed to low speed)
104 ---
105 ---
106 ---
107 ---
108 ---
109 ---
 Until Detect
The monitor turns on when sending out and turns off when it detects a
facsimile signal.
 Always
Until Detect
110 COMM MONITOR Until Detect The monitor is always on.
Always
Since it is possible to listen to the signal at fax communication from the
monitor speaker, it is used at the time of investigation of image defect
trouble.
After troubleshooting confirmation, remember to return to original.

Confidential

V.27ter
V.17 Linking with communication mode of fax setting
111 MODEM MODE V.34
V.29 V.34 requires ECM
V.34
MH
112 CODING MR MMR MMR requires ECM
MMR
On It is linked with error correction (ECM) of fax setting.
113 ECM On
Off When ECM = OFF, V34 / MMR / color communication becomes invalid.
100 ms Procedure Adjust signal time between signals.
114 SIGNAL INTERVAL 200 ms 100 ms When an error occurs in communication procedure due to line echo / delay
300 ms etc.
115 ---
116 ---
117 ---
118 ---
119 ---
120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL 0~15 10 -dBm If communication data error occurs, adjustment will improve symptoms.
-48 dBm
-43 dBm When a communication data error occurs, if the line noise is high,
121 RX SIGNAL DET LEVEL -43dBm
-38 dBm it is improved by lowering the sensitivity (-43 dBm → -38 dBm, -33 dBm)
-33 dBm
0 dB
1.8 dB
122 TX EQUALIZER 0 dB When a sending error occurs due to poor line characteristics.
3.6 dB
7.2 dB
0 dB
1.8 dB
123 RX EQUALIZER 3.6 dB When there is a reception error due to poor line characteristics.
3.6 dB
7.2 dB
124 ---
125 ---

Confidential

126 ---
127 ---
128 ---
129 ---
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
130 TX SPEED 14400 bps Setting transmission start speed in V17 / V29 / V27ter mode.
TC7200 bps
TC9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps 14400 bps
131 RX SPEED Setting the reception start speed of V17 / V29 / V27ter mode.
TC7200 bps
TC9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
132 V.34 TX SPEED 33600 bps Setting transmission start speed of V34 mode.
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps

Confidential

2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
133 V.34 RX SPEED 33600 bps Setting the reception start speed of V34 mode.
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps
2400 sym/s
2743 sym/s
2800 sym/s
134 V.34 TX SYM RATE 2743 sym/s Setting the transmission symbol rate of V34 mode
3000 sym/s
3200 sym/s
3429 sym/s
2400 sym/s
2743 sym/s
2800 sym/s
135 V.34 RX SYM RATE 2743 sym/s Setting the reception symbol rate of V34 mode.
3000 sym/s
3200 sym/s
3429 sym/s
136 ---
137 ---
138 ---
139 ---

Confidential
4.3.6 Fax related user special parameters. 4.3.6.1 Emergency ejection of fax reception document (FAX to PC)
In this product, special parameters are prepared for the following users. Using the PC FAX reception function, urgently remove the received original
document file (.PDF) that can not be printed.
FAX to PC  Emergency ejection of received fax document PC fax reception can be taken out by both USB / network.
FAX to Memory When a facsimile received document becomes unprintable due to a The original file of fax reception is deleted from the product after transfer.
malfunction of the printer function, the fax reception original file
can be urgently taken out.
 FAX to PC  Work Procedure
Install FAX Utility on a PC connected to the product via USB or
network, and take out fax received original file using PC - FAX 1. Start “User Special Mode”.
reception function. 1-1.Turn off the power of the printer once, hold down the # button and
 FAX to Memory press and hold the power switch.
Remove the FAX received document to the USB external Long press until the following message appears on the panel LCD.
memory connected to the product.
1-2.Enter the ID number and activate “User Special Mode”.
C H E C K When using “user special mode”, confirm the ID number

P O IN T to the Service Support.
2. Press the [2] and [8] buttons, select “FAX to PC” from the menu and press
the [#] button to execute.
User Special Mode
Run: [#] / Select:[2][8]
1. Password Initialization
2. FAX to PC
3. FAX to Memory

Confidential
3. When the following screen is displayed, execute setting of PC FAX 4.3.6.2 Emergency ejection of received fax documents (FAX to Memory)
reception from PC with USB or network connection with product. Using the USB memory, urgently remove fax received original file (.PDF) that can not
be printed.
FAX to PC
The received fax document file is transferred to the “/EPFAXRCV” folder of
Change save mode from PC. the USB memory. (Folders are automatically generated)
The fax receiving document is deleted from the product after transfer.
 Work Procedure
4. After PC FAX reception setting is completed, “Ready” is displayed and 1. Start “User Special mode”.
transfer is started.
1-1.Turn off the power of the printer once, hold down the # button and
FAX to PC press and hold the power switch.
Long press until the following message appears on the panel LCD.
Ready
1-2.Enter the ID number and activate “User Special Mode”.
C H E C K When using “User Special Mode”, confirm the ID

P O IN T number to the Service Support.
5. When the transfer is completed, the following message is displayed.

Press the [Power] button to turn off the product. 2. Press the [2] and [8] buttons, select “FAX to Memory” from the menu and
FAX to PC
press the [#] button to execute.
User Special Mode
Run: [#] / Select:[2][8]
Completed, Push [Power]
1. Password Initialization
2. FAX to PC
3. FAX to Memory
After the transfer of the received original file is completed,

Turn on the power again and turn off PC FAX reception
3. When the following message is displayed on the screen, connect the USB
memory to the product.

Confidential
FAX to Memory FAX to Memory
Insert a Memory Card. Completed, Push [Power]
4. When the USB memory is detected, the following message is displayed,

so press the [#] button to create the folder.
(If this folder already exists in USB memory, this screen will be skipped)
FAX to Memory
No Folder, Create it [Start]
5. “Storing” is displayed and transfer is started.

FAX to Memory
Storing
6. When the transfer is completed, the following message is displayed on the

screen.
Press the [Power] button to turn off the product.

Confidential
4.3.7 Fax related troubleshooting  Troubleshoot basic step details

Step 1: Accurately understand and identify trouble symptoms.
4.3.7.1 Fax troubleshooting basics
In this step we check 5 points.
To troubleshoot fax troubleshooting with the following steps. 1. What is the symptom of the trouble?
 Troubleshooting basic step  Who is reporting the trouble?
(User, administrator, communication partner of the printer)
 Step 1: Accurately grasp and identify trouble symptoms.  What kind of error code / error message are occurring?
 Step 2: Investigate the trouble error and specify the cause. (Communication management report, job history, protocol monitor log)
 What kind of trouble is occurring?
 Step 3: Correct the problem. Rather than a vague symptom report such as “Transmission not possible” or
In particular, step 1 is very important. “Reception not possible”, an understanding of the specific symptom is performed
for the trouble, such as how the transmission or reception is not possible, whether
Fax related troubles occur not only in the trouble caused by the own machine, to make a call or receive a call, whether the telephone line is connecting, or
but also due to troubles caused by the partner machine, troubles caused by the whether the communication error has occurred after a connection.
telephone line, troubles caused by usage, and the like occur in a combined Example 1) Transmission not possible
=> “No outgoing calls (dialing) are made”, “A call is made but cannot connect to
manner.
the other side”, “A connection is made to the other side and communication is
When trouble occurs, hear the customer trouble content / situation well started, but a communication error occurs”, “Communication can be performed,
but the transmitted images are fuzzy”, etc.
“Who is in trouble with what?“ Example 2) Reception not possible
“What is in trouble?“ => “There is no ring tone”, “A ring tone is heard but the call is not received”, “A
“How can you satisfy our customers?“ ring tone is heard and the call is received, but communication does not start”,
“The call is received, a connection is made to the other side and communication is
Accurately understanding and identify. started, but a communication error occurs”, “Communication can be performed,
Thereafter, step 2 is performed, and the process proceeds to step 3. but the received images are fuzzy”, etc.
* The investigation method and method of taking action vary significantly
If troubleshooting in step 3 is skipped by skipping steps 1 and 2, the original depending on whether the problem occurs until a connection is established with
trouble will not be known. the other side, or whether the problem occurs after a connection is established and
As a result, it may cause trouble recurrence and another trouble to be induced. 2. Where is the trouble occurring?
 Occurred in printer, occurred in application, occurred in specific PC.
 Printer / PC of customer site, printer of customer office, equipment of customer's
communication partner.
3. When will the trouble occur?
 When has it occurred?
(OK till yesterday since the time of establishment, but the problem has suddenly
occurred today, etc.)
 Is it occurring at a specific time?
 Frequency of occurrence (always occurring, about once in 10 times).
 Has the environment changed before the problem occurred?
(Firm update, replacing ink cartridge, changed telephone line, moved the
installation location)

Confidential
Step 1: Accurately understand and identify trouble symptoms. (continued)

4. What kind of operations and conditions will cause trouble?
 When trouble occurs, is it always the same operation?
 Does the problem occur only when a specific event occurs?
 Does the same problem occur with another device or another destination
communication?
5. Can you reproduce the trouble?
 Has the same trouble occurred also at the service base?
 Does the same problem occur with multiple devices and users?
 Can the trouble be reproduced by a specific operation or a specific opponent?
Step 2: Determine the cause by investigating the error of the trouble.
When a fax related error occurs, it is not only displayed on the panel but also recorded
as a log / report.
Refer also to these logs / reports and investigate and identify the cause of the trouble.
 Survey and collect communication management reports, protocol monitor
logs, and job history displays.
(Enable error code to be displayed by setting “report format” of communication
management report to “detailed information”)
 In outgoing trouble / communication trouble, in “PCM RECORDER”
communication recording and incoming trouble, “Measure the call signal on the
oscilloscope” is done.
 Investigate the cause based on the survey results.
 It is essential to understand the phase of facsimile transmission / reception in the
investigation of fax communication error.
Investigate with reference to logs / reports as to whether each phase error of
transmission / reception is somewhere.
 Contact the EPSON Service Department as necessary
Step 3: Resolve the problem
If the cause can be identified, implement the countermeasure.
Depending on the cause content, it can be restored by changing the setting of the user /
service parameter.

Confidential
4.3.7.2 Equipment information necessary for fax trouble report. Report /Log name Print Procedure Remarks
If it is difficult to identify the cause of the problem, contact the service support Usage history Necessary to know the
“Settings” → “Printer Status/Print” → “Print
6 sheet usage volume of the
for the following information. Status Sheet” → “Usage History Sheet”
device.
Network Status “Settings” → “Printer Status/Print” → In the case of a trouble in
 Symptom report of trouble 7
Sheet “Network” the network system
(4.3.7.1 Fax troubleshooting basics by referring to basic step 1 of fax
Sending
troubleshooting.) document, Communication time is
8 sample of slow, picture quality is
 Device setting information received bad, etc
(Please see below for contents. The information in points 1. to 6. is document
mandatory to be included in the fax trouble report.)
Report /Log name Print Procedure Remarks
“Fax” → “Menu” → “Fax Report” → “Fax Log”
 Report format? Print with report type =
“Settings” → “General Settings” → “Fax
“detailed information”.
Communicatio Settings” → “Report Settings” → “Report
When symptoms rarely
1 n management format” → “Detailed information”
occur, automatically print
report  Auto print:
and acquire multiple
“Settings” → “General Settings” → “Fax
sheets.
Settings” → “Report Settings” → “Fax Log
Auto Print” = “On (every 30 items)”
Logs that are
“Fax” → “Menu” → “Fax Report” → “Protocol experiencing trouble
2 Protocol Trace
Trace” symptomatic errors are
preferred.
The setting information
of the device is
“Fax” → “Menu” → “Fax Report” → “Fax
3 Fax setting list mandatory for
setting list”
investigating the
problem.
It is necessary to ensure
Stored Fax “Fax” → “Menu” → “Fax Report” → “Stored that unnecessary
4
documents Fax documents” information is not
remaining in the memory.
The setting information
Printer of the device is
“Settings” → “Printer Status/Print” → “Print
5 information mandatory for
Status Sheet” → “Configuration Status Sheet”
sheet investigating the
problem.

Confidential
4.3.7.3 Troubleshooting from fax function diagnosis Diagnosis result Judgment contents Measure
By conducting fax function diagnosis for diagnosis of trouble, it is possible to  When a splitter is connected, in
diagnose basic items of fax function, line connection. case of separation, connect the
telephone line and the device
When an error is displayed in the fax function diagnosis report, the following The off-hook phone was directly and perform fax function
Line connection is
the method are implemented. unstable.
measured and it was below the diagnosis again. if resolving, the
specified value. splitter trouble has occured.
Diagnosis result Judgment contents Measure  If it is connected to a terminal
 As hardware defects are adapter, check if it improves by
Communication problem restarting the terminal adapter.
An error was found in considered, repair or product
between Main board and Fax
the printer.
board
exchange (initial failure) is carried  If you hear sound and intermittent
out. sound by pressing the “on hook”
 Confirm that the telephone line button, set the connection line to
jack and the LINE port of the “private branch exchange (PBX)”
equipment are properly connected No dial tone is and perform the diagnostic test
Can not detect the dial tone.
with the modular cable. detected. again.
→ The stuffing of the modular  You hear a continuous tone sound
cable is broken. by pressing the “On Hook” button,
If contact failure or disconnection, but set “Dial tone detection” to
exchange cable. “OFF” when the tone is small.
When the modem on hook of  Measure the line voltage with a
It is not properly
the equipment, the voltage of multimeter. (DC 48V at normal
connected to the
the LINE port was less than the time)
telephone line.
specified value.  Connect the external telephone to
the telephone line jack without
going through the device and check
whether telephone reaction,
incoming call, and call can be
made normally.
→ If there is an abnormality in the
telephone line, ask the telephone
line contractor for confirmation.
When the modem on hook of
 Make sure that the modular cable
the equipment, the voltage of
from the telephone line jack is
the LINE port was the
connected to the LINE and the
specified value, but if it is set
The modular cable is module cable from the external
to the off hook, it becomes
connected to the EXT telephone (if connected) is
port.
less than the specified
connected to the EXT.
voltage value of the LINE
→ If the external telephone is
port (When multiple modems
connected to the telephone line in
are on hook, the EXT port is
reverse, correctly connect it again.
disconnected.)

Confidential
4.3.7.4 Troubleshooting from error code Error code

Judgment contents Measure
display
The trouble can be specified to some extent by the error code of the
communication management report.  Check if the telephone number is correct.
 Check whether another signal is erroneously
In order to display the error code in the communication detected as a busy tone.
C H E C K
Busy tone is detected when In case of erroneous detection, confirm the
P O IN T management report, it is necessary to make the following Busy
dialing signal that is erroneously detected by
setting. recording, and set the busy tone detection
 “Settings” → “General Settings” → “Fax Settings” → function to “OFF” in [FAX Maintenance
Mode]. Or adjust the detection method.
“Report Settings” → “Report Format” = “Detailed
Can not detect a fax signal  Check if the telephone number is correct.
information”
No response from the receiver after  Check that a fax signal is returned from the
dialing. receiver.
 Phase A trouble (calling system)
Error code
Judgment contents Measure
 Phase B to D trouble
display
Error code
 Check the telephone whether or not a dial Judgment contents Measure
display
tone is heard from the exchanger, the tone is
continuous or intermittent.  Output the communication management
 Check if it is PSTN line or PBX line. In case report and check the error occurrence status.
of PBX line, change connection line setting In a fax machine that uses a subscribed
to PBX and check again. telephone line, communication errors may
Dial tone can not be occur if the status of the picked up telephone
No tone
detected when dialing.
If you can hear the dial tone but can not
detect it , record it and check the signal and line is bad, and if it is recommunicated by
adjust the detection method in [FAX automatic redial, it will grab a good
Maintenance Mode]. telephone line and send it normally. Since a
At this time, the [OFF] setting of dial tone communication management report is
detection has a risk of false detection. Avoid necessary for trend survey, a
as much as possible. A communication error communication management report is
Error XXX occurred after line automatically printed. Have the customer
Before calling (on hook)  Check that LINE port and EXT port are
Incorrect port there was a line voltage but
connection. keep it.
connected properly.
connection the line voltage was gone  By outputting the communication protocol
when calling (off hook). monitor log at the time of error occurrence,
it is possible to investigate where an error
 Check that the telephone line is connected to
occurred in the communication. In “FAX
the LINE port properly.
Maintenance Mode”, set “error only”
 Check the telephone whether or not a dial
The line is not The line voltage is not “automatic printing” as necessary.
tone is heard, a calling is made when
connected. detected before calling.  Check the error occurrence status by
dialing.
acquiring the recording data of the
 Measure the line voltage with a multimeter
communication at the time of error
(DC48V in on-hook status).
occurrence

Confidential
CHAPTER
5
SERVICE SUPPORT MODE
Confidential
5.1 Service Support Mode 2. Enter ID number of Service Support Mode, and start the service support mode.
C H E C K  Enter “61544” when starting service support mode.
Service support mode is a service dedicated special mode that can be started by P O IN T  Operating procedure
a special operation, and allows you to execute functions including printer
inspection mode and service status sheet printing functions, etc. • Number input (move in ascending order): [2] button
• Number input (move in descending order): [8] button
5.1.1 Service mode startup • Input digit shift: [6] button
• Execute: [#] button
FOR WF-C5790/WF-C5790A/WF-C5710/ET-8700
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]
SHIFT: [6] / Fin: [#]
1. Press and hold down the power button while pressing the [#] button from
the power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD. ****_
Power button
Figure 5-3. ID number input screen (2)

 ID number input procedure
[#] button
1. Press a number input button ([2] button or [8] button) to enter a
Figure 5-1. Printer Startup number from 1 to 9.
2. Press the input digit shift button ([6] button) to shift to the next digit.
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]
3. Repeat the above procedure to enter the specified ID number.
SHIFT: [6] / Fin: [#]
4. When all of the ID number is entered, press the execute button ([#]
_ button). A confirmation message appears.
5. Press the execute button ([#] button) to execute or press the input digit
shift button ([6] button) to enter the number again.
 It is not possible to return to the previous digit after
shifting digits. If you wish to correct the number of the
previous digit, proceed with the steps until after Step 4.
and then perform input again.
Figure 5-2. ID number input screen (1)  Please note that the execute button is not enabled until at
least two digits have been entered.
Service support mode Service Support Mode 216

Confidential
FOR WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290A 2. Enter ID number of Service Support Mode, and start the service support
mode.
1. Press and hold down the power button while pressing the [OK] button from
the power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD. C H E C K  Enter “61544” when starting service support mode.
P O IN T  Operating procedure
Power button
• Number input (move in ascending order): [] button
• Number input (move in descending order): [] button
• Input digit shift: [] button
• Execute: [OK] button
UP/DOWN: [UP][DOWN]
SHIFT: [RIGHT] / Fin: [OK]
[OK] button
Figure 5-4. Printer Startup ****_

UP/DOWN: [UP][DOWN]
SHIFT: [RIGHT] / Fin: [OK]
_
Figure 5-6. ID number input screen(2)
 ID number input procedure
1. Press a number input button ([] button or [] button) to enter a
number from 1 to 9.
2. Press the input digit shift button ([] button) to shift to the next digit.
Figure 5-5. ID number input screen(1) 3. Repeat the above procedure to enter the specified ID number.
4. When all of the ID number is entered, press the execute button ([#]
button). A confirmation message appears.
5. Press the execute button ([OK] button) to execute or press the input
digit shift button ([] button) to enter the number again.
 It is not possible to return to the previous digit after
shifting digits. If you wish to correct the number of the
previous digit, proceed with the steps until after Step 4.
and then perform input again.
 Please note that the execute button is not enabled until at
least two digits have been entered.

Confidential
Solution if enter and execute the wrong ID 5.1.2 Service mode menu configuration
 When a different mode starts: Display Overview Usage situation
If you enter the wrong ID and a different mode starts,
Printer Adjustments can be made when the ADF/SCN Unit When performing
there is the possibility of changing important settings of
Inspection Mode has been removed. repair work
the unit, so press the power button to turn off the power
In addition to the regular status sheet, it is possible to
immediately and then perform the process again to enter Status Sheet
check the information necessary for performing Troubleshooting
the correct ID number. Print Mode
service.
 When non-existent ID number: When product
The following panel LCD display appears and the power User Log Get The detailed user log data inside the printer can be
analysis is
Mode stored in the USB memory.
is turned off automatically. necessary
Debug Log When there is an
Input ID is not found!!
Write Mode When performing trouble analysis, data concerning implementation
Please wait Poweroff...
Debug Config internal control, such as the processing time, instruction at the
Read Mode processing status, etc. can be saved in the USB time of occurrence
Debug Config memory connected to the printer. of an unknown
Reset Mode trouble

Confidential
CHAPTER
6
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Confidential
6.1 Repair Work Overview 6.1.2 Definition of Orientation of the Printer

Throughout this manual, orientation descriptions shown below are used.
6.1.1 Tools
The following tools and jigs are required for repairing the printer.
Top
 Tools
EPSON
Name Availability Remarks
Part Code
(+) Phillips screwdriver #1 O 1080530
(+) Phillips screwdriver #2 O --- Left Rear
Flathead screwdriver O ---

Flathead Precision O ---
screwdriver
Torque screwdriver O ---
Tweezers O ---
Longnose pliers O ---
Cleaning stick O 1709718
Acetate tape O 1003963
Tube Clip O 1716139
Tape O --- Secure the cover open Front Right
sensor (adjustment)
 Jigs
EPSON
Name Availability Remarks
Part Code Bottom
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT --- 1684353
LEAK TESTER SHEET REAR --- 1684354
Note 1 : Some of the tools listed above are commercially available. Figure 6-1. Definition of Orientation of the Printer
2 : EPSON provides the tools listed with EPSON part code
Disassembly/assembly Repair Work Overview 220

Confidential
6.2 Disassembly/Reassembly Procedures
6.2.1 Parts/Components Location

No. Part/Component No. Part/Component No. Part/Component No. Part/Component
1 Housing Left (p. 239) 4 ASF Front Cover (p. 239) 7 Paper Guide (p. 245) 10 ---
2 Cover Open Sensor (p. 239) 5 ASF Cover (p. 245) 8 Housing Rear (p. 245) 11 ---
3 Housing Upper (p. 239) 6 Rear Cover (Back) (p. 245) 9 Housing Right (p. 239) 12 ---
4
5
3
6
2
7
1
8
Figure 6-2. Housing (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700)
Disassembly/assembly Disassembly/Reassembly Procedures 221

Confidential

1 Housing Left (p. 249) 4 Printer Cover (p. 249) 7 Housing Rear (p. 254) 10 Rear Back Cover (p. 249)
2 Cover Open Sensor (p. 254) 5 Housing ASF (p. 249) 8 ASF Cover (p. 254) 11 Housing Right (p. 254)
3 Housing Top (p. 254) 6 Rear Upper Cover Assy (p. 249) 9 Paper Guide (p. 254) 12 ---
7 8
6
5
9
4
3
2
10
11
Figure 6-3. Housing (WF-C5200 Series)

Confidential

Ink Pack Tray BK/ Ink Pack Tray CL
1 Foot (p. 277) 4 7 --- 10 ---
(p. 263)
Temperature and Humidity Sensor (p.
2 5 RIPS Front Cover (p. 263) 8 --- 11 ---
263)
3 RIPS Unit (p. 263) 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---
Figure 6-4. Ink Supply Mechanism (1)

Confidential

1 Decompression Pump Assy (p. 293) 4 CSIC Board (p. 293) 7 Ink Leak Sensor (p. 263) 10 RIPS Cover Lock Lever (p. 277)
2 Ink Sensor FFC (p. 263) 5 CSIC Board FFC (p. 293) 8 Ink Porous Pad (p. 277) 11 RIPS Unit Lower (p. 277)
3 Ink Sensor YMCBk (p. 293) 6 Ink Supply Unit (p. 277) 9 Ink Tube Guide Holder (p. 277) 12 ---
3
2
4
1 11
5 10
6
9
8
7
Figure 6-5. Ink Supply Mechanism (2)

Confidential

1 ADF Pad Assy (p. 318) 4 ADF Roller Spring (p. 318) 7 Hinge Assy (p. 309) 10 ADF Document Support (p. 318)
2 ADF Separate Spring (p. 318) 5 ADF Paper Feed Roller Unit (p. 318) 8 ADF/SCN Unit (p. 309) 11 ---
3 LD Frame Assy (p. 318) 6 Rear ADF Cover (p. 309) 9 Document Mat (p. 309) 12 ---
6 7
5
4
3
2 7
10
Figure 6-6. ADF/SCN (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 only)

Confidential

1 Relay Board Assy (p. 345) 4 Main Board Assy (p. 328) 7 Speaker Assy* (p. 345) 10 ---
2 USB Interface Board* (p. 328) 5 Fax Assy* (p. 328) 8 SD Memory (p. 328) 11 ---
3 Wireless Lan Module (p. 328) 6 Power Supply Assy (p. 345) 9 PDL Board Assy (p. 328) 12 ---
* : WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 only.
6
5
4
3
8
7
Figure 6-7. Electrical Components (1)

Confidential

Relay Cable (Panel to Numpad) (p.
1 Panel Assy (p. 358) 4 7 Panel Board (p. 368) 10 ---
358)
2 Panel Board (p. 358) 5 Numpad Board Assy (p. 358) 8 Relay Cable (Panel to Main) (p. 368) 11 ---
3 Relay Cable (Panel to Main) (p. 358) 6 Panel Assy (p. 368) 9 --- 12 ---
3
8
2 7
1 6
5
4
WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 WF-C5200 Series
Figure 6-8. Electrical Components (2)

Confidential

1 Ink Eject Cover (p. 378) 4 Porous Pad Cap Lower (p. 378) 7 --- 10 ---
Maintenance Box Detect Sensor Assy
2 5 --- 8 --- 11 ---
(p. 378)
3 Inksystem Unit (p. 378) 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---
Figure 6-9. Ink System Mechanism

Confidential

1 Head FFC Assy (p. 403) 4 Printhead (p. 403) 7 CR Unit (p. 417) 10 Seal Joint Head (p. 389)
2 CR Driven Pulley Assy (p. 417) 5 CR Motor (p. 417) 8 Head Screw Assy (p. 403) 11 ---
3 CR Scale (p. 389) 6 Extension Spring 11.11 (p. 389) 9 Ink Supply Tube (p. 389) 12 ---
3
2
4
1
9 10
8
Figure 6-10. Carriage Mechanism

Confidential

1 Stacker Assy (p. 439) 4 Paper Feed Sensor Unit (p. 439) 7 Rear Unit (p. 453) 10 ---
2 Paper Cassette 1st Assy (p. 453) 5 Rear ASF Assy (p. 458) 8 Paper Guide Upper Assy (p. 468) 11 ---
Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring (p.
3 Star Wheel Unit (p. 439) 6 9 --- 12 ---
468)
4 5
3 6
2 7
Figure 6-11. Paper Feed Mechanism (1)

Confidential

1 PF Scale (p. 439) 4 Photo Interrupter (p. 458) 7 Pickup Roller Housing (p. 453) 10 PE Assy (p. 468)
2 PF Encoder Board (p. 439) 5 Paper Feed Roller (p. 458) 8 Retard Roller (p. 453) 11 ---
3 Rear Unit Detection Sensor (p. 439) 6 Rear ASF Solenoid (p. 458) 9 Retard Extension Spring (p. 453) 12 ---
3 4
2
5
1
6
10
Figure 6-12. Paper Feed Mechanism (2)

Confidential

1 Printer Mechanism (p. 490) 4 --- 7 --- 10 ---
2 --- 5 --- 8 --- 11 ---
3 --- 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---
Figure 6-13. Printer Mechanism

Confidential

Optional Paper Cassette Left Cover (p. Optional Paper Cassette Right Cover
1 4 E-ring (plastic) (p. 526) 7 Separation Roller (p. 526) 10
534) (p. 534)
2 Paper Feed Detector Lever (p. 526) 5 Torsion Spring 0.9 (p. 526) 8 Photo Interrupter (p. 534) 11 Drawer Connector (female) (p. 534)
Optional Paper Cassette Main Board
3 ASF Encoder Assy (p. 534) 6 Vertical Feed Roller (p. 526) 9 Rear Back Cover (p. 526) 12
Assy (p. 534)
5
4
6
7
3
8
2
1
12
10 9
11
Figure 6-14. Optional Paper Cassette Unit (1)

Confidential

1 Paper Cassette 2nd Assy (p. 546) 4 Retard Roller (p. 546) 7 --- 10 ---
Extension Spring (Retard Roller) (p.
2 Lift Up Gear 30T (p. 546) 5 8 --- 11 ---
546)
3 Lift Up Sector Gear 40T (p. 546) 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---
1 2
5 3
4
Figure 6-15. Optional Paper Cassette Unit (2)

Confidential
6.2.2 Preparation for servicing 6.2.2.2 Removing the Maintenance Box

1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Ink Eject Cover.
6.2.2.1 Unlocking the CR Unit
2. Remove the Maintenance Box.
1. Remove the Housing Right.
(WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700: 6.2.4.1 Housing (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700) (1)
(p. 239), WF-C5200 Series: 6.2.4.4 Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254))
Hook
2. Rotate the gear of the Inksystem Unit in the direction of the arrow, and move the
CR Unit to the 80-digit side.
CR Unit
Ink Eject Cover
Gear
Inksystem Unit
Figure 6-16. Unlocking the CR Unit

When rotating the gear of the Inksystem Unit, take extra care not
to damage or disconnect the FFC by touching it.
Maintenance Box
Figure 6-17. Removing the Maintenance Box

Confidential
6.2.2.3 Removing the Ink Pack 3. Remove the Ink Pack.
1. Slide the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow, then Open the RIPS Front
Cover. Ink Pack
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover Ink Pack Tray
Figure 6-18. Opening the RIPS Front Cover Figure 6-20. Removing the Ink Pack Tray
2. Push the Ink Pack Tray, then remove it.
Ink Pack Tray
Figure 6-19. Removing the Ink Pack Tray

Confidential
6.2.3 How to Read This Chapter  Disassembly Procedure Page
CONTENTS EXPLANATION Guide Part or Component Final Procedure

The capital letters Indicates a target part to Pink-colored guide indicates
 Section Top Page represent parts/ be removed, or work to that the disassembly of the part
components, and the be performed with the represented by the capital
number indicates the instructions in this box. letter ends here.
order of disassembly.
EPSON WF-C579 0/ WF-C5790a/ WF-C5710/ET-870 0/W F -C5210/W F -C5290/W F -C5290a R evision A
6.2.4.10 Electrical Components (1)
OUTLINE EPSON WF-C579 0/ WF-C5790a/ WF-C5710/ET-870 0/W F -C5210/W F -C5290/W F -C5290a R evision A
Tim e
Part or Component Guid e Disas semb ly/ Adjustment /
Reassemb ly Ins p ection
Total A1 B1 C1
Paper Cassette 1st Assy Rear Unit
D1 E1
Wireless Lan Module A --- --- ---
PDL Board Assy B --- --- ---
Fax Assy* C --- --- ---
USB Interface Board* D --- --- ---
SD Memory E --- --- ---
Buttons
Main Board Assy F --- --- ---
*: WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only.
Duplex Unit
Paper Cassette 1st Assy
1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 1st Assy. 1. Remove the Duplex Unit in the direction of the arrow while pressing the buttons inward.
DI S A S S E M B L Y /A S S E M B L Y Disassem bly/R eassem bly Procedu res 327

Confidential
Part Name/Guide DI S A S S E M B L Y /A S S E M B L Y Disassem bly/R eassem bly Procedu res 439

Confidential
Disassembly procedure of the listed parts or components are given in the section.
Procedure
The capital letters in the “Guide” column are shown in the disassembly procedure
Describes the disassembly procedure.
pages with a number. Follow the disassembly instructions on the pages with a capital
When reassembling, follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.
letter for your target part in numerical order.

Confidential
EXAMPLE FOR READING DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 3. Find the “Guide” (the capital letter) in the disassembly procedure pages.
Then follow the instructions on the pages with the Guide indication in
1. Find your target part or component in the table.
numerical order.
2. See the Guide column, and remember the Guide (a capital letter) for the part/
component. Example: To remove the Main Board Assy, find pages with the “F”
guide. If F1, F2, F3, and F16 are found, start from the F1 page,
Example: The Guide for the Main Board Assy is “F”.
then proceed in numerical order.
6.2.4.10 Electrical Components (1) EPSON WF-C579 0/ WF-C5790a/ WF-C5710/ET-870 0/W F -C5210/W F -C5290/W F -C5290a R evision A
OUTLINE A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Rear Cover (Back) ASF Front Cover
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Tim e
Rear Cover (Back)
Part or Component Guid e Disas semb ly/ Adjustment /
Total
Reassemb ly Ins p ection ASF Front Cover
Wireless Lan Module A --- --- --- EPSON WF-C579 0/ WF-C5790a/ WF-C5710/ET-870 0/W F -C5210/W F -C5290/W F -C5290a R evision A
PDL Board Assy B --- --- --- Main Board Assy

Dowel and Dowel and
positioning hole F16 positioning hole
Fax Assy* C --- --- --- Housing Right Housing Left

Rear Cover (Back)
No. Screw Type No. Screw Type

USB Interface Board* D --- --- --- S4 Main Board Assy
C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C MB Shield Plate Lower S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back). 1. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the ASF Front Cover.
Attach the two dowels of the Rear Cover (Back) to the positioning holes on the
SD Memory E --- --- --- Housing Left and Housing Right.

MB Shield Plate Upper
*: WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only. DI S A S S E M B L Y /A S S E M B L Y Disassem bly/R eassem bly Procedu res

No. Screw Type
327
Confidential
S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the MB Shield Plate Upper.
2. Remove the Main Board Assy from the MB Shield Plate Lower.
DI S A S S E M B L Y /A S S E M B L Y Disassem bly/R eassem bly Procedu res 476

Confidential

Confidential
6.2.4 Repair Work Details

6.2.4.1 Housing (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700) (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
ASF Front Cover A --- --- ---
Housing Left B --- --- ---
Housing Right C --- --- ---
Housing Upper D --- --- ---
Cover Open Sensor E --- --- ---

Confidential
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 C1 ASF Front Cover

D1 E1 (→P. 241)
C2 Ink Eject Cover B2 Housing Left

D2 E2 (→P. 242) (→P. 243)
C3 Housing Right
D3 E3 (→P. 242)
Housing Left
D4 E4 (→P. 243)
Housing Upper
D5 E5 (→P. 243)
Cover Open Sensor

E6 (→P. 244)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 B2
ASF Front Cover Housing Left
D1 E1
Rear
ASF Front Cover

Hooks
Housing Left
Hooks
Rear Cover (Back)

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Tab
1. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the ASF Front Cover. 1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
2. Remove the ASF Front Cover upward while slightly bending the Rear Cover (Back) toward 2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
the back. 3. Lift the Housing Left to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Left.
4. Disengage two hooks on the rear side of the Housing Left, and remove the Housing Left.
Insert the eight tabs on the Housing Left to the positioning hokes of the Housing
Upper and the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
C2 C3
Ink Eject Cover Housing Right
D2 E2 D3 E3
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover

Tabs
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Ink Eject Cover. 1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
2. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Right.
3. Lift the Housing Right to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Right, then
remove the Housing Right.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Right to the positioning holes on the Ink Supply
Unit.

Confidential
Housing Left Housing Upper

D4 E4 D5 E5
Rear
Housing
Hooks Upper
Housing Left
Hooks Top

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Tab S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Upper.
2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
3. Lift the Housing Left to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Left.

Confidential
Cover Open Sensor

E6
Connector (CN609)
Cable
Cover Open Sensor
Hook (long)
Mechanical Contact Sensor Hook (short)
The length of the two hooks on mechanical contact sensor differs. See the following
and make sure to release the shorter hook first when removing the mechanical contact
sensor.
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN609) on the Main Board Assy.
2. Disengage the hook by pushing up the Cover Open Sensor.

Confidential
6.2.4.2 Housing (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700) (2)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear Cover (Back) A --- --- ---
ASF Cover B --- --- ---
Paper Guide C --- --- ---
Housing Rear D --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back)

C1 D1 (→P. 247)
B2 ASF Cover C2 Paper Guide

D2 (→P. 247) (→P. 248)
Paper Guide
D3 (→P. 248)
Housing Rear
D4 (→P. 248)

Confidential
A1 B1 B2
Rear Cover (Back) ASF Cover
C1 D1 D2
Rear Cover (Back)
ASF Cover
Shaft and Shaft and

groove groove
Dowel and Dowel and

positioning hole positioning hole
Housing Right Housing Left

Rear Housing
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back). 1. Release the two shafts of the ASF Cover from the grooves on the Rear Housing, then
remove the ASF Cover.
Housing Left and Housing Right.

Confidential
Paper Guide Housing Rear

C2 D3 D4
Paper Guide
Tab and
groove Rear Housing
Tab and
groove
Rear Housing
1. Release the two tabs of the Paper Guide from the grooves on the Rear Housing, then remove
the Paper Guide.

Confidential
6.2.4.3 Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear Back Cover A --- --- ---
Rear Upper Cover Assy B --- --- ---
Housing ASF C --- --- ---
Printer Cover D --- --- ---
Housing Left E --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Rear Back Cover

D1 E1 (→P. 251)
B2 C2 Rear Upper Cover Assy

D2 E2 (→P. 252)
C3 Housing ASF
D3 E3 (→P. 252)
Printer Cover
D4 E4 (→P. 253)
Housing Left
E5 (→P. 253)

Confidential
Rear Back Cover

A1 B1 C1
Rear Back Cover
D1 E1
Top Rear Upper

Cover Assy
Rear Rear Back

Rear Back Cover
Cover
Dowel Dowel
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the Rear Upper Cover Assy. 3. Remove the Rear Back Cover downward.
2. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the Rear Back Cover. Attach the two dowels of the Rear Back Cover to the positioning holes on the Housing
Left and the Housing Right.

Confidential
B2 C2 C3
Rear Upper Cover Assy Housing ASF
D2 E2 D3 E3
Housing ASF
Rear Upper Cover Assy
Housing ASF
Tabs
Printer
Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Rear Upper Cover Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Open the Printer Cover.
Insert the four tabs of the Rear Upper Cover Assy to the positioning holes of the 2. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing ASF.
Housing ASF.

Confidential
Printer Cover Housing Left

D4 E4 E5
Rear
Printer Cover
Hooks
Housing Left
Hooks
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Tab
1. Remove the Printer Cover upward. 1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
2. Lift the Housing Left upward to release the two hooks each on the front side and rear side of
the Housing Left, and then remove the Housing Left.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Left to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
6.2.4.4 Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ASF Cover A --- --- ---
Paper Guide B --- --- ---
Housing Rear C --- --- ---
Housing Right D --- --- ---
Housing Top E --- --- ---
Cover Open Sensor F --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Rear Back Cover

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 256)
A2 B2 C2 Rear Upper Cover Assy

D2 E2 F2 (→P. 257)
Housing ASF A3 ASF Cover B3 Paper Guide

D3 E3 F3 (→P. 259) C3 (→P. 257) (→P. 258)
Printer Cover C4 Paper Guide

D4 E4 F4 (→P. 259) (→P. 258)
Ink Eject Cover C5 Housing Rear

D5 E5 F5 (→P. 260) (→P. 258)
Housing Right
D6 E6 F6 (→P. 260)
Housing Left
E7 F7 (→P. 261)
Housing Top
E8 F8 (→P. 261)
Cover Open Sensor

F9 (→P. 262)

Confidential
Rear Back Cover

A1 B1 C1
Rear Back Cover
D1 E1 F1
Top Rear Upper

Cover Assy
Rear Rear Back

Rear Back Cover
Cover
Dowel Dowel
No. Screw Type


Confidential
A2 B2 C2 A3 C3
Rear Upper Cover Assy ASF Cover
D2 E2 F2
ASF Cover
Rear Upper Cover Assy Shaft
Housing ASF
Shaft
Tabs
Housing Rear
1. Remove the Rear Upper Cover Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Disengage two shafts of the ASF Cover from the holes of the Housing Rear, then remove
the ASF Cover.
Insert the four tabs of the Rear Upper Cover Assy to the positioning holes of the
Housing ASF.

Confidential
B3 C4 C5
Paper Guide Housing Rear
Tab and
Groove
Paper Guide
Tab and
Groove
Housing Rear
Housing Rear
1. Disengage two tabs of the Paper Guide from the grooves of the Housing Rear, and remove
the Paper Guide.

Confidential
Housing ASF Printer Cover

D3 E3 F3 D4 E4 F4
Housing ASF
Printer Cover
Printer
Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Open the Printer Cover. 1. Remove the Printer Cover upward.

2. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing ASF.

Confidential

D5 E5 F5 D6 E6 F6
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

Tab S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Ink Eject Cover. 1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Right.
2. Lift the Housing Right upward to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing
Right, and then remove the Housing Right.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Right to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply
Unit.

Confidential
Housing Left Housing Top

E7 F7 E8 F8
Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Top
Hooks

1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left. 1. Remove six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Top.
2. Lift the Housing Left upward to release the two hooks each on the front side and rear side of
the Housing Left, and then remove the Housing Left.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Left to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
Cover Open Sensor

F9
Connector (CN609)
Cable
Cover Open Sensor
Hook (long)
Mechanical Contact Sensor Hook (short)
sensor.
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN609) on the Main Board Assy.
2. Disengage the hook by pushing up the Cover Open Sensor.

Confidential
6.2.4.5 Ink Supply Mechanism (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Ink Pack Tray BK/
Ink Pack Tray CL A --- --- ---
RIPS Front Cover B --- --- ---
RIPS Unit C --- --- ---
Temperature and
D --- --- ---
Humidity Sensor
Ink Leak Sensor E --- --- ---
Ink Sensor FFC F --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
Preparation for Ink Discharge

Dissembling (→P. 265)
C1 D1 Rear Cover (Back) A1 Ink Pack Tray BK/ B1 RIPS Front Cover
E1 F1 (→P. 267) Ink Pack Tray CL (→P. 267)
(→P. 266)
C2 D2 ASF Front Cover
E2 F2 (→P. 268)
C3 D3 Ink Eject Cover C10 D10 Plate

E3 F3 (→P. 268) E10 F10 (→P. 272)
C4 D4 Housing Right C11 D11 Guide Cover

E4 F4 (→P. 269) E11 F11 (→P. 273)
C5 D5 Housing Left C12 D12 RIPS Unit

E5 F5 (→P. 269) E12 F12 (→P. 273)
C6 D6 Housing Upper D13 Temperature and E13 Ink Leak Sensor F13 Ink Sensor FFC
E6 F6 (→P. 270) Humidity Sensor (→P. 275) (→P. 276) (→P. 276)
C7 D7 Hinge Lower Cover

C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4
E7 F7 (→P. 270)
P O IN T Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254) in the case of
the WF-C5200 Series, and remove the parts from the
C8 D8 Cable Guide Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
E8 F8 (→P. 271)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700.
 Implement the procedure indicated by when
C9 D9 Peel off the CRCM FFC removing the Ink Tube from the RIPS Unit and
E9 F9 (→P. 272)
Printhead.

Confidential
Preparation of the Ink Discharge

Dissembling Lever of the Cover
Open Sensor
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover
Ink Pack Tray CL

Ink Pack Tray BK
1. Connect the AC cable to the printer, and turn the printer on. 3. Push the lever of the Cover Open Sensor and secure it with tape.
2. Slide the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to open the RIPS Front Cover. 4. Push the Ink Pack Tray BK and Ink Pack Tray CL, then remove them.
5. Make sure the display on the panel LCD does not indicate an error, such as “Cover open
error”, and is in the normal state.
 When securing the lever of the Cover Open Sensor with tape, secure it properly ensuring
there is no peeling of the tape during adjustment. (If the tape peels, the “Cover open error”
will occur and the adjustment process will be interrupted.)
 If the above-described steps 3 and 4 are reversed, an “Ink not delivered error” will occur, and
you will not be able to start the adjustment process.

Confidential
Ink Discharge
A1 Ink Pack Tray BK/
Ink Pack Tray CL
Ink Pack
Tray CL
Ink Pack
Tray BK
Lock
Lever
RIPS Front Cover
1. Connect the PC and printer with USB cable. 1. Move the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow, then open the RIPS Front Cover.
2. Start the adjustment program. 2. Push the Ink Pack Tray BK and Ink Pack Tray CL, then remove them.
3. Select the Ink Eject from items on the adjustment program.
4. Execute the Ink Eject at following instruction on the adjustment program.
5. After finishing the Ink Discharge, Disconnect the AC cable from the printer to turn the printer off.
 Do not turn OFF the power by pressing the power button as that may cause ink to be re-
charged.
 Since the amount of consumption of ink is not counted, take note of the amount of ink
remaining in the Maintenance Box during Ink Discharge.

Confidential
B1 C1
RIPS Front Cover Rear Cover (Back)
D1 E1 F1
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Lock
Lever Shaft and hole

RIPS Front Cover
Shaft and hole
No. Screw Type

1. Move the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow, then open the RIPS Front Cover. 1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back).
2. Take out the two axes from the housing holes while bending the RIPS Front Cover, and Attach the two dowels of the Rear Cover (Back) to the positioning holes on the
then remove the RIPS Front Cover. Housing Left and Housing Right.

Confidential
C2 C3
ASF Front Cover Ink Eject Cover
D2 E2 F2 D3 E3 F3
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the ASF Front Cover. 1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Ink Eject Cover.
2. Remove the ASF Front Cover upward while slightly bending the Rear Cover (Back) toward
the back.

Confidential
C4 C5
D4 E4 F4 D5 E5 F5
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs

1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.

2. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Right. 2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
3. Lift the Housing Right to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Right, then 3. Lift the Housing Left to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Left.
remove the Housing Right. 4. Disengage two hooks on the rear side of the Housing Left, and remove the Housing Left.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Right to the positioning holes on the Ink Supply Insert the eight tabs on the Housing Left to the positioning hokes of the Housing
Unit. Upper and the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
C6 C7
Housing Upper Hinge Lower Cover
D6 E6 F6 D7 E7 F7
Housing
Upper Hinge Lower Hinge Lower
Cover (Left) Cover (Right)
Hinge Lower Cover
Top
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Upper. C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge
P O IN T
Assy (Left) only.
1. Remove the each three screws (S4: ), and remove the two Hinge Lower Cover.

Confidential
Cable Guide
C8
Cable Guide
D8 E8 F8
Guides PS Cable
Cable Guide
Solenoid cable Cable Guide
Guide Hook
Rear ASF sensor cable/

ASF motor cable Photo interrupter cable
No. Screw Type

1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.  Route the PS cable through the two guides and hook on the Cable Guide.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.  Route the solenoid cable through the five hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide.
 Route the rear ASF sensor cable and photo interrupter cable through the three hooks ( ) on
the Cable Guide.
 Route the ASF motor cable through the guide on the Cable Guide.

Confidential
C9 C10
Peel off the CRCM FFC Plate
D9 E9 F9 D10 E10 F10
Plate
Double-sided tape CRCM FFC Sheet Double-sided tape
No. Screw Type

Double-sided tape CRCM FFC Double-sided tape S6 C.B.SCREW-2.6X18-F.ZN-3C
1. Peel off the CRCM FFC. 1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), and remove the Plate.
2. Peel off the CRCR FFC Sheet. When installing the Ink Supply Tube to the RIPS Unit, make sure to tighten the
screws using a torque driver with the specified torque.
 Screw tightening torque: 0.59±0.01Nm

Confidential
C11 C12
Guide Cover RIPS Unit
D11 E11 F11 D12 E12 F12
Relay Board
CN55
CN10
CN22 CN54
CN11
Guide Cover CN12
CN30
CN31
CN2
Tabs Drawer Connector (CN2)

Cover Open Sensor (CN22)
Ink End Sensor (C/M) (CN30)

Ink End Sensor (Bk/Y) (CN31)
Ink Leak Sensor 1 (CN11)
No. Screw Type Ink Leak Sensor 4 (CN55)
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Temperature and Humidity Sensor(CN10)
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Guide Cover in the direction of the arrow. 1. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN2, CN10, CN11, CN12, CN22, CN30,
CN31, CN54, CN55) on the Relay Board.
2. Release the cables from the five tabs on the Frame Base.

Confidential
RIPS Unit RIPS Unit
Rear Top
Printer
Hole
RIPS Unit
Ink Supply Tube

Decompression Ferrite core
Pump cable
Top
Joint
No. Screw Type
3. Pull the Decompression Pump Cable out from the hole of the Frame Base, and release the As ink may leak in the following steps, prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance.
ferrite core of the decompression pump cable from the Frame Base.
4. Remove the eight screws (S4: ) that secure the RIPS Unit.
5. Remove the Joint from the Ink Supply Tube.

Confidential
RIPS Unit
Temperature and Humidity Sensor

Left Joint of ink tube D13
PF scale
Bottom of joint
Cable
Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Printer
Beware of sharp edges
RIPS Unit
No. Screw Type
 When lifting the main body, you wear gloves. Because there is a danger of cutting hands with 1. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the Temperature and Humidity Sensor.
the sharp metal enclosed by red circles, 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector, then remove the Temperature and Humidity
 Lift carefully so as not to touch the PF scale on the left side of the main body. If you touch the Sensor.
PF scale, clean it with a clean cloth.
6. Grasp the handle of the yellow square part on the left and right sides of the main body and
lift it vertically.
Make sure all the ink tubes are properly secured at the joints. If not, insert the rib on
the tube into the joint in place and secure the tube properly by turning it
counterclockwise.

Confidential
Ink Leak Sensor Ink Sensor FFC

E13 F13
Ink Sensor FFC
Hooks
Double-sided tape
Connector
Ink Leak Sensor
Ink Porous Pad
Ink Sensor
YMCBk
Hooks
Ferrite core
CN1
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector. 1. Disconnect the Ink Sensor FFC from the connector (CN1) on the Ink Sensor YMCBk.
2. Remove the Ink Porous Pad from the Ink Leak Sensor. 2. Pull the Ink Sensor FFC from the ferrite core.
3. Disengage four hooks, then remove the Ink Leak Sensor. 3. Peel off the Ink Sensor FFC from the frame.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Foot A --- --- ---
Ink Supply Unit B --- --- ---
RIPS Unit Lower C --- --- ---
Ink Tube Guide Holder D --- --- ---
RIPS Cover Lock Lever E --- --- ---
Ink Porous Pad F --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
Ink Discharge A10 B10 C10 Plate

Preparation for
Dissembling (→P. 279) D10 E10 F10 (→P. 285)
A1 B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back) A11 B11 C11 Guide Cover

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 280) D11 E11 F11 (→P. 286)
A2 B2 C2 ASF Front Cover A12 B12 C12 RIPS Unit

D2 E2 F2 (→P. 281) D12 E12 F12 (→P. 286)
A3 B3 C3 Ink Eject Cover A13 Foot a

D3 E3 F3 (→P. 281) (→P. 288)
a
A4 B4 C4 Housing Right
D4 E4 F4 (→P. 282)
B13 C13 Ink Supply Unit D13 Ink Leak Sensor
E13 (→P. 289) F13 (→P. 289)
A5 B5 C5 Housing Left
D5 E5 F5 (→P. 282)
C14 RIPS Unit Lower D14 Ink Tube Guide Holder
E14 (→P. 290) F14 (→P. 290)
A6 B6 C6 Housing Upper
D6 E6 F6 (→P. 283)
E15 RIPS Cover Lock F15 Ink Porous Pad
Lever(→P. 291) (→P. 292)
A7 B7 C7 Hinge Lower Cover
D7 E7 F7 (→P. 283) C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4
A8 B8 C8 Cable Guide Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
D8 E8 F8 (→P. 284)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
A9 B9 C9 Peel off the CRCM FFC  Implement the procedure indicated by when
(→P. 285) removing the Ink Tube from the RIPS Unit and
D9 E9 F9
Printhead.

Confidential

Open Sensor
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover
Ink Pack Tray CL

Ink Pack Tray BK

Confidential
Ink Discharge
A1 B1 C1
Rear Cover (Back)
D1 E1 F1
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

No. Screw Type

1. Connect the PC and printer with USB cable. 1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back).
2. Start the adjustment program. Attach the two dowels of the Rear Cover (Back) to the positioning holes on the
3. Select the Ink Eject from items on the adjustment program. Housing Left and Housing Right.
charged.

Confidential
A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3
D2 E2 F2 D3 E3 F3
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

the back.

Confidential
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
D4 E4 F4 D5 E5 F5
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs



Confidential
A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7
D6 E6 F6 D7 E7 F7
Housing
Hinge Lower Cover
Top
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
P O IN T
Assy (Left) only.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A8 B8 C8
Cable Guide
D8 E8 F8
Guides PS Cable
Cable Guide
Guide Hook

No. Screw Type

the Cable Guide.

Confidential
A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10

D9 E9 F9 D10 E10 F10
Plate
No. Screw Type


Confidential
A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12

D11 E11 F11 D12 E12 F12
Relay Board
CN55
CN10
CN22 CN54
CN11
Guide Cover CN12
CN30
CN31
CN2



Confidential
RIPS Unit RIPS Unit
Rear Top
Printer
Hole
RIPS Unit
Ink Supply Tube

Pump cable
Top
Joint
No. Screw Type

Confidential
RIPS Unit
A13
Foot
Left Joint of ink tube
PF scale
Foot
Bottom of joint
Ink Supply Unit
Foot
Foot
Printer
Foot
Foot
RIPS Unit
 When lifting the main body, you wear gloves. Because there is a danger of cutting hands with 1. Turn over the Ink Supply Unit, then remove the nine foot.
the sharp metal enclosed by red circles,
 Lift carefully so as not to touch the PF scale on the left side of the main body. If you touch the
lift it vertically.
counterclockwise.

Confidential
B13 C13
Ink Supply Unit Ink Leak Sensor
E13 D13 F13
Cover open sensor cable
Ink Supply Unit Cable

Hooks
Slit Hook
Ink Supply Unit Connector
Ink Leak Sensor
Ink Porous Pad
Hooks
Ink Supply Housing
No. Screw Type

S11 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Release the cover open sensor cable from the slit and hook on the Ink Supply Housing. 1. Disconnect the cable from the connector.
2. Remove the four screws (S11: ), then remove the Ink Supply Unit from the Ink Supply 2. Remove the Ink Porous Pad from the Ink Leak Sensor.
Housing. 3. Disengage four hooks, then remove the Ink Leak Sensor.
Route the cables of the Ink Supply Unit on the frame of the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
C14
RIPS Unit Lower Ink Tube Guide Holder
E14 D14 F14
Tab and positioning hole
Ink Tube Guide

Holder
Ink Tube
Hooks
Cable
Relay Cable RIPS Unit Lower No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Relay Cable from the RIPS Unit Lower. 1. Release the cable from the three hooks on the Ink Tube Guide Holder.
2. Release the four Ink Tube from the Ink Tube Guide Holder.
3. Remove the screw (S5: ), then remove the Ink Tube Guide Holder.
Attach the tab of the Ink Tube Guide Holder to the positioning hole of the frame.

Confidential
Ink Tube Guide Holder
RIPS Cover Lock Lever

E15
RIPS Cover Lock

Lever Holder
Ink Tube Guide Marking
Holder
RIPS Housing
Guide
RIPS Cover Lock Lever
No. Screw Type

Align the marking on the ink tubes with the guide of the Ink Tube Guide Holder 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the RIPS Cover Lock Lever Holder and RIPS
shown in the figure above. Cover Lock Lever.

Confidential
Ink Porous Pad

F15
Ink Porous Pad
RIPS Unit
1. Peel off the Ink Porous Pad from the RIPS Unit, then remove the Ink Porous Pad.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Decompression Pump
Assy A --- --- ---
CSIC Board FFC B --- --- ---
Ink Sensor YMCBk C --- --- ---
CSIC Board D --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
Preparation for Ink Discharge A10 B10 Plate

Dissembling (→P. 295) C10 D10 (→P. 301)
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) A11 B11 Guide Cover

C1 D1 (→P. 296) C11 D11 (→P. 302)
A2 B2 ASF Front Cover A12 B12 RIPS Unit

C2 D2 (→P. 297) C12 D12 (→P. 302)
A3 B3 Ink Eject Cover A13 B13 Ink Supply Unit C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4
C3 D3 (→P. 297) C13 D13 (→P. 304) P O IN T Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254) in the case of
Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
A4 B4 Housing Right A14 B14 Pressing Plate  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
C4 D4 (→P. 298) C14 D14 (→P. 305) WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700.
A5 B5 Housing Left A15 B15 Upper Plate removing the Ink Tube from the RIPS Unit and
(→P. 298) (→P. 305) Printhead.
C5 D5 C15 D15
A6 B6 Housing Upper D16 Cartridge Detection Sensor A16 Decompression Pump Assy a
C6 D6 (→P. 299) Board(→P. 308) (→P. 306)
A7 B7 Hinge Lower Cover D17 CSIC Board

C7 D7
(→P. 299) (→P. 308)
a
A8 B8 Cable Guide
C8 D8 (→P. 300)
B16 CSIC Board FFC C16 Ink Sensor YMCBk
(→P. 306) (→P. 307)
A9 B9 Peel off the CRCM FFC
C9 D9 (→P. 301)

Confidential

Open Sensor
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover
Ink Pack Tray CL

Ink Pack Tray BK

Confidential
Ink Discharge
A1 B1 C1
Rear Cover (Back)
D1
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

No. Screw Type

charged.

Confidential
A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3
D2 D3
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

the back.

Confidential
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
D4 D5
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs



Confidential
A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7
D6 D7
Housing
Hinge Lower Cover
Top
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
P O IN T
Assy (Left) only.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A8 B8 C8
Cable Guide
D8
Guides PS Cable
Cable Guide
Guide Hook

No. Screw Type

the Cable Guide.

Confidential
A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10

D9 D10
Plate
No. Screw Type


Confidential
A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12

D11 D12
Relay Board
CN55
CN10
CN22 CN54
CN11
Guide Cover CN12
CN30
CN31
CN2



Confidential
RIPS Unit RIPS Unit
Rear Top
Printer
Hole
RIPS Unit
Ink Supply Tube

Pump cable
Top
Joint
No. Screw Type

Confidential
RIPS Unit
A13 B13 C13
Ink Supply Unit
Left Joint of ink tube D13
PF scale
Cover open sensor cable
Bottom of joint
Ink Supply Unit Cable

Slit Hook
Printer Ink Supply Unit

Ink Supply Housing
RIPS Unit
No. Screw Type
S11 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
 When lifting the main body, you wear gloves. Because there is a danger of cutting hands with 1. Release the cover open sensor cable from the slit and hook on the Ink Supply Housing.
the sharp metal enclosed by red circles, 2. Remove the four screws (S11: ), then remove the Ink Supply Unit from the Ink Supply
 Lift carefully so as not to touch the PF scale on the left side of the main body. If you touch the Housing.
6. Grasp the handle of the yellow square part on the left and right sides of the main body and Route the cables of the Ink Supply Unit on the frame of the Ink Supply Unit.
lift it vertically.
counterclockwise.

Confidential
A14 B14 C14 A15 B15 C15

Pressing Plate Upper Plate
D14 D15
CN1 Ink Sensor FFC

Pressing Plate
Upper Plate

S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S5: ), and remove the Pressing Plate. 1. Disconnect the Ink Sensor FFC from the connector (CN1) on the Ink Sensor YMCBk.
2. Remove the two screws (S5: ), and remove the Upper Plate.

Confidential
A16 B16
Decompression Pump Assy CSIC Board FFC
CSIC Board Ink Sensor

FFC (Black) YMCBk
Joint
CSIC Board
FFC (Yellow) CN2
Guide (Tube) CN3
CSIC Board
FFC (Magenta)
CSIC Board
FFC (Cyan)
Tube
Decompression
Pump
CN5
CN4
Guide (Cable)
Ferrite core
Ferrite core CSIC Board
No. Screw Type

S15 C.B.S-TITE(P4)SCREW,3X10,F/ZN-3C
1. Pull the Decompression Pump Tube from the Joint. 1. Disconnect the CSIC Board FFC from the connectors on the CSIC Board.
2. Release the decompression pump tube and decompression pump cable from the guides. 2. Pull the CSIC Board FFC from the ferrite core.
3. Remove the three screws (S15: ), then remove the Decompression Pump. 3. Disconnect the Ink Sensor FFC from the connectors on the Ink Sensor YMCBk.
Black: CN2 Magenta: CN3 Yellow: CN4 Cyan: CN5

Confidential
CSIC Board FFC

C16
Ink Sensor YMCBk
CSIC Board
FFC (Black)
CN3
CSIC Board
FFC (Yellow)
CN2 Ink Sensor YMCBk
CSIC Board
FFC (Magenta)
CN4
CN5
CSIC Board
FFC (Cyan)
No. Screw Type

S12 C.B.S-TITE SCREW, 2.5X4,F/ZB-3C
Double-sided tape
Secure the CSIC Board FFC on the position shown above with double-sided tape. 1. Disconnect the Cartridge Detection FFC from the connector on the Ink Sensor YMCBk.
Black: CN2 Magenta: CN3 Yellow: CN4 Cyan: CN5

2. Remove the four screws (S12: ), then remove the Ink Sensor YMCBk.

Confidential
Cartridge Detection Sensor Board CSIC Board

D16 D17
Top
CSIC Sensor Board
Connector
Tab Tab
CSIC Board
FFC
OK NG
CSIC Board Duct Pump Assy
CSIC Sensor Board Hook
Dowel and Groove

positioning hole
Duct Pump Assy Groove
Hook
1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector while pushing the CSIC Sensor Board. 1. Slide the CSIC Board to disengage the two hooks of the sensor from the two grooves of the
2. Push the dowel of the Duct Pump Assy using tweezers or similar tool, and release it from Duct Pump Assy.
the positioning hole on the CSIC Sensor Board. Refer to the figure above and check the installation surface of the CSIC Board.
3. Slide the CSIC Sensor Board in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
Set the CSIC Sensor Board under tab of tabs of the Duct Pump Assy.

Confidential
6.2.4.8 ADF/SCN (1) (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 only)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ADF/SCN Unit A --- --- ---
Hinge Assy B --- --- ---
Document Mat C --- --- ---
ADF Front Cover D --- --- ---
Rear ADF Cover E --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back)

D1 E1 (→P. 311)

D2 E2 (→P. 311)
A3 B3 C3 Ink Eject Cover

D3 E3 (→P. 312)
D4 E4 (→P. 312)
D5 E5 (→P. 313)
D6 E6 (→P. 313)
A7 B7 C7 ADF/SCN Unit
D7 E7 (→P. 314)
B8 Hinge Assy C8 Open the ADF Unit

(→P. 315) D8 E8 (→P. 315)
C9 Document Mat D9 ADF Front Cover E9 Rear ADF Cover

(→P. 316) (→P. 316) (→P. 317)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
Rear Cover (Back)
ASF Front Cover
Dowel and Dowel and


Rear Cover (Back)

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
Attach the two dowels of the Rear Cover (Back) to the positioning holes on the 2. Remove the ASF Front Cover upward while slightly bending the Rear Cover (Back) toward
Housing Left and Housing Right. the back.

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
D3 E3 D4 E4
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover

Tabs
No. Screw Type

Unit.

Confidential
A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6
D5 E5 D6 E6
Rear
Housing
Hooks Upper
Housing Left
Hooks Top


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7 C7
ADF/SCN Unit
D7 E7
Open Close
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
Connector Lock
CN801 Double-sided tape
CN612
CN606
CN601
Grounding cable No. Screw Type

Acetate tape S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
C H E C K When disconnecting the CISM FFC (CN601) from this connector, make sure to 3. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
P O IN T
unlock the connector lock beforehand. 4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Unit in the direction of the
arrow.
1. Disconnect the cables and FFCs from following connectors on the Main Board.
 Before screwing the ADF/SCN Unit, make sure the hinges are properly attached in place.
 If the ADF/SCN Unit is opened when the hinges are NOT secured, the unit may be damaged.
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801
2. Peel off the acetate tape, then remove the grounding cable.

Confidential
B8 C8
Hinge Assy Open the ADF Unit
D8 E8
Hinge Assy (Left) Hinge Assy (Right)
ADF lock lever

ADF Unit
No. Screw Type

C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge 1. Push the ADF lock lever in the direction of the arrow, and open the ADF Unit.
P O IN T
Assy (Left) only.
1. Remove the each screw (S4: ), and remove the two Hinge Assy.

Confidential
C9
Document Mat ADF Front Cover
D9
ADF Front Cover Dowels
Dowels
Document Mat
ADF Base
Holes
Holes
ADF Front Cover Hooks
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Document Mat. 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the ADF Front Cover.
2. Disengage two hooks, then remove the ADF Front Cover in the direction of the arrow.
Attach the four dowels to the holes of the ADF Base.

Confidential
Rear ADF Cover
Rear ADF Cover

E9
Bottom
Rear ADF Cover Hook
ADF Lower Dowels

Cover
Bottom
ADF Right
Cover
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF Lower Cover. 3. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the Rear ADF Cover.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF Right Cover. 4. Disengage the hook of the Rear ADF Cover, then remove the Rear ADF Cover.
Attach the two dowels of the Rear ADF Cover to the holes on the ADF Base.

Confidential
6.2.4.9 ADF/SCN (2) (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 only)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ADF Paper Feed Roller
Unit A --- --- ---
ADF Document Support B --- --- ---
ADF Pad Assy C --- --- ---
ADF Roller Spring D --- --- ---
ADF Separate Spring E --- --- ---
LD Frame Assy F --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 320)

D2 E2 F2 (→P. 320)

D3 E3 F3 (→P. 321)
D4 E4 F4 (→P. 321)
D5 E5 F5 (→P. 322)
D6 E6 F6 (→P. 322)
A7 B7 C7 ADF/SCN Unit
D7 E7 F7 (→P. 323)
A8 B8 C8 ADF Paper Feed Roller Unit

D8 E8 F8 (→P. 324)
B9 ADF Document Support C9 ADF Pad Assy D9 ADF Roller Spring

(→P. 324) E9 (→P. 325) F9 (→P. 325)
E10 ADF Separate Spring F10 LD Frame Assy

(→P. 326) (→P. 327)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Rear Cover (Back)
ASF Front Cover
Dowel and Dowel and


Rear Cover (Back)


Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
D3 E3 F3 D4 E4 F4
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover

Tabs
No. Screw Type

Unit.

Confidential
A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6
D5 E5 F5 D6 E6 F6
Rear
Housing
Hooks Upper
Housing Left
Hooks Top


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7 C7
ADF/SCN Unit
D7 E7 F7
Open Close
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
Connector Lock
CN612
CN606
CN601

P O IN T
arrow.
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801

Confidential
A8 B7 C7 B9
ADF Paper Feed Roller Unit ADF Document Support
D7 E7 F7
Flathead ADF Document Support

screwdriver
Dowel
(White)
ADF Paper Feed Roller Unit Dowel
Dowel
Dowel
Dowel
1. Open the ADF Paper Feed Roller Unit. 1. Disengage the two dowels of the ADF Document Support while bending it, then remove the
2. Disengage the two dowels, one each on the left and right sides, while pressing the dowel ADF Document Support.
(white) with a flathead screwdriver, and then remove the ADF Paper Feed Roller Unit.

Confidential
C9
ADF Pad Assy ADF Roller Spring
E9 D9 F9
ADF Upper Paper Guide ADF Cover Fixing Plate
ADF Separate Pad
Hook Hook
ADF Sub
Cover
Hooks
Dowels
No. Screw Type

1. Disengage two hooks of the ADF Separate Pad. 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the ADF Upper Paper Guide.
2. Disengage two dowels of the ADF Separate Pad, then remove the ADF Separate Pad. 2. Disengage two hooks, and remove the ADF Upper Paper Guide from the ADF Cover and
ADF Sub Cover.
3. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the Fixing Plate.

Confidential
ADF Roller Spring
ADF Separate Spring

E10
ADF Upper Paper Guide Tab

Leg of spring
ADF Roller Spring
Groove and bearing

ADF Separate Spring ADF Base
Paper Feed Roller Shaft
4. Pull the Paper Feed Roller Shaft in the direction of the arrow. 1. Remove the ADF Separate Spring.
Set the groove the Paper Feed Roller Shaft on the bearing of the ADF Upper Paper Set the leg of the ADF Separate Spring under the tab on the ADF Base.
Guide.
5. Remove the ADF Roller Spring.

Confidential
LD Frame Assy
F10
Stopper
LD Frame Assy ADF Upper Paper Guide
1. Lift the LD Frame Assy to release the stopper of the LD Frame Assy from the ADF Upper
Paper Guide, then remove the LD Frame Assy.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Wireless Lan Module A --- --- ---
PDL Board Assy B --- --- ---
Fax Assy* C --- --- ---
USB Interface Board* D --- --- ---
SD Memory E --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4
P O IN T Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254) in the case
of the WF-C5200 Series, and remove the parts from the
Preparation for EEPROM Data Copy Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
Dissembling (Back up) (→P. 564)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
A1 B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back)  Implement the procedure indicated by when
(→P. 330) replacing the Main Board Assy. See Initial settings (p.
D1 E1 F1
565) and carry out EEPROM Data Copy (Backup)
beforehand and EEPROM Data Copy (Load) after
A2 B2 C2 ASF Front Cover replacement.
D2 E2 F2 (→P. 330)
A3 B3 C3 Housing Left A4 Wireless Lan Module B4 PDL Board Assy a

D3 E3 F3 (→P. 331) (→P. 331) E4 (→P. 332)
Ink Eject Cover Cable Guide E5 SD Memory

F4 (→P. 335) F10 (→P. 338) (→P. 334)
Housing Right Extension Spring 11.11

F5 (→P. 335) F11 (→P. 339) a
Housing Upper CR Scale C4 FAX Assy D4 USB Interface Board*

F6 (→P. 336) F12 (→P. 340) (→P. 333) (→P. 328)
* : Depending on the axial length of the driver, damage

ADF/SCN Unit PS Ground Plate may occur on the screw head due to oblique cutting.
F7 (→P. 336) F13 (→P. 340) In such a case, remove the USB Interface Board
after removing the Main Board Assy.
Hinge Assy Main Board Assy
F8 (→P. 337) F14 (→P. 341)
Hinge Lower Cover Wireless Lan Module Main Board After EEPROM Data Copy
F9 (→P. 338) F15 (→P. 343) F16 (→P. 344) assembling (Restore) (→P. 564)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Rear Cover (Back)
ASF Front Cover
Dowel and Dowel and


Rear Cover (Back)


Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4
Housing Left Wireless Lan Module
D3 E3 F3
Rear
CRCM FFC
CRCM FFC Sheet
Double-sided
tape
Double-sided
Hooks tape
Housing Left
Main Board
Assy
Hooks
CN31
No. Screw Type
S4 Tab Wireless Lan Module
C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the CRCM FFC Sheet.
2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left. 2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.
3. Lift the Housing Left to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Left. 3. Disconnect the Wireless Lan Module from the connector (CN31) on the Main Board Assy.

Confidential
PDL Board Assy

B4
PDL Board Assy
E4
PDL Board Assy
FFC
PDL Board Assy
CN102
Shield Plate
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN102) on the PDL Board Assy. 3. Remove the two screws (S5: ), then remove the PDL Board Assy from the Shield Plate.
2. Remove the screw (S5: ), then remove the PDL Board Assy.

Confidential
Fax Assy
C4
Fax Assy
Acetate tape
Shield Plate
CN1
Fax Assy
Fax FFC
Double-sided tape
Fax Assy
Acetate tape
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

1. Peel off the Fax FFC from the Fax Assy. 4. Remove the three screws (S5: ) that secure the Shield Plate.
2. Remove the three screws (S5: ), and slide the Fax Assy in the direction of the arrow. 5. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, and remove the Shield Plate.
3. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, then remove the Fax Assy. 6. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN1) on the Fax Assy.

Confidential
USB Interface Board SD Memory

D4 E5
USB Interface Board

Holder SD Memory
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the USB Interface Board. 1. Slide the Holder in the direction of the arrow.
2. Raise the holder, then remove the SD Memory.

Confidential

F4 F5
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover

Tabs
No. Screw Type

Unit.

Confidential
Housing Upper ADF/SCN Unit

F6 F7
Open Close
Housing
Upper
Connector Lock
Top CN612
CN606
CN601
No. Screw Type

Grounding cable
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Acetate tape
1. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Upper. C H E C K When disconnecting the CISM FFC (CN601) from this connector, make sure to
P O IN T
unlock the connector lock beforehand.
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
Hinge Assy
F8
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °

3. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge
P O IN T
4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Unit in the direction of the Assy (Left) only.
arrow.

Confidential
Hinge Lower Cover Cable Guide

F9 F10
Hinge Lower Hinge Lower

Cover (Left) Cover (Right) Cable Guide
Hinge Lower Cover

C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge 1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.
P O IN T
Assy (Left) only. 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Cable Guide
Extension Spring 11.11

F11
Guides PS Cable
CR Scale
Solenoid cable Cable Guide Extension Spring 11.11
Main Frame
Guide Hook

 Route the PS cable through the two guides and hook on the Cable Guide. 1. Remove the Extension Spring 11.11 from the CR Scale.
 Route the solenoid cable through the five hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide. 2. Remove the Extension Spring 11.11 from the Main Frame.
the Cable Guide.

Confidential
CR Scale PS Ground Plate

F12 F13
Full side Side view CR Encoder Home side

Sensor
Hook
CR Scale Hook PS Ground Plate
CR Unit CR Scale
No. Screw Type

Marking
1. At the full side, remove the CR Scale from hook on the frame. 1. Remove the two screws (S4: , S5: ), then remove the PS Ground Plate.
2. Pull the CR Scale out from the CR Encoder Sensor.
3. At the home side, turn the CR Scale 90 degrees upward, and remove it from the hook on the
frame.
Attach the CR Scale with the marking on the bottom right corner.

Confidential
Main Board Assy
Main Board Assy

F14 Back Connector lock Close
CN3
CN42
Open
CN68 CN66 CN67 CN8

Double- Double-
sided tape CRCM FFC Sheet sided tape
CN55 CN9 CN44 CN110
CN80 CN74 CN53 CN609
CN33
CN77 CN75 CN73 CN72
CN50 CN52 CN2 CN34
Double- CRCM FFC Double-

sided tape sided tape
1. Peel off the CRCM FFC. C H E C K When disconnecting the Panel FFC (CN42), make sure to unlock the connector lock
P O IN T
2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet. beforehand.
3. Disconnect the following connectors from the board. (* are WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700
only)
• CN2 • CN3* • CN8 • CN9 • CN33* • CN34

• CN42 • CN44* • CN50 • CN52 • CN53 • CN55
• CN66 • CN67 • CN68 • CN72 • CN73 • CN74
• CN75 • CN77 • CN80 • CN110 • CN609

Confidential
Main Board Assy Main Board Assy
CR motor cable Back Inside
Clamps
Hook
PE sensor cable
Main Board Assy
Ferrite core Clamp Relay FFC
Fax FFC
No. Screw Type

PF Scale
S10 C.B.S-TITE.P4.SCREW-3X8-F.ZN-3
Double-sided tape S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
4. Peel off the Fax FFC from the Shield Plate, and Pull the Fax FFC out from the ferrite core. 8. Remove the following screws that secure the Main Board Assy.
(WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 only)  WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700: x9 (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1, S5: x2)
5. Release the PE sensor cable from the clamp.  WF-C5200 Series: x7 (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1)
6. Peel off the Relay FFC from the Shield Plate. In the next step, be careful not to damage the PF Scale.
7. Release the CR motor cable from two clamps.
9. Disengage hook of the Main Board Assy from the hole of the CR Guide Frame, then
remove the Main Board Assy upward.

Confidential
Main Board Assy
Wireless Lan Module

F15
CRCM FFC
Main Board Assy CRCM FFC Sheet
Double-sided
CN52 tape
Double-sided
tape
Main Board
PF Encoder FFC Assy
Double-sided tape
CN31
Wireless Lan Module
Secure the PF Encoder FFC with double-sided tape as shown above. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the CRCM FFC Sheet.
2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.
3. Disconnect the Wireless Lan Module from the connector (CN31) on the Main Board Assy.

Confidential
Main Board
F16
Main Board MB Shield Plate Lower
MB Shield Plate Upper
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the MB Shield Plate Upper.
2. Remove the Main Board from the MB Shield Plate Lower.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Relay Board Assy A --- --- ---
Speaker Assy* B --- --- ---
Power Supply Assy C --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back)  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4

C H E C K
C1 (→P. 347) P O IN T Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254) in the case of
A2 B2 ASF Front Cover Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
(→P. 347)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
C2
A3 B3 Housing Left
C3 (→P. 348)
B4 Ink Eject Cover A4 Relay Board Assy

C4 (→P. 350) (→P. 348)
B5 Housing Right
C5 (→P. 350)
B6 Housing Upper
C6 (→P. 351)
Cable Guide B7 Speaker Assy Rear ASF Assy

C7 (→P. 352) (→P. 351) C11 (→P. 355)
ADF/SCN Unit PS Ground Plate

C8 (→P. 353) C12 (→P. 356)
Hinge Assy Rear ASF Upper Guide

C9 (→P. 354) C13 Assy (→P. 356)
Hinge Lower Cover Power Supply Assy

C10 (→P. 354) C14 (→P. 357)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
Rear Cover (Back)
ASF Front Cover
Dowel and Dowel and


Rear Cover (Back)


Confidential
A3 B3 A4
Housing Left Relay Board Assy
C3
Rear
CRCM FFC
CRCM FFC Sheet
Double-sided tape
Hooks Double-sided tape
Housing Left
Hooks
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Tab
1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the CRCM FFC Sheet.
2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left. 2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.

Confidential
Relay Board Assy Relay Board Assy
Grounding cable
Relay Board
Relay Board Assy
Shield Plate
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type
S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
3. Disconnect the cables and FFCs from all connectors on the Relay Board Assy. 6. Remove the four screws (S5: ), and remove the Relay Board from the Shield Plate.
4. Remove the grounding cable from the Frame.
5. Remove the four screws (S4: x2, S5: x2), then remove the Relay Board Assy.

Confidential
B4 B5
C4 C5
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover

Tabs
No. Screw Type

Unit.

Confidential
B6 B7
Housing Upper Speaker Assy
C6
Top
Main Board Assy
Housing
Upper
CN3 Cable Speaker Assy
Top
Speaker Holder
Slit

1. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Upper. 1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN3) on the Main Board Assy.
2. Release the cable from seven slits on the Frame Base.
3. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Speaker Holder.
4. Remove the Speaker Assy.

Confidential
Cable Guide
Cable Guide
C7
Guides PS Cable
Cable Guide
Guide Hook

No. Screw Type

the Cable Guide.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
ADF/SCN Unit
C8
Open Close
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
Connector Lock
CN612
CN606
CN601

P O IN T
arrow.
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801

Confidential
Hinge Assy Hinge Lower Cover

C9 C10

Hinge Assy (Left) Hinge Assy (Right) Cover (Left) Cover (Right)
Hinge Lower Cover

C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge
P O IN T P O IN T
Assy (Left) only. Assy (Left) only.
1. Remove the each screw (S4: ), and remove the two Hinge Assy. 1. Remove the each three screws (S4: ), and remove the two Hinge Lower Cover.

Confidential
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Assy

C11
Cable Guide
Rear ASF Assy

Solenoid cable
Photo interrupter cable
CN56
CN51
Relay Board
No. Screw Type
1. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN51, CN56) on the Relay Board. 3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Rear ASF Assy.
2. Release the solenoid cable and photo interrupter cable from the Cable Guide.
 Route the solenoid cable through the five hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide.
 Route the photo interrupter cable through the three hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide.

Confidential
PS Ground Plate Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy

C12 C13
FFC
Top
Hooks
PS Ground Plate
Rear
Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy AC Inlet

S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S4: , S5: ), then remove the PS Ground Plate. 1. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the AC Inlet.
2. Release the FFC from three hooks on the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy.
3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy.

Confidential
Power Supply Assy

C14
PS Cable
Ferrite Core Ferrite Core
Slit Power Supply Assy Slit
AC Cable Hook Slit Hook Guide
Rea ASF Upper Guide Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the Power Supply Assy.
 Route the AC Cable through the two slits, two hooks and guide on the Rea ASF Upper Guide
Assy.
 Route the PS Cable through the slit on the Rea ASF Upper Guide Assy.

Confidential
6.2.4.12 Electrical Components (3) (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Panel Assy A --- --- ---
Numpad Board Assy B --- --- ---
Panel Board C --- --- ---
Relay Cable (Panel to

Main) D --- --- ---
Relay Cable (Panel to

E --- --- ---
Numpad)

Confidential
Start
Start

D1 E1 (→P. 360)

D2 E2 (→P. 360)

D3 E3 (→P. 361)
D4 E4 (→P. 361)
D5 E5 (→P. 362)
D6 E6 (→P. 362)
A7 B7 C7 Cable Guide
D7 E7 (→P. 363)
A8 B8 C8 Panel Assy
D8 E8 (→P. 364)
B9 C9 Panel Housing
D9 E9 (→P. 365)
B10 Numpad Board Assy C10 Panel Board D10 Relay Cable (Panel to Main) E10 Relay Cable (Panel to
(→P. 365) (→P. 366) (→P. 366) Numpad) (→P. 367)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
Rear Cover (Back)
ASF Front Cover
Dowel and Dowel and


Rear Cover (Back)


Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
D3 E3 D4 E4
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover

Tabs
No. Screw Type

Unit.

Confidential
A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6
D5 E5 D6 E6
Rear
Housing
Hooks Upper
Housing Left
Hooks Top


Confidential
Cable Guide
A7 B7 C7
Cable Guide
D7 E7
Guides PS Cable
Cable Guide
Guide Hook

No. Screw Type

the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Panel Assy
A8 B8 C8
Panel Assy
D8 E8
Close
Right Panel Holder

FFC Tab
Open
Ferrite core
Bearing Shaft Panel Assy
Main Board
Assy
Double-sided tape
CN42
Connector lock
No. Screw Type

C H E C K When disconnecting the FFC, make sure to unlock the connector lock beforehand. 4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Right Panel Holder.
P O IN T
5. Release the shaft of the Panel Assy from bearing, then remove the Panel Assy.
1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN42) on the Main Board Assy.
2. Peel off the FFC from the Frame Base.
3. Release the FFC from two tabs on the Frame Base.
Set the ferrite core of the FFC in the point shown above.

Confidential
B9 C9 B10
Panel Housing Numpad Board Assy
D9 E9
Panel FFCCover
Cover
Numpad Board Assy Panel Board
Relay Cable Double-sided tape CN311
OK NG
Panel Housing Hole Panel FFC Cover
Relay Cable Cover

Hooks Relay Cable Hook
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the six screws (S4: ) that secure the Panel Housing. 1. Peel off the Relay Cable Cover, and disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN311) on the
2. Disengage three hooks on the Panel Housing, and remove the Panel Housing. Panel Board.
3. Remove the Panel FFC Cover. 2. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Relay Cable Cover.
3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Numpad Board Assy.
Install the Panel FFC Cover as shown above.
4. Pull the Relay Cable out from the hole of the Panel Housing.

Confidential
C10
Panel Board Relay Cable (Panel to Main)
D10
Relay Cable
CN101
Connector lock
CN311 Panel Board
Panel Board
CN302
Close Open
No. Screw Type

1. Disconnect the FFC from the connectors (CN302, CN311) on the Panel Board. C H E C K When disconnecting the FFC, make sure to unlock the connector lock beforehand.
P O IN T
2. Remove the eight screws (S4: ), then remove the Panel Board.
1. Disconnect the Relay Cable from the connector (CN101) on the Panel Board.

Confidential
Relay Cable (Panel to Numpad)

E10
Numpad Board Assy Panel Board
Relay Cable Double-sided tape CN311
CN102
Relay Cable Cover
1. Peel off the Relay Cable from the Relay Cable Cover.
2. Disconnect the Relay Cable from the connectors (CN102, CN311) on the Panel Board and
Numpad Board Assy.

Confidential
6.2.4.13 Electrical Components (3) (WF-C5200 Series)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Panel Assy A --- --- ---
Panel Board B --- --- ---
Relay Cable (Panel to Main) C --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Back Cover

C1 (→P. 370)
A2 B2 Rear Upper Cover Assy

C2 (→P. 371)
A3 B3 Housing ASF
C3 (→P. 371)
A4 B4 Printer Cover
C4 (→P. 372)
A5 B5 Ink Eject Cover

C5 (→P. 372)
A6 B6 Housing Right
C6 (→P. 373)
A7 B7 Housing Left
C7 (→P. 373)
A8 B8 Housing Top
C8 (→P. 374)
A9 B9 Cable Guide B11 Panel Housing

C9 (→P. 374) C11 (→P. 376)
A10 B10 Panel Assy B12 Panel Board C12 Relay Cable (Panel to Main)
C10 (→P. 375) (→P. 377) (→P. 377)

Confidential
Rear Back Cover

A1 B1
Rear Back Cover
C1
Top Rear Upper

Cover Assy
Rear Rear Back

Rear Back Cover
Cover
Dowel Dowel
No. Screw Type


Confidential
A2 B2 A3 B3
Rear Upper Cover Assy Housing ASF
C2 C3
Housing ASF
Rear Upper Cover Assy
Housing ASF
Tabs
Printer
Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Rear Upper Cover Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Open the Printer Cover.
Insert the four tabs of the Rear Upper Cover Assy to the positioning holes of the 2. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing ASF.
Housing ASF.

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
Printer Cover Ink Eject Cover
C4 C5
Printer Cover Hook
Ink Eject Cover
1. Remove the Printer Cover upward. 1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Ink Eject Cover.

Confidential
A6 B6 A7 B7
C6 C7
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks

Tab S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Tab
1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Right. 1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
2. Lift the Housing Right upward to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing 2. Lift the Housing Left upward to release the two hooks each on the front side and rear side of
Right, and then remove the Housing Right. the Housing Left, and then remove the Housing Left.
Insert the four tabs of the Housing Right to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Insert the four tabs of the Housing Left to the positioning holes of the Ink Supply Unit.
Unit.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
Housing Top Cable Guide
C8 C9
Cable Guide
Housing Top

1. Remove six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Top. 1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A10 B10
Panel Assy
C10
Close
Guides PS Cable
FFC Tab
Open
Ferrite Core
Main Board
Assy
Guide Hook
Double-sided tape

ASF motor cable Photo interrupter cable CN42
Connector lock
The disassembling procedure for the Panel
C H E C K
P O IN T
Assy of the WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 is
explained here.
The appearance of the Panel Assy differs
between WF-C5200 Series and WF-C5700
Series/ET-8700, however, the disassembly and
assembly procedure itself is the same.
 Route the PS cable through the two guides and hook on the Cable Guide. 1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN42) on the Main Board Assy.
C H E C K When disconnecting the FFC, make sure to unlock the connector lock beforehand.
 Route the rear ASF sensor cable and photo interrupter cable through the three hooks ( ) on P O IN T
the Cable Guide.


Confidential
Panel Assy
B11
Panel Housing
C11
Panel FFC Cover
Right Panel Holder
OK NG
Hook Panel FFC Cover

Hook Panel Housing Hole
Relay Cable Hooks

Hooks
4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Right Panel Holder. 1. Remove the five screws (S4: ) that secure the Panel Housing.
5. Release the shaft of the Panel Assy from the bearing, then remove the Panel Assy. 2. Disengage five hooks on the Panel Housing, then remove the Panel Housing.
3. Remove the Panel FFC Cover.
Attach the panel FFC Cover as shown above.
4. Pull the Relay Cable out from the hole of the Panel Housing.

Confidential
B12
Panel Board Relay Cable (Panel to Main)
C12
Relay Cable
CN1 Connector lock
Panel Board
FFC
Panel Board Close Open

CN2
No. Screw Type

1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN2) on the Panel Board. C H E C K When disconnecting the Relay Cable, make sure to unlock the connector lock
P O IN T
2. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Panel Board. beforehand.
1. Disconnect the Relay Cable from the connector (CN1) on the Panel Board.

Confidential
6.2.4.14 Inksystem
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Ink Eject Cover A --- --- ---
Inksystem Unit B --- --- ---
Maintenance Box Detect

Sensor Assy C --- --- ---
Porous Pad Cap Lower D --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 Ink Eject Cover B1 D1 Rear Cover (Back) C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4
(→P. 380) C1 (→P. 380) P O IN T Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254) in the case of
Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
B2 D2 ASF Front Cover  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
C2 (→P. 381)
B3 D3 Ink Eject Cover

C3 (→P. 381)
B4 D4 Housing Right
C4 (→P. 382)
B5 D5 Housing Left
C5 (→P. 382)
B6 D6 Housing Upper
C6 (→P. 383)
B7 D7 ADF/SCN Unit
C7 (→P. 383)
B8 D8 Slide the Wasted Ink Duct

C8 Holder (→P. 384)
B9 Inksystem Unit C9 Maintenance Box Detect

D9 (→P. 385) Sensor Assy (→P. 387)
D10 Porous Pad Cap Lower

(→P. 388)

Confidential
A1 B1
Ink Eject Cover Rear Cover (Back)
C1 D1
Rear Cover (Back)
Hook
Dowel and Dowel and

Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Disengage the hook, and remove the Ink Eject Cover. 1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back).

Confidential
B2 B3
C2 D2 C3 D3
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

the back.

Confidential
B4 B5
C4 D4 C5 D5
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs



Confidential
B6 B7
C6 D6 C7 D7
Open Close
Housing
Upper
Connector Lock
Top CN612
CN606
CN601
No. Screw Type

Grounding cable
P O IN T
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
B8
Slide the Wasted Ink Duct Holder
C8 D8
Hook
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
Wasted Ink Duct Holder
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
3. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Remove the screws (S4: ) that secure the Wasted Ink Duct Holder.
4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Unit in the direction of the 2. Disengage the hook, and slide the Wasted Ink Duct Holder to rear.
arrow.

Confidential
Inksystem Unit
B9
Inksystem Unit
D9 Top
Grounding cable
Wasted Ink Tube
Tube clamp
Grounding cable Upper Cap Frame Relay connector
Wasted Ink Duct Holder

Cable
No. Screw Type

C H E C K Before removing the Inksystem Unit, release the carriage lock, and then move the CR 2. Remove the three screws (S5: ), then remove the Upper Cap Frame.
P O IN T
Unit to center of the printer. Secure the grounding cables together with the screws.
In the next step, waste ink may spill from the Wasted Ink Tube. Prepare waste cloths
or similar in advance. 3. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector.
1. Slide the tube clamp, and remove the Wasted Ink Tube from the Wasted Ink Duct Holder.

Confidential
Inksystem Unit Inksystem Unit
Hook Pump Encoder Sensor
FFC Acetate tape Inksystem Unit
Slit
Upper Cap FFC Cover Upper Cap FFC Cover
FFC
Guide
Wasted Ink Tube
Slit
Tabs
Inksystem Unit

Pump motor cable
4. Disengage hook, then remove the Upper Cap FFC Cover. 7. Peel off a piece of acetate tape.
Route the FFC through the slit on the Upper Cap FFC Cover. 8. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Inksystem Unit.
 Route the Wasted Ink Tube through the guide on the Inksystem Unit.
 Route the pump motor cable through the slit on the Inksystem Unit.
5. Disconnect the FFC from the Pump Encoder Sensor.
6. Release the FFC from the three tabs on the Inksystem Unit.

Confidential

C9 Main Board Assy Connector Hooks
Maintenance Box
Detect Sensor Holder FFC Paper Feed Sensor Unit FFC
Top
FFC Main Frame Assy
FFC
No. Screw Type Maintenance Box

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Detect Sensor
Double-sided tape
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) that secure the Maintenance Box Detect Sensor Holder. 2. Disconnect the FFC of the Maintenance Box Detect Sensor from the connector on the Main
Board.
3. Release the FFC from four hooks on the Paper Feed Sensor Unit.
4. Peel off the FFC from the Main Frame Assy and maintenance box slot.

Confidential
Porous Pad Cap Lower

FFC D10
Maintenance Box
Upper Cover
Gap
Porous Pad
Cap Lower
Paper Feed Sensor Unit
Maintenance Box
Detect Sensor Assy
5. Remove the Maintenance Box Detect Sensor Assy from the maintenance box slot. 1. Remove the Porous Pad Cap Lower.
Route in such a way that the FFC terminal (contact surface) is at the side of the Paper
Feed Sensor Unit from the gap of the Maintenance Box Upper Cover.

Confidential
6.2.4.15 Carriage Mechanism (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Extension Spring 11.11 A --- --- ---
CR Scale B --- --- ---
Ink Supply Tube C --- --- ---
Seal Joint Head D --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
Preparation for Ink Discharge the WF-C5200 Series, and remove the parts from the
Dissembling (→P. 391) Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
 The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back)  Implement the procedure indicated by when
C1 D1 (→P. 392)
removing the Ink Tube from the RIPS Unit and
Printhead.
A2 B2 ASF Front Cover
C2 D2 (→P. 393)

C3 D3 (→P. 393)
A4 B4 Housing Right
C4 D4 (→P. 394)
A5 B5 Housing Left A8 B8 Extension Spring 11.11 C8 D8 Head Upper Cover

C5 D5 (→P. 394) (→P. 396) (→P. 397)
A6 B6 Housing Upper B9 CR Scale C9 D9 Plate

C6 D6 (→P. 395) (→P. 397) (→P. 398)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit C10 D10 Ink Supply Tube

C7 D7 (→P. 395) (→P. 398)
D11 Seal Joint Head

(→P. 402)

Confidential

Open Sensor
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover
Ink Pack Tray CL

Ink Pack Tray BK

Confidential
Ink Discharge
A1 B1
Rear Cover (Back)
C1 D1
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

No. Screw Type

charged.

Confidential
A2 B2 A3 B3
C2 D2 C3 D3
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

the back.

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
C4 D4 C5 D5
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs



Confidential
A6 B6 A7 B7
C6 D6 C7 D7
Open Close
Housing
Upper
Connector Lock
Top CN612
CN606
CN601
No. Screw Type

Grounding cable
P O IN T
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A8 B8
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
CR Scale
Main Frame
No. Screw Type

3. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Remove the Extension Spring 11.11 from the CR Scale.
4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Unit in the direction of the 2. Remove the Extension Spring 11.11 from the Main Frame.
arrow.

Confidential
B9
CR Scale Head Upper Cover
C8 D8
Full side Side view CR Encoder Home side Tabs and positioning holes
Sensor
Hook
Head Upper Cover
CR Scale Hook
CR Unit CR Scale
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type

S7 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZB-3C
Marking Film S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. At the full side, remove the CR Scale from hook on the frame. 1. Remove the two screws (S7: ), and remove the Head Upper Cover.
2. Pull the CR Scale out from the CR Encoder Sensor. Attach the two tabs on the Head Upper Cover to the positioning holes of the CR Unit.
frame.
Attach the CR Scale with the marking on the bottom right corner. 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Ink Tube Joint Cover.
3. Remove the film from the hook on the Ink Tube Joint Cover.
Set the film under the rib of the Ink Tube Joint Cover.

Confidential
Plate Ink Supply Tube

C9 D9 C10 D10
Plate
Plate
Ink Supply Tube

S6 C.B.SCREW-2.6X18-F.ZN-3C S8 C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), and remove the Plate. In the following steps, ink may spill from the Ink Supply Tube. Prepare waste cloths
When installing the Ink Supply Tube to the RIPS Unit, make sure to tighten the or similar in advance.
1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and remove the Ink Supply Tube from the Printhead.
Make sure the plate was attached.

Confidential
Ink Supply Tube Ink Supply Tube
Tube Clamp Tube Holder Hook Ink Supply Tube
87.5 ± 1 mm
Ink Supply Tube
Joint
Marking Hook
No. Screw Type

2. Remove the Ink Supply Tube from the Tube Clamp. 4. Remove the screw (S4: ).
At the marking point on the Ink Supply Tube, attach the Ink Supply Tube to the Tube 5. Remove the Ink Supply Tube from the Joint, and remove the Ink Supply Tube.
Clamp. If the marking is not visible, refer to the drawing above to attach the Ink
Supply Tube.
3. Remove the Tube Holder while pressing the hooks outward.

Confidential
 Types of Ink Leak Measurement Jig

Rear side Right side
Part Name Part Code Photo Remark
LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
10mm
LEAK TESTER 1684354

Smoked
SHEET REAR Face
Bottom
15mm
90°
Ink Leak Measurement Jig
Left side Front side
90°
Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Printhead by using the Cleaning stick, In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to
because perform the Ink Leak Check correctly. assembly mistake.
Therefore, make sure to install the ink leak measurement jig when installing the Ink
If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Printhead, Ink Leak Check can not perform Tube to Printhead.
correctly. Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds
Therefore cleaning the ink surely. until the fold angle become 90 degrees.

Confidential
Rear side LEAK TESTER SHEET REAR
The smoked face is

put toward the upside.
Front side LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT
LEAK TESTER SHEET REAR
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT
1. Set the ink leak measurement jig to the ink tube connector of the Print Head. After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.563) to remove the
2. Set the Ink Supply Tube to the Printhead. LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT/REAR, then perform Leak Check Judgement.
3. After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.563) to remove
the LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT/REAR, then perform Leak Check
Judgement.
 The smoked face of ink leak measurement jig is put toward the upside.
 When installing the Ink Supply Tube, make sure to tighten the screws using a torque driver
with the specified torque.

Confidential
Seal Joint Head

D11
Ink Supply Tube
Wiping area
Printhead Connector
Seal Joint Head
1. Remove the Seal Joint Head between the Ink Supply Tube and Printhead.
 If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit, Ink Leak Check can not perform
correctly. Therefore cleaning the ink surely.
 Replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot be reused.
 Check the seal joint head is not double-installed.
 Check the seal joint head is inserted all the way.
 Check the foreign object does not adhere on the seal joint head.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Head Screw Assy A --- --- ---
Printhead B --- --- ---
Head FFC Assy C --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
Preparation for Ink Discharge the WF-C5200 Series, and remove the parts from the
Dissembling (→P. 405) Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) Printhead.
C1 (→P. 406)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
C2 (→P. 407)

C3 (→P. 407)
A4 B4 Housing Right
C4 (→P. 408)
A8 B8 Head Upper Cover
A5 B5 Housing Left (→P. 410)
C8
C5 (→P. 408)
A9 B9 Head Screw Assy C11 Cable Guide
A6 B6 Housing Upper C9 (→P. 411) (→P. 414)
C6 (→P. 409)
B10 Printhead C12 Head FFC Assy
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit C10 (→P. 412) (→P. 415)
C7 (→P. 409)

Confidential

Open Sensor
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover
Ink Pack Tray CL

Ink Pack Tray BK

Confidential
Ink Discharge
A1 B1
Rear Cover (Back)
C1
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

No. Screw Type

charged.

Confidential
A2 B2 A3 B3
C2 C3
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

the back.

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
C4 C5
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs



Confidential
A6 B6 A7 B7
C6 C7
Open Close
Housing
Upper
Connector Lock
Top CN612
CN606
CN601
No. Screw Type

Grounding cable
P O IN T
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A8 B8
Head Upper Cover
C8
Tabs and positioning holes
Head Upper Cover

ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type S7 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZB-3C
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Film S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
3. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Remove the two screws (S7: ), and remove the Head Upper Cover.
4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Unit in the direction of the Attach the two tabs on the Head Upper Cover to the positioning holes of the CR Unit.
arrow.
 If the ADF/SCN Unit is opened when the hinges are NOT secured, the unit may be damaged. 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Ink Tube Joint Cover.

Confidential
Head Screw Assy

A9 B9
Head Screw Assy
C9
Head Screw
Plate
3 1
Ink Supply Tube
Head Screw
No. Screw Type

S8 C.B.EP-TITE SCREW,2.6X17(B=14),F/ZN-3C
In the following steps, ink may spill from the Ink Supply Tube. Prepare waste cloths 2. Remove the three Head Screw Assy.
or similar in advance. Tighten the screws in order given above.
1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and remove the Ink Supply Tube from the Printhaed.

Confidential
Printhead
B10
Printhead
C10
Seal Joint Head

Head FFC Assy Printhead Connectors
Ink Tube Connector
Double-sided tape Double-sided tape
Wiping area
Connectors
Printhead
Do not touch the nozzle surface of the Printhead. Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning
stick, because perform the Ink Leak Check correctly.
1. Peel off the Head FFC Assy from the Printhead, then remove the Printhead.  If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit, Ink Leak Check can not perform
2. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the four connectors of the Printhead. correctly. Therefore cleaning the ink surely.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
 Types of Ink Leak Measurement Jig Rear side LEAK TESTER SHEET REAR

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
The smoked face is
10mm put toward the upside.
LEAK TESTER 1684354

Smoked
SHEET REAR Face
15mm
90°
90°
In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to 1. Set the ink leak measurement jig to the ink tube connector of the Print Head.
assembly mistake. 2. Set the Ink Supply Tube to the Printhead.
Therefore, make sure to install the ink leak measurement jig when installing the Ink 3. After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.563) to remove
Tube to Printhead. the LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT/REAR, then perform Leak Check
Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds Judgement.
until the fold angle become 90 degrees.  The smoked face of ink leak measurement jig is put toward the upside.

Confidential
Printhead
Cable Guide
C11
Cable Guide
No. Screw Type

After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.563) to remove the 1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT/REAR, then perform Leak Check Judgement. 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Cable Guide
Head FFC Assy

C12
Guides PS Cable
Head FFC Assy CR Unit CR Encoder Sensor
Guide Hook

Tab Slit
 Route the PS cable through the two guides and hook on the Cable Guide. 1. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the connector on the CR Encoder Sensor.
 Route the solenoid cable through the five hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide. 2. Pull the Head FFC Assy out from the slit of the CR Unit.
the Cable Guide. Route the Head FFC Assy under the tab of the CR Unit.

Confidential
Head FFC Assy
Tabs Ferrite core
CN68/CN66/CN67
Head FFC Assy
Main Board
Assy
3. Release the Head FFC Assy from the seven tabs on the Frame Base.
4. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the connectors (CN66, CN67, CN68) on the Main
Board Assy.
Set the ferrite core of the Head FFC Assy in the point shown above.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
CR Driven Pulley Assy A --- --- ---
CR Unit B --- --- ---
CR Motor C --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
a
Preparation for Ink Discharge A10 B10 Cable Guide B19 Printhead
Dissembling (→P. 419) C10 (→P. 425) C19 (→P. 434)
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) A11 B11 Extension Spring 11.11 B20 Frame Plate
C1 (→P. 420) C11 (→P. 426) C20 (→P. 436)
A2 B2 ASF Front Cover A12 B12 CR Scale B21 Main Frame Assy
C2 (→P. 421) C12 (→P. 427) C21 (→P. 437)
A3 B3 Ink Eject Cover A13 B13 PS Ground Plate B22 CR Unit C22 CR Motor
C3 (→P. 421) C13 (→P. 427) (→P. 438) (→P. 438)
A4 B4 Housing Right A14 B14 Rear ASF Assy

C4 (→P. 422) C14 (→P. 428)
A5 B5 Housing Left A15 B15 Rear ASF Upper Guide

C5 (→P. 422) C15 Assy (→P. 429)
A6 B6 Housing Upper B16 Main Board Assy A16 CR Driven Pulley Assy
C6 (→P. 423) C16 (→P. 430) (→P. 429)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit B17 Head Upper Cover  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4
C H E C K
C7 (→P. 423) C17 (→P. 432) Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254) in the case of
P O IN T
A8 B8 Hinge Assy B18 Head Screw Assy Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
C8 (→P. 424) (→P. 433)  Implement the procedure indicated by when
C18
Printhead.
A9 B9 Hinge Lower Cover a  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in
C9 (→P. 425) the WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700.

Confidential

Open Sensor
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover
Ink Pack Tray CL

Ink Pack Tray BK

Confidential
Ink Discharge
A1 B1
Rear Cover (Back)
C1
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

No. Screw Type

charged.

Confidential
A2 B2 A3 B3
C2 C3
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

the back.

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
C4 C5
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs



Confidential
A6 B6 A7 B7
C6 C7
Open Close
Housing
Upper
Connector Lock
Top CN612
CN606
CN601
No. Screw Type

Grounding cable
P O IN T
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A8 B8
Hinge Assy
C8
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °

P O IN T
arrow.

Confidential
A9 B9 A10 B10
Hinge Lower Cover Cable Guide
C9 C10

Cover (Left) Cover (Right) Cable Guide
Hinge Lower Cover

C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge 1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.
P O IN T
Assy (Left) only. 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A11 B11
C11
Guides PS Cable
CR Scale
Main Frame
Guide Hook

the Cable Guide.

Confidential
A12 B12 A13 B13

C12 C13

Sensor
Hook
CR Unit CR Scale
No. Screw Type

Marking
frame.

Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

A14 B14
Rear ASF Assy
C14
Cable Guide
Rear ASF Assy

Solenoid cable
CN56
CN51
Relay Board
No. Screw Type

Confidential
A15 B15 A16

Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy CR Driven Pulley Assy
C15
CR Driven Pulley Assy Front
PS Ground Plate CR Timing Belt
Rear
No. Screw Type

S5
Extension Spring
C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S4: , S5: ), then remove the PS Ground Plate. 1. Slide the CR Driven Pulley Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove the CR Timing
Belt from the CR Driven Pulley Assy.
2. Remove the Extension Spring, then CR Driven Pulley Assy.

Confidential
Main Board Assy

B16
Main Board Assy
C16 Back Connector lock Close
CN3
CN42
Open
CN68 CN66 CN67 CN8

Double- Double-
CN55 CN9 CN44 CN110
CN33
CN77 CN75 CN73 CN72
CN50 CN52 CN2 CN34

P O IN T
only)
• CN2 • CN3* • CN8 • CN9 • CN33* • CN34

• CN42 • CN44* • CN50 • CN52 • CN53 • CN55
• CN66 • CN67 • CN68 • CN72 • CN73 • CN74
• CN75 • CN77 • CN80 • CN110 • CN609

Confidential
Clamps
Hook
PE sensor cable
Main Board Assy
Fax FFC
No. Screw Type

PF Scale

Confidential
Main Board Assy

B17
Head Upper Cover
C17
Main Board Assy Head Upper Cover
CN52
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
PF Encoder FFC
Hook Rib
Double-sided tape
No. Screw Type

Film S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
Secure the PF Encoder FFC with double-sided tape as shown above. 1. Remove the two screws (S7: ), and remove the Head Upper Cover.
Attach the two tabs on the Head Upper Cover to the positioning holes of the CR Unit.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Ink Tube Joint Cover.

Confidential
Head Screw Assy

B18
Head Screw Assy
C18
Head Screw
Plate
3 1
Ink Supply Tube
Head Screw
No. Screw Type

In the following steps, ink may spill from the Ink Supply Tube. Prepare waste cloths 2. Remove the three Head Screw Assy.
or similar in advance. Tighten the screws in order given above.

Confidential
Printhead
B19
Printhead
C19
Seal Joint Head

Ink Tube Connector
Wiping area
Connectors
Printhead
Do not touch the nozzle surface of the Printhead. Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning
stick, because perform the Ink Leak Check correctly.
1. Peel off the Head FFC Assy from the Printhead, then remove the Printhead.  If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit, Ink Leak Check can not perform
2. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the four connectors of the Printhead. correctly. Therefore cleaning the ink surely.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
The smoked face is
LEAK TESTER 1684354

Smoked
SHEET REAR Face
15mm
90°
90°

Confidential
Printhead
B20
Frame Plate
C20
Frame Plate
No. Screw Type

After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.563) to remove the 1. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Frame Plate.
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT/REAR, then perform Leak Check Judgement.

Confidential
Main Frame Assy

B21
Main Frame Assy
C21
Ferrite core
Rear Tabs
Head FFC Assy Ferrite core
CR motor cable
Double-sided tape Main Frame Assy Double-sided tape
Extension Spring
Front CR Timing Belt
No. Screw Type

S14 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3X16-FZN3C
CR Driven Pulley Assy
1. Release the Head FFC Assy from the seven tabs on the Frame Base. 4. Peel off the CSIC FFC from the frame.
Set the Ferrite Core of the Head FFC Assy in the point shown above. 5. Remove the three screws (S14: x2, S5: x1), then remove the Main Frame Assy.
 Fix CSIC FFC on the frame at the location shown in the figure above by using double-sided
tape at two locations.
2. Slide the CR Driven Pulley Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove the CR Timing  Route the CR Motor Cable with reference to the figure above.
3. Remove the Extension Spring.

Confidential
B22
CR Unit CR Motor
C22
Main Frame Cable holder
CR Unit
CR Motor Clamps Cable
Bottom
Front Main Frame Assy
No. Screw Type

APG Slider S18 C.P.SCREW,3X4,F/ZN-3C
1. Slide the CR Unit in the direction of the arrow to remove it from the Main Frame. 1. Release the cable from four clamps on the Main Frame Assy.
Slide the CR Unit to the groove on the Main Frame while pressing the APG Slider in 2. Remove the two screws (S18: ), then remove the CR Motor from the Main Frame Assy.
the direction of the arrow. Install the CR Motor with its cable holder facing upward.

Confidential
6.2.4.18 Paper Feed Mechanism (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Stacker Assy A --- --- ---
PF Encoder Board B --- --- ---
PF Scale C --- --- ---
Star Wheel Unit D --- --- ---
Paper Feed Sensor Unit E --- --- ---
Rear Unit Detection

F --- --- ---
Sensor

Confidential
Start
Start
B1 C1 Rear Cover (Back) A1 Stacker Assy

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 441) (→P. 441)
B2 C2 ASF Front Cover C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to

(→P. 442) P O IN T 6.2.4.4 Housing (WF-C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254) in
D2 E2 F2
the case of the WF-C5200 Series, and remove the
parts from the Rear Back Cover to the Housing
B3 C3 Housing Left Top.
D3 E3 F3 (→P. 442)  The procedure indicated by is applicable
only in the WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700.
Ink Eject Cover B4 PF Encoder Board
D4 E4 F4 (→P. 444) C4 (→P. 443)
Housing Right C5 PF Scale

D5 E5 F5 (→P. 444) (→P. 443)
Housing Upper
D6 E6 F6 (→P. 445)
Cable Guide D7 Star Wheel Unit

E7 F7 (→P. 446) (→P. 445)
ADF/SCN Unit Rear ASF Assy Power Supply Assy

E8 F8 (→P. 447) E11 F11 (→P. 449) E14 F14 (→P. 451)
Hinge Assy PS Ground Plate Paper Feed Sensor Unit

E9 F9 (→P. 448) E12 F12 (→P. 450) E15 F15 (→P. 451)
Hinge Lower Cover Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy Rear Unit Detection Sensor
E10 F10 (→P. 448) E13 F13 (→P. 450) F16 (→P. 452)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1
Stacker Assy Rear Cover (Back)
D1 E1 F1
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

Stacker Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Stacker Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back).

Confidential
B2 C2 B3 C3
ASF Front Cover Housing Left
D2 E2 F2 D3 E3 F3
Rear
ASF Front Cover

Hooks
Housing Left
Hooks
Rear Cover (Back)

1. Remove the four screws (S4: ) that secure the ASF Front Cover. 1. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
2. Remove the ASF Front Cover upward while slightly bending the Rear Cover (Back) toward 2. Remove the three screws (S4: ) that secure the Housing Left.
the back. 3. Lift the Housing Left to release the two hooks on the front side of the Housing Left.

Confidential
B4 C4 C5
PF Encoder Board PF Scale
PF Scale
PF Encoder Board
PF Scale
FFC
Positioning holes
No. Screw Type

Dowels S9 C.B.S-TITE SCREW,2X8,F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S9: ) that secures the PF Encoder Board. 1. Peel off the PF Scale.
2. Disconnect the FFC from the connector on the PF Encoder Board. The PF Scale cannot be reused once it is removed. Make sure to replace it with a new
3. Remove the PF Encoder Board avoiding the PF Scale. one.
Attach the two dowels on the PF Encoder Board to the positioning holes of the frame.

Confidential

D4 E4 F4 D5 E5 F5
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover

Tabs
No. Screw Type

Unit.

Confidential
Housing Upper Star Wheel Unit

D6 E6 F6 D7
CR Unit
Housing Star Wheel Unit
Upper
Top
No. Screw Type
Grounding Spring
S16 C.B.P-TITE (S-P1)SCREW,3X12,F/ZN-3C
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Upper. 1. Remove the Grounding Spring.
2. Remove the two screws (S16: ) that secure the Star Wheel Unit.
3. Remove the Star Wheel Unit while sliding the CR Unit left and right.
Attach the Grounding Spring as shown above.

Confidential
Cable Guide
Cable Guide
E7 F7
Guides PS Cable
Cable Guide
Guide Hook

No. Screw Type

the Cable Guide.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
ADF/SCN Unit
E8 F8
Open Close
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
Connector Lock
CN612
CN606
CN601

P O IN T
arrow.
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801

Confidential

E9 F9 E10 F10

Hinge Lower Cover

P O IN T P O IN T

Confidential
Rear ASF Assy
Rear ASF Assy

E11 F11
Cable Guide
Rear ASF Assy

Solenoid cable
CN56
CN51
Relay Board
No. Screw Type

Confidential

E12 F12 E13 F13
FFC
Top
Hooks
PS Ground Plate
Rear


Confidential
Power Supply Assy Paper Feed Sensor Unit

E14 F14 E15 F15
PS Cable
Ferrite Core Ferrite Core Paper Feed Sensor Unit
Slit Power Supply Assy Slit
AC Cable Hook Slit Hook Guide
Rea ASF Upper Guide Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the Power Supply Assy.
 Route the AC Cable through the two slits, two hooks and guide on the Rea ASF Upper Guide
Assy.
 Route the PS Cable through the slit on the Rea ASF Upper Guide Assy.

Confidential
Rear Unit Detection Sensor

F16
Back
Hook (long)
Rear ASF Sensor Mechanical Contact Sensor Hook (short)
Connector Hook
Cable
Rear ASF Upper

Slit Guide Assy
1. Release the cable from the hook and slit on the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy.
sensor.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Rear ASF Sensor.
3. Disengage hook by pushing up the sensor.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Paper Cassette 1st Assy A --- --- ---
Rear Unit B --- --- ---
Pickup Roller Housing C --- --- ---
Retard Extension Spring D --- --- ---
Retard Roller E --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
B1 C1 Rear Unit A1 Paper Cassette 1st Assy

D1 E1 (→P. 455) (→P. 455)
D2 Feed Roller Cover C2 Pickup Roller Housing

E2 (→P. 456) (→P. 456)
D3 Retard Extension Spring

E3 (→P. 457)
E4 Retard Roller
(→P. 457)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1
Paper Cassette 1st Assy Rear Unit
D1 E1
Buttons
Rear Unit
1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 1st Assy. 1. Remove the Rear Unit in the direction of the arrow while pressing the buttons inward.

Confidential
Pickup Roller Housing Feed Roller Cover

C2 D2 E2
Lever Back
Pickup Roller Housing
Lever
Feed Roller Cover
Lever
Shafts Hooks
1. Rotate the Pickup Roller Housing in the direction of the arrow while pushing three levers. 1. Disengage two hooks of the Feed Roller Cover while pushing them inward, then remove the
2. Disengage two bearing of the Pickup Roller Housing from the shafts of the Frame Base, Feed Roller Cover.
then remove the Pickup Roller Housing.

Confidential
Retard Extension Spring Retard Roller

D3 E3 E4
Shaft and bearing Retard Roller Shaft and bearing
Retard Extension Spring
1. Remove the Retard Extension Spring. 1. Remove the Retard Roller.

Attach the two bearings of the Retard Roller to the shafts of the Frame Base.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear ASF Assy A --- --- ---
Paper Feed Roller B --- --- ---
Photo Interrupter C --- --- ---
Rear ASF Solenoid D --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back)

C1 D1 (→P. 460)

C2 D2 (→P. 460)

C3 D3 (→P. 461)
A4 B4 Housing Right
C4 D4 (→P. 461)
A5 B5 Housing Left
C5 D5 (→P. 462)
A6 B6 Housing Upper
C6 D6 (→P. 462)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit the WF-C5200 Series, and remove the parts from the
C7 D7 (→P. 463) Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
 The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
A8 B8 Hinge Assy WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700.
C8 D8 (→P. 464)
A8 B9 Hinge Lower Cover C11 Plate B11 Paper Feed Roller

C9 D9 (→P. 464) D11 (→P. 466) (→P. 466)
A10 B10 Rear ASF Assy C12 Photo Interrupter D12 Rear ASF Solenoid
C10 D10 (→P. 465) (→P. 467) (→P. 467)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 D1 C2 D2
Rear Cover (Back)
ASF Front Cover
Dowel and Dowel and


Rear Cover (Back)


Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
C3 D3 C4 D4
Rear
Hook
Housing Right
Hooks
Ink Eject Cover

Tabs
No. Screw Type

Unit.

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
C5 D5 C6 D6
Rear
Housing
Hooks Upper
Housing Left
Hooks Top


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A7 B7
ADF/SCN Unit
C7 D7
Open Close
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
Connector Lock
CN612
CN606
CN601

P O IN T
arrow.
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
C8 D8 C9 D9

Hinge Lower Cover

P O IN T P O IN T

Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

A10 B10
Rear ASF Assy
C10 D10
Cable Guide
Rear ASF Assy

Solenoid cable
CN56
CN51
Relay Board
No. Screw Type

Confidential
B11
Paper Feed Roller Plate
C11 D11
Torsion Spring Paper Back Lever Rear ASF Assy Bottom

Plate
Shaft
Rear ASF Assy
Hook
Photo
Hook interrupter cable
Extension Spring
Acetate tape
Hole
Paper Feed Roller
Shaft Shaft
Grooves
No. Screw Type

1. Disengage leg of the Torsion Spring from the hook on the Rear ASF Assy. 1. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, and release the photo interrupter cable from the hole, hook
2. Release the shaft of the Paper Back Lever from the hole of the Rear ASF Assy, then remove and two grooves on the Rear ASF Assy.
the Paper Back Lever. 2. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Plate.
4. Disengage two shafts of the Paper Feed Roller, then remove the Paper Feed Roller.

Confidential
Photo Interrupter Rear ASF Solenoid

C12 D12
Bottom
Cable Slit
Slits
Hook
Photo Interrupter
Cable
Extension Spring
Hooks Rear ASF Solenoid
Hole
No. Screw Type

1. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Photo Interrupter. 1. Release the solenoid cable from the hole, hook and six slits on the Rear ASF Assy.
2. Disengage four hooks, and remove the Photo Interrupter. 2. Remove the Extension Spring.
3. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Rear ASF Solenoid.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
PE Assy A --- --- ---
Paper Guide Upper Assy B --- --- ---
Paper Guide Upper Assy

Spring C --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
Preparation for Ink Discharge A10 B10 Rear ASF Assy A16 B16 Main Board Assy
Dissembling (→P. 470) D10 (→P. 476) C16 (→P. 480)
A1 B1 Rear Cover (Back) A11 B11 Cable Guide A17 B17 Head Upper Cover
C1 (→P. 471) C11 (→P. 477) C17 (→P. 483)
A2 B2 ASF Front Cover A12 B12 Extension Spring 11.11 A18 B18 Head Screw Assy
C2 (→P. 472) C12 (→P. 478) C18 (→P. 483)
A3 B3 Ink Eject Cover A13 B13 CR Scale A19 B19 Printhead

C3 (→P. 472) C13 (→P. 479) C19 (→P. 484)
A4 B4 Housing Right A14 B14 PS Ground Plate A20 B20 Frame Plate
C4 (→P. 473) C14 (→P. 479) C20 (→P. 487)
A5 B5 Housing Left A15 B15 Rear ASF Upper Guide A21 B21 Main Frame Assy
C5 (→P. 473) C15 Assy (→P. 480) C21 (→P. 487)
A6 B6 Housing Upper
C6 (→P. 474)
A22 PE Assy B22 Paper Guide Upper C22 Paper Guide Upper Assy
(→P. 488) Assy (→P. 489) Spring (→P. 489)
A7 B7 ADF/SCN Unit
C7 (→P. 474)  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4 Housing (WF-
C H E C K
P O IN T C5200 Series) (2) (p. 254) in the case of the WF-C5200 Series, and
A8 B8 Hinge Assy remove the parts from the Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
C8 (→P. 475)  Implement the procedure indicated by when removing the Ink
Tube from the RIPS Unit and Printhead.
 The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the WF-C5700
A9 B9 Hinge Lower Cover Series/ET-8700.
D9 (→P. 476)

Confidential

Open Sensor
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover
Ink Pack Tray CL

Ink Pack Tray BK

Confidential
Ink Discharge
A1 B1
Rear Cover (Back)
C1 D1
Rear Cover (Back)
Dowel and Dowel and

No. Screw Type

charged.

Confidential
A2 B2 A3 B3
C2 D2 C3 D3
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

the back.

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
C4 D4 C5 D5
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs



Confidential
A6 B6 A7 B7
C6 D6 C7 D7
Open Close
Housing
Upper
Connector Lock
Top CN612
CN606
CN601
No. Screw Type

Grounding cable
P O IN T
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801


Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A8 B8
Hinge Assy
C8 D8
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °

P O IN T
arrow.

Confidential
A9 B9 A10 B10
Hinge Lower Cover Rear ASF Assy
C9 D9 C10 D10
Cable Guide
Solenoid cable

Hinge Lower Cover
CN56
CN51
Relay Board
No. Screw Type
C H E C K When removing the Main Board Assy on the way to the target part, remove the Hinge 1. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN51, CN56) on the Relay Board.
P O IN T
Assy (Left) only. 2. Release the solenoid cable and photo interrupter cable from the Cable Guide.
1. Remove the each three screws (S4: ), and remove the two Hinge Lower Cover.  Route the solenoid cable through the five hooks ( ) on the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

A11 B11
Cable Guide
C11 D11
Rear ASF Assy
Cable Guide

3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), and remove the Rear ASF Assy. 1. Release the all cable from the Cable Guide.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A12 B12
C12 D12
Guides PS Cable
CR Scale
Main Frame
Guide Hook

the Cable Guide.

Confidential
A13 B13 A14 B14

C13 D13 C14 D14

Sensor
Hook
CR Unit CR Scale
No. Screw Type

Marking
frame.

Confidential
A15 B15 A16 B16

Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy Main Board Assy
C15 D15 C16 D16
FFC
Top
Hooks
Double- Double-
Rear
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Double- CRCM FFC Double-
S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C sided tape sided tape
1. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the AC Inlet. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC.
2. Release the FFC from three hooks on the Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy. 2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.

Confidential
Back Connector lock Close CR motor cable Back

CN3
CN42 Clamps
Open
CN68 CN66 CN67 CN8
CN55 CN9 CN44 CN110 PE sensor cable
CN80 CN74 CN53 CN609 Ferrite core Clamp Relay FFC
CN33
CN77 CN75 CN73 CN72
Fax FFC
CN50 CN52 CN2 CN34
Double-sided tape
C H E C K When disconnecting the Panel FFC (CN42), make sure to unlock the connector lock 4. Peel off the Fax FFC from the Shield Plate, and Pull the Fax FFC out from the ferrite core.
P O IN T
beforehand. (WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700 only)
5. Release the PE sensor cable from the clamp.
6. Peel off the Relay FFC from the Shield Plate.
only)
• CN2 • CN3* • CN8 • CN9 • CN33* • CN34
• CN42 • CN44* • CN50 • CN52 • CN53 • CN55
• CN66 • CN67 • CN68 • CN72 • CN73 • CN74
• CN75 • CN77 • CN80 • CN110 • CN609

Confidential
Inside
Main Board Assy

Hook
CN52
Main Board Assy
PF Encoder FFC
Double-sided tape
No. Screw Type

PF Scale
8. Remove the following screws that secure the Main Board Assy. Secure the PF Encoder FFC with double-sided tape as shown above.
 WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700: x9 (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1, S5: x2)
 WF-C5200 Series: x7 (S4: x4, S5: x2, S10: x1)
In the next step, be careful not to damage the PF Scale.

Confidential
A17 B17 A18 B18

Head Upper Cover Head Screw Assy
C17 D17 C18 D18
Head Upper Cover
Plate
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Ink Supply Tube
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the two screws (S7: ), and remove the Head Upper Cover. In the following steps, ink may spill from the Ink Supply Tube. Prepare waste cloths
Attach the two tabs on the Head Upper Cover to the positioning holes of the CR Unit. or similar in advance.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Ink Tube Joint Cover. Make sure the plate was attached.

Confidential
Head Screw Assy

A19 B19
Printhead
C19 D19
Head Screw
2
3 1
Connectors
Head Screw Printhead
2. Remove the three Head Screw Assy. Do not touch the nozzle surface of the Printhead.
Tighten the screws in order given above.
1. Peel off the Head FFC Assy from the Printhead, then remove the Printhead.
2. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the four connectors of the Printhead.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
Seal Joint Head
Ink Tube Connector 10mm
LEAK TESTER 1684354

Smoked
SHEET REAR Face
Wiping area
15mm
90°
90°
Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to
stick, because perform the Ink Leak Check correctly. assembly mistake.
 If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit, Ink Leak Check can not perform Tube to Printhead.
correctly. Therefore cleaning the ink surely. Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds
 Replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot be reused. until the fold angle become 90 degrees.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
The smoked face is

Judgement.

Confidential
A20 B20 A21 B21

Frame Plate Main Frame Assy
C20 D20 C21 D21
Rear Tabs
Head FFC Assy Ferrite core
Frame Plate
Extension Spring
Front CR Timing Belt
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C CR Driven Pulley Assy
1. Remove the screw (S4: ), and remove the Frame Plate. 1. Release the Head FFC Assy from the seven tabs on the Frame Base.
Set the Ferrite Core of the Head FFC Assy in the point shown above.
2. Slide the CR Driven Pulley Assy in the direction of the arrow to remove the CR Timing

Confidential
Main Frame Assy

A22
PE Assy
Ferrite core
CR motor cable
Double-sided tape Main Frame Assy Double-sided tape
Front No gap Main Frame

PE Assy
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
S14 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3X16-FZN3C Sensor Holder S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
4. Peel off the CSIC FFC from the frame. 1. Remove the screw (S5: ), and remove the PE Assy from the Main Frame.
5. Remove the three screws (S14: x2, S5: x1), then remove the Main Frame Assy. Confirm there are no gaps between the Sensor Holder and the Main Frame.
 Fix CSIC FFC on the frame at the location shown in the figure above by using double-sided
tape at two locations.
 Route the CR Motor Cable with reference to the figure above.

Confidential
B22
Paper Guide Upper Assy Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring
C22
Hook
Hooks
Main Frame Assy Main Frame Assy
Paper Guide Upper Assy Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring Paper Guide Upper Assy
1. Disengage four hooks of the Paper Guide Upper Assy, and remove the Paper Guide Upper 1. Remove the three Paper Guide Upper Assy Spring from each two hooks on the Main Frame
Assy from the Main Frame Assy. Assy using a Longnose pliers.

Confidential
6.2.4.22 Printer Mechanism
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Printer Mechanism A --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
Preparation for Ink Discharge A10 Housing Upper A18 Plate

Dissembling (→P. 493) (→P. 499) (→P. 505)
A1 Stacker Assy A11 Panel Assy a (→P. 492)

(→P. 494) (→P. 499)
A2 Rear Unit A12 Wireless Lan Module

(→P. 495) (→P. 500)
A3 Paper Cassette 1st Assy A13 PDL Board Assy

(→P. 495) (→P. 501)
A4 Optional Paper Cassette A14 Relay Board Assy

(→P. 496) (→P. 502)
A5 Rear Cover (Back) A15 Speaker Assy

(→P. 496) (→P. 503)
A6 ASF Front Cover A16 Fax Assy

(→P. 497) (→P. 504)
A7 Ink Eject Cover A17 Head Upper Cover

(→P. 497) (→P. 505) C H E C K  As for the procedure indicated by , refer to 6.2.4.4
A8 Housing Right Rear Back Cover to the Housing Top.
(→P. 498)  The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
A9 Housing Left removing the Ink Tube from the RIPS Unit and
(→P. 498)
Printhead.

Confidential
a (→P. 491)
A19 Ink Supply Tube A29 Rear ASF Upper Guide Assy
(→P. 506) (→P. 518)
A20 Head Screw Assy A30 Extension Spring 11.11

(→P. 509) (→P. 519)
A21 Printhead A31 CR Scale

(→P. 510) (→P. 519)
A22 Cable Guide A32 Main Board Assy

(→P. 513) (→P. 520)
A23 Head FFC Assy A33 USB Interface Board

(→P. 514) (→P. 522)
A24 ADF/SCN Unit A34 Guide Cover

(→P. 515) (→P. 523)
A25 Hinge Assy A35 RIPS Unit

(→P. 516) (→P. 523)
A26 Hinge Lower Cover 36 Printer Mechanism

(→P. 516) (→P. 525)
A27 Rear ASF Assy

(→P. 517) C H E C K The procedure indicated by is applicable only in the
P O IN T WF-C5700 Series/ET-8700.
A28 PS Ground Plate
(→P. 518)

Confidential

Open Sensor
Lock Lever
RIPS Front Cover
Ink Pack Tray CL

Ink Pack Tray BK

Confidential
Ink Discharge
A1
Stacker Assy
Stacker Assy
1. Connect the PC and printer with USB cable. 1. Remove the Stacker Assy in the direction of the arrow.
2. Start the adjustment program.
3. Select the Ink Eject from items on the adjustment program.
charged.

Confidential
A2 A3
Rear Unit Paper Cassette 1st Assy
Buttons
Rear Unit
1. Remove the Rear Unit in the direction of the arrow while pressing the buttons inward. 1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 1st Assy.

Confidential
A4 A5
Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover (Back)
Rear Cover (Back)
Positioning pins
Dowel and Dowel and

Dowel positioning hole positioning hole
Dowel
No. Screw Type

Drawer Connector Optional Paper Cassette
1. Lift the printer, then remove the Optional Paper Cassette. 1. Remove the four screws (S4: ), then remove the Rear Cover (Back).
When attaching the Optional Paper Cassette, be sure to align the positioning pins (x2) Attach the two dowels of the Rear Cover (Back) to the positioning holes on the
and the dowels so as to avoid damage to the Drawer Connector. Housing Left and Housing Right.

Confidential
A6 A7
Hook
ASF Front Cover
Rear Cover (Back)
Ink Eject Cover
No. Screw Type

the back.

Confidential
A8 A9
Rear Rear
Hooks
Housing Left
Housing Right
Hooks
Hooks
Tabs



Confidential
A10 A11
Housing Upper Panel Assy
Close
Housing FFC Tab

Open
Upper Ferrite core
Main Board
Assy
Double-sided tape
Top
CN42
Connector lock
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the six screws (S4: ), then remove the Housing Upper. C H E C K When disconnecting the FFC, make sure to unlock the connector lock beforehand.
P O IN T
1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN42) on the Main Board Assy.

Confidential
Panel Assy
A12
Wireless Lan Module
CRCM FFC
CRCM FFC Sheet
Right Panel Holder Double-sided
tape
Double-sided
tape
Main Board
Assy
CN31
No. Screw Type
Wireless Lan Module
4. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Right Panel Holder. 1. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the CRCM FFC Sheet.
5. Release the shaft of the Panel Assy from bearing, then remove the Panel Assy. 2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet.
3. Disconnect the Wireless Lan Module from the connector (CN31) on the Main Board Assy.

Confidential
PDL Board Assy

A13
PDL Board Assy
PDL Board Assy
FFC
PDL Board Assy
CN102
Shield Plate
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN102) on the PDL Board Assy. 3. Remove the two screws (S5: ), then remove the PDL Board Assy from the Shield Plate.
2. Remove the screw (S5: ), then remove the PDL Board Assy.

Confidential
Relay Board Assy

A14
Relay Board Assy
Grounding cable
CRCM FFC
CRCM FFC Sheet
Double-sided tape
Double-sided tape
Relay Board Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Peel off the CRCM FFC from the CRCM FFC Sheet. 3. Disconnect the cables and FFCs from all connectors on the Relay Board Assy.
2. Peel off the CRCM FFC Sheet. 4. Remove the grounding cable from the Frame.
5. Remove the four screws (S4: x2, S5: x2), then remove the Relay Board Assy.

Confidential
Relay Board Assy

A15
Speaker Assy
Relay Board
Top
Main Board Assy
CN3 Cable Speaker Assy
Shield Plate Speaker Holder
Slit

6. Remove the four screws (S5: ), and remove the Relay Board from the Shield Plate. 1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN3) on the Main Board Assy.
2. Release the cable from seven slits on the Frame Base.
3. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Speaker Holder.
4. Remove the Speaker Assy.

Confidential
Fax Assy
A16
Fax Assy
Acetate tape
Shield Plate
CN1
Fax Assy
Fax FFC
Double-sided tape
Fax Assy
Acetate tape
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

1. Peel off the Fax FFC from the Fax Assy. 4. Remove the three screws (S5: ) that secure the Shield Plate.
2. Remove the three screws (S5: ), and slide the Fax Assy in the direction of the arrow. 5. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, and remove the Shield Plate.
3. Peel off a piece of acetate tape, then remove the Fax Assy. 6. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN1) on the Fax Assy.

Confidential
A17 A18
Head Upper Cover Plate
Head Upper Cover
Plate
Ink Tube
Joint Cover
Hook Rib
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
S6 C.B.SCREW-2.6X18-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S7: ), and remove the Head Upper Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), and remove the Plate.
Attach the two tabs on the Head Upper Cover to the positioning holes of the CR Unit. When installing the Ink Supply Tube to the RIPS Unit, make sure to tighten the
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ), and remove the Ink Tube Joint Cover.

Confidential
Ink Supply Tube

A19
Ink Supply Tube
Tube Clamp Tube Holder Hook Ink Supply Tube
87.5 ± 1 mm
Plate
Marking Hook
Ink Supply Tube
No. Screw Type

In the following steps, ink may spill from the Ink Supply Tube. Prepare waste cloths 2. Remove the Ink Supply Tube from the Tube Clamp.
or similar in advance. At the marking point on the Ink Supply Tube, attach the Ink Supply Tube to the Tube
Clamp. If the marking is not visible, refer to the drawing above to attach the Ink
1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and remove the Ink Supply Tube from the Printhead. Supply Tube.
Make sure the plate was attached. 3. Remove the Tube Holder while pressing the hooks outward.

Confidential
Rear side Right side
Ink Supply Tube

Bottom
Joint
Left side Front side
No. Screw Type

4. Remove the screw (S4: ). Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Printhead by using the Cleaning stick,
5. Remove the Ink Supply Tube from the Joint, and remove the Ink Supply Tube. because perform the Ink Leak Check correctly.
If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Printhead, Ink Leak Check can not perform
correctly.
Therefore cleaning the ink surely.

Confidential

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
The smoked face is
LEAK TESTER 1684354

Smoked
SHEET REAR Face
15mm
90°
90°

Confidential
Ink Supply Tube

A20
Head Screw Assy
Plate
Ink Supply Tube
No. Screw Type

After ink charging, follow the instructions on the Ink leak check (p.563) to remove the In the following steps, ink may spill from the Ink Supply Tube. Prepare waste cloths
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT/REAR, then perform Leak Check Judgement. or similar in advance.

Confidential
Head Screw Assy

A21
Printhead
Head Screw
2
3 1
Connectors
Head Screw Printhead
2. Remove the three Head Screw Assy. Do not touch the nozzle surface of the Printhead.
Tighten the screws in order given above.
1. Peel off the Head FFC Assy from the Printhead, then remove the Printhead.
2. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the four connectors of the Printhead.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead

LEAK TESTER 1684353
Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
Seal Joint Head
Ink Tube Connector 10mm
LEAK TESTER 1684354

Smoked
SHEET REAR Face
Wiping area
15mm
90°
90°
Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit by using the Cleaning In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to
stick, because perform the Ink Leak Check correctly. assembly mistake.
 If ink is remained to ink tube joint part of Ink Supply Unit, Ink Leak Check can not perform Tube to Printhead.
correctly. Therefore cleaning the ink surely. Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds
 Replace the seal joint head with the new one because it cannot be reused. until the fold angle become 90 degrees.

Confidential
Printhead Printhead
The smoked face is

Judgement.

Confidential
Cable Guide
A22
Cable Guide
Guides PS Cable
Cable Guide
Guide Hook

No. Screw Type

the Cable Guide.

Confidential
Head FFC Assy

A23
Head FFC Assy
Tabs Ferrite core
CN68/CN66/CN67
Head FFC Assy
Head FFC Assy CR Unit CR Encoder Sensor Main Board

Assy
Tab Slit
1. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the connector on the CR Encoder Sensor. 3. Release the Head FFC Assy from the seven tabs on the Frame Base.
2. Pull the Head FFC Assy out from the slit of the CR Unit. 4. Disconnect the Head FFC Assy from the connectors (CN66, CN67, CN68) on the Main
Board Assy.
Route the Head FFC Assy under the tab of the CR Unit.
Set the ferrite core of the Head FFC Assy in the point shown above.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A24
ADF/SCN Unit
Open Close
ADF/SCN Unit 45 °
Connector Lock
CN612
CN606
CN601

P O IN T
arrow.
• CN601 • CN606 • CN612 • CN801

Confidential
A25 A26

Hinge Lower Cover

P O IN T P O IN T

Confidential
Rear ASF Assy

A27
Rear ASF Assy
Cable Guide
Rear ASF Assy

Solenoid cable
CN56
CN51
Relay Board
No. Screw Type

Confidential
A28 A29
FFC
Top
Hooks
PS Ground Plate
Rear


Confidential
A30 A31
Extension Spring 11.11 CR Scale

Sensor
Hook
CR Scale
CR Scale Hook
CR Unit CR Scale
Main Frame
Marking
1. Remove the Extension Spring 11.11 from the CR Scale. 1. At the full side, remove the CR Scale from hook on the frame.
2. Remove the Extension Spring 11.11 from the Main Frame. 2. Pull the CR Scale out from the CR Encoder Sensor.
frame.

Confidential
Main Board Assy

A32
Main Board Assy
Back Connector lock Close
CN3
CN42
Open
CN68 CN66 CN67 CN8

Double- Double-
CN55 CN9 CN44 CN110
CN33
CN77 CN75 CN73 CN72
CN50 CN52 CN2 CN34

P O IN T
only)
• CN2 • CN3* • CN8 • CN9 • CN33* • CN34

• CN42 • CN44* • CN50 • CN52 • CN53 • CN55
• CN66 • CN67 • CN68 • CN72 • CN73 • CN74
• CN75 • CN77 • CN80 • CN110 • CN609

Confidential
Clamps
Hook
PE sensor cable
Main Board Assy
Fax FFC
No. Screw Type

PF Scale

Confidential
Main Board Assy

A33
USB Interface Board
Main Board Assy
CN52 USB Interface Board
PF Encoder FFC
Double-sided tape
No. Screw Type

Secure the PF Encoder FFC with double-sided tape as shown above. 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the USB Interface Board.

Confidential
A34 A35
Relay Board
CN55
CN10
CN22 CN54
CN11
Guide Cover CN12
CN30
CN31
CN2



Confidential
RIPS Unit RIPS Unit
Rear Top
Printer
Hole
RIPS Unit
Ink Supply Tube

Pump cable
Top
Joint
No. Screw Type

Confidential
RIPS Unit
A36
Printer Mechanism
Left Joint of ink tube
PF scale
Bottom of joint Printer Mechanism
Printer
RIPS Unit
 When lifting the main body, you wear gloves. Because there is a danger of cutting hands with
the sharp metal enclosed by red circles,
 Lift carefully so as not to touch the PF scale on the left side of the main body. If you touch the
lift it vertically.
counterclockwise.

Confidential
6.2.4.23 Optional Paper Cassette Unit (1)
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear Back Cover A --- --- ---
Separation Roller B --- --- ---
Paper Feed Detector

Lever C --- --- ---
E-ring (plastic) D --- --- ---
Torsion Spring 0.9 E --- --- ---
Vertical Feed Roller F --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Optional Paper Cassette

D1 E1 F1 Unit (→P. 528)
A2 B2 C2 Paper Cassette 2nd Assy

D2 E2 F2 (→P. 528)
A3 Rear Lower Cover Assy B3 Separation Roller C3 D3 Paper Feed Detector

(→P. 529) (→P. 530) E3 F3 Lever (→P. 531)
A4 Optional Paper Cassette D4 E-ring (plastic)

Rear Cover (→P. 529) E4 F4 (→P. 531)
E5 F5 One-way Gear
(→P. 532)
E6 F6 Torsion Spring 0.9

(→P. 532)
F7 Vertical Feed Roller

(→P. 533)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Optional Paper Cassette Paper Cassette 2nd Assy
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Positioning pins
Dowel
Optional Paper Cassette

Dowel
Paper Cassette 2nd Assy

1. Lift the printer, then remove the Optional Paper Cassette. 1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy, then remove the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy from the
Optional Paper Cassette.
When attaching the Optional Paper Cassette, be sure to align the positioning pins (x2)
and the dowels so as to avoid damage to the Drawer Connector.

Confidential
A3 A4
Rear Lower Cover Assy Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover
Rear
Rear Lower Cover Assy

Tab
Holes
Optional Paper
Cassette Rear Cover
Ribs
1. Pick the tab, and remove the Rear Lower Cover Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Open the Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover.
When installing the Rear Lower Cover Assy, attach the two ribs of the Rear Lower
Cover Assy to the holes of the frame.

Confidential
Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover

B3
Separation Roller
Rear
Dowel A Dowel B
Groove of shaft
Separation Roller
Separation Roller
Groove of frame Dowel A Tabs
Optional Paper
Cassette Rear Cover
Remove dowel A along the groove.
2. Push the Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover in the direction of the arrow, and remove When performing work, hold the tabs to avoid touching the roller surface.
dowel A of the Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover from the hole in the frame.
3. Remove dowel A of the Rear Lower Cover along the groove of the frame.
4. Remove dowel B of the Rear Lower Cover from the hole in the frame, and then remove the 1. Extend the tabs in the direction of the arrows and release them from the groove of the
Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover. shafts, and then pull out and remove each Separation Roller (x2).
When attaching the Rear Lower Cover, first of all, attach dowel B in the hole of the
frame.

Confidential
C3
Paper Feed Detector Lever E-ring (plastic)
D3 E3 F3 D4 E4 F4
Cassette Paper Left side

Detection Lever
Rear
E-ring (plastic) Vertical Feed Roller
Flag section
Paper Feed Detector Lever
Slit
Vertical Feed Roller
Optional Paper
Cassette Rear Cover
Leg of the Torsion

Spring 0.9
1. Open the Rear Lower Cover. 1. Remove the E-ring (plastic) from the left side of the Vertical Feed Roller.
2. Remove the leg of Torsion Spring 0.9 from the Paper Feed Detector Lever.
Since the narrow part of the Paper Feed Detector Lever may be bleached and damaged,
remove the Paper Feed Detector Lever by ensuring that it does not get twisted.
3. As shown in the figure above, with the Paper Feed Detector Lever in the rotated state, remove
the Paper Feed Detector Lever from the Vertical Feed Roller in the direction of the arrow.
When attaching the Paper Feed Detector Lever, be sure to align the flag section of the
Paper Feed Detector Lever with the slit shown in the figure above.

Confidential
One-way Gear Torsion Spring 0.9

E5 F5 E6 F6
Slit Straight leg of

Left rear Torsion Spring
0.9

Rear
One-way Gear
Torsion Spring 0.9 Bearing A Hole of the Hopper Drive Frame
Hole of frame
Bearing B
1. Remove the One-way Gear from the Vertical Feed Roller. 1. Remove the straight leg of Torsion Spring 0.9 from the slit of the frame.
When attaching the One-way Gear, make sure the arrow mark is facing outside as 2. Slide the Vertical Feed Roller in the direction of the arrow, and remove the bearing B from
shown in the figure above. the hole in the frame.
3. Remove bearing A from the Vertical Feed Roller, and then remove the Vertical Feed Roller
from the hole in the Hopper Drive Frame.
4. Pull out and remove Torsion Spring 0.9 from the Vertical Feed Roller.
When attaching Torsion Spring 0.9, insert the straight leg of Torsion Spring 0.9 in the
slit of the frame.

Confidential

F7
Right rear
Bearing B
Hole of frame
E-ring (plastic)
1. Remove the E-ring (plastic), then remove the Bearing B from the Vertical Feed Roller.
2. Remove the Vertical Feed Roller from the hole of the frame, then remove it.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Left Cover A --- --- ---
ASF Encoder Assy B --- --- ---

C --- --- ---
Right Cover
D --- --- ---
Main Board Assy
Photo Interrupter E --- --- ---
Drawer Connector
(female) F --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 Optional Paper Cassette E1 Middle Frame F1 Drawer Connector (female)

C1 D1 Unit (→P. 536) (→P. 544) (→P. 545)
A2 B2 Paper Cassette 2nd Assy E2 Photo Sensor

C2 D2 (→P. 536) (→P. 544)
A3 B3 Rear Lower Cover Assy

C3 D3 (→P. 537)
A4 B4 Optional Paper Cassette

C4 D4 Rear Cover (→P. 537)
A5 B5 Optional Paper Cassette C5 Optional Paper Cassette

D5 Left Cover (→P. 538) Right Cover (→P. 542)
B6 E-ring (plastic) D6 Optional Paper Cassette

(→P. 539) Main Board Assy (→P. 543)
B7 One-way Gear
(→P. 540)
B8 Hopper Drive Assy

(→P. 540)
B9 ASF Encoder Assy

(→P. 541)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Optional Paper Cassette Unit Paper Cassette 2nd Assy
D1 D2
Positioning pins
Dowel

Dowel

1. Lift the printer, then remove the Optional Paper Cassette. 1. Pull out the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy, then remove the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy from the
Optional Paper Cassette.
When attaching the Optional Paper Cassette, be sure to align the positioning pins (x2)
and the dowels so as to avoid damage to the Drawer Connector.

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
Rear Lower Cover Assy Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover
D3 D4
Rear

Tab
Holes
Optional Paper
Cassette Rear Cover
Ribs
1. Pick the tab, and remove the Rear Lower Cover Assy in the direction of the arrow. 1. Open the Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover.
When installing the Rear Lower Cover Assy, attach the two ribs of the Rear Lower
Cover Assy to the holes of the frame.

Confidential
Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover

A5 B5
Optional Paper Cassette Left Cover
Rear D5
Top Optional Paper

Cassette Left Cover
Hooks
Dowel A Dowel B
Light side Bottom Optional Paper Cassette Left Cover
Groove of frame Dowel A

Optional Paper
Cassette Rear Cover
Hooks
No. Screw Type

Remove dowel A along the groove. S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
2. Push the Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover in the direction of the arrow, and remove 1. Remove the three screws (S4: ).
dowel A of the Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover from the hole in the frame. 2. Disengage the hooks (x4) at the top and the bottom.
3. Remove dowel A of the Rear Lower Cover along the groove of the frame.
4. Remove dowel B of the Rear Lower Cover from the hole in the frame, and then remove the
Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover.
When attaching the Rear Lower Cover, first of all, attach dowel B in the hole of the
frame.

Confidential
Optional Paper Cassette Left Cover

B6
E-ring (plastic)
Left side
Optional Paper
Cassette Left Cover
E-ring (plastic) Vertical Feed Roller
Hooks
3. Rotate in the direction of the arrow, remove the hooks (x2) on the rear side, and then 1. Remove the E-ring (plastic) from the left side of the Vertical Feed Roller.
remove the Optional Paper Cassette Left Cover.

Confidential
B7 B8
One-way Gear Hopper Drive Assy
Left rear Upper Grounding

Left side Plate Bearing
Hopper Drive Assy

One-way Gear
The Upper Grounding

Dowel and Plate and bearing must
positioning hole be in contact
Grounding Sheet
Grounding Sheet
No. Screw Type

Grounding cable Groove of frame S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the One-way Gear from the Vertical Feed Roller. 1. Remove the screw (S4: ) that secures the grounding cable, then remove the grounding
cable and Grounding Sheet.
When attaching the One-way Gear, make sure the arrow mark is facing outside as
shown in the figure above. 2. Remove the screw (S4: ), then remove the Upper Grounding Plate.
 Attach the grounding cable and Grounding sheet with reference to the figure above.
 When attaching the Upper Grounding Plate, be sure to align the positioning hole of the Upper
Grounding Plate and the dowel of the frame.
 Make sure the tip of the Upper Grounding Plate is in contact with the bearing.
 Route the grounding cable in the groove of the frame shown in the figure above.

Confidential
Hopper Drive Assy

B9
ASF Encoder Assy
Left side
Bearing
Left side
Hopper Drive Assy ASF Encoder Assy
ASF Encoder Assy
Hole
Dowels
ASF Encoder Scale
Dowel
Hopper Drive Frame No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type
S5 S17 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-2X6-F.ZN-3C
C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
3. Release the Bearing A from the Vertical Feed Roller. Perform work ensuring that the ASF Encoder Scale is not damaged.
4. Remove the four screws (S4: x2, S5: x2), then remove the Hopper Drive Frame.
When attaching the Hopper Drive Assy, align the dowels (x3) with the holes in the
1. Remove the screw (S17: ), then remove the ASF Encoder Assy.
Hopper Drive Frame.
 When attaching the ASF Encoder Sensor, be sure to align the dowels of the ASF Encoder
Assy with the holes on the frame.
 After attaching the ASF Encoder Assy, make sure the ASF Encoder Assy is not in contact
with the ASF Encoder Scale.

Confidential
Optional Paper Cassette Right Cover

C5
Optional Paper Cassette Right Cover
Top Optional Paper

Cassette Right Cover
Optional Paper Hooks
Cassette Right Cover
Hooks
Bottom Optional Paper Cassette Right Cover Right side
Hooks
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the three screws (S4: ). 3. Disengage two hooks of rear side of the Optional Paper Cassette Right Cover, and remove
2. Disengage five hooks on top and bottom side of the Optional Paper Cassette Right Cover. the Optional Paper Cassette Right Cover.

Confidential
Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy
Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy

D6
Jam Cover Detection ASF Encoder Cable (CN6)
Sensor Cable (CN5)
Drawer Connector
Left side (female) Cable (CN1)
Drawer Connector
Lift Phase Sensor Cable (CN2)
Cable (CN6)

Main Board Assy
Sensors Cable (CN7)
ASF Motor Cable (CN13)

Lift Motor Cable (CN12)
No. Screw Type

S5 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C Groove
Rib
1. Remove all connectors connected to the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy.  Route the cables connected to the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy with reference
2. Remove the four screws (S5: ), and then remove the Optional Paper Cassette Main Board to the figure above.
Assy.  The Feed Sensor, Cassette Detection Sensor, Cassette Detection Sensor, and Hopper Position
Sensor are connected to CN7.

Confidential
Middle Frame Photo Sensor

E1 E2
Dowels and positioning holes Top
Photo Sensor
Middle Frame
Photo sensor cable
No. Screw Type

S4 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Hook
1. Remove the two screws (S4: ), then remove the Middle Frame. 1. Disengage four hooks using precision screw driver or similar tool, then remove the Photo
Sensor from frame.
When installing the Middle Frame, attach the two dowels of the frame to the two
positioning holes of the Middle Frame. 2. Disconnect the photo sensor cable from the connector, then remove the Photo Sensor.

Confidential
Drawer Connector (female)

F1
Hooks
Connector of the Upper

Drawer Connector Harness
Drawer Connector (female)
Hooks
1. Disengage the hooks (x2) by using a precision screwdriver, etc., and then remove the
Drawer Connector (female) from the frame.
2. Disengage the hooks (x2) of the Drawer Connector (female), remove the connectors on the
Drawer Connector Harness, and then remove the Drawer Connector (female).

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Paper Cassette 2nd Assy A --- --- ---
Extension Spring (Retard

Roller) B --- --- ---
Retard Roller C --- --- ---
Lift Up Sector Gear 40T D --- --- ---
Lift Up Gear 30T E --- --- ---

Confidential
Start
Start
A1 B1 C1 Paper Cassette 2nd Assy

D1 E1 (→P. 548)
B2 C2 Extension Spring (Retard D2 Hopper

Roller) (→P. 548) E2 (→P. 549)
C3 Retard Roller D3 Lift Up Sector Gear 40T

(→P. 549) E3 (→P. 550)
E4 Lift Up Gear 30T

(→P. 550)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 B2 C2
Paper Cassette 2nd Assy Extension Spring (Retard Roller)
D1 E1
Retard Roller
Extension Spring
(Retard Roller)
Hooks
Optional Paper Cassette Unit
1. Pull the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy, then remove it from the Optional Paper Cassette Unit. 1. Disengage two hooks of the Extension Spring, then remove the Retard Roller.

Confidential
C3
Retard Roller Hopper
D2 E2

Rib Dowel Dowel Rib
Retard Roller
Hopper
Hooks
Shaft of the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy

and notch of the Retard Roller
Retard Roller
1. Disengage the hooks (x2) by pressing in the direction of the arrow, and then rotate the 1. Lift up the Retard Roller side of the Hopper while extending the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy
Retard Roller in the direction of the red arrow. toward the outside, and then remove the Hopper from the rib of the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy.
2. Align the shape of the notch of Retard Roller and the shaft of Paper Cassette 2nd Assy, and 2. Release the Hopper from two dowels on the Paper Cassette 2nd Assy, then remove the
then remove the Retard Roller. Hopper.

Confidential
Lift Up Sector Gear 40T Lift Up Gear 30T

D3 E3 E4
Paper Cassette 2nd Assy Paper Cassette 2nd Assy
OPT Lift Plate

Lift Up Gear 30T
Lift Up Gear 30T

Bottom Lift Up Sector Gear 40T A side B side
No. Screw Type

1. At bottom side, remove the screw (S4: ). 1. Remove the Lift Up Gear 30T.
2. Pull the Lift Up Sector Gear 40T in the direction of the arrow, then remove the Lift Up Attach the Lift Up Gear 30T by facing the B side shown in the figure above toward
Sector Gear 40T from the OPT Lift Plate. the outside.

Confidential
CHAPTER
7
ADJUSTMENT
Confidential
7.1 Adjustment and Inspection Overview 7.1.2 Tools and jigs

The following tools and jigs are required for adjustment and inspection.
This chapter describes the adjustment and inspection items required during repair
work.  Jigs
7.1.1 Operating Environment Jig Availability Part code Remark
The operating environment for the Adjustment Program is as follows. Teflon tape O 1706715
 OS: Windows vista, 7, 8, 8.1, 10 Thickness gauge O -
 Interface: USB
Scale O -
Leak tester sheet front - 1684353
Leak tester sheet rear - 1684354
Note 1 : “O”: Commercially available ones are acceptable.

2 : EPSON provides the tools listed with EPSON part code.
Adjustment Adjustment and Inspection Overview 552

Confidential
7.1.3 Adjustment and Inspection List

 Mechanical adjustments and inspections
Adjustment name Purpose Adjustment procedure overview Tools Reference

Adjustment PG Adjustment Set the clearance of the gap between the nozzle Place a thickness gauge in the specified location and then P. 559
 Thickness gauge
surface of the print head and the platen to an move the CR unit over the thickness gauge and check the
 Teflon tape
appropriate amount. clearance.
Inspection Leak Check To prevent ink leaks, make sure there is no ink When the ink supply unit ink tubes are attached to the print P. 563
leaking from the joints of the print head and ink head, insert the leak check jig and determine whether or not  Leak tester sheet
supply unit ink tubes. there is a leak by whether or not ink adheres to it.
 Software adjustments and inspections
Adjustment /
inspection paper /feed tray
When the Main Board needs to be
replaced, use this to copy adjustment
values stored on the old Main Board to With the old Board installed, use the adjustment program to read
 Adjustment
EEPROM data copy the new board. If this copy is completed - out the EEPROM data, and after exchanging with the new Board, P. 564
Program
successfully, all the other adjustments load the read out data.
required after replacing the Main Board
are no longer be necessary.
This must be carried out after
replacing the Main Board to apply Enter the product serial number of the printer using the
 Adjustment
Initial settings Initialize Setting settings for the target market, etc. - adjustment program, and write the initial setting information
Program
P. 565
Perform MAC address Setting if onto the Main Board.
necessary.
Input the ID incorporating the Select “Head ID Input” from the Adjustment Program and
 Adjustment
Head ID Input correction values for print head - execute the item. (Auto input) After the ID is input, check that P. 566
Program
production variations. the correct print head ID has been written in the same menu.
Initialize PF  Adjustment
deterioration offset Select “Initialize PF deterioration offset” or “Initialize PW Program
Reset the deterioration correction
- sensor deterioration counter” from the Adjustment Program P. 566
Initialize PW detector counter.  Adjustment
and execute the counter reset.
deterioration counter Program

Confidential
Adjustment /
CR motor heat  Adjustment
-
protection control Program
PF motor heat Measure product variations to set  Adjustment
the appropriate correction values. -
Also, make a pass/fail judgment by Automatically measure the correction value and perform the
IS motor heat protection  Adjustment
calculating whether or not the - operation load check by selecting “XX heat protection control” P. 567
control Program
Adjustment operation load is within the from the Adjustment Program menu and executing the item.
ASF motor heat expected range from the motor  Adjustment
(Mechanical) -
protection control current value. Program
Scanner/ADF motor heat  Adjustment
-
Paper type: Plain paper Select “PE Sensor Check” from the Adjustment Program menu and
To detect PE Detector part failure or  Adjustment
PE Sensor Check Size: A4 execute, and run plain paper through. After the operation has P. 567
assembly failure. Program
Paper source: Paper cassette (1) completed, obtain the data, and measure chattering frequency and time.
Select “Head angular Adjustment Mech” from the menu of the
Paper type: Photo matte paper adjustment program and execute the item to print the
Adjustment Use software to correct the vertical/
Head angular mecha adjustment pattern.  Adjustment
(Print adjustment horizontal tilt occurs when installing Size: A4 P. 568
adjustment Determine the adjustment value from the adjustment pattern Program
by mechanical) the head. Paper source: Rear ASF Assy
based on the judgment criteria and then perform adjustment by
turning the adjustment dial provided on the CR unit.
Select “PTS delay adjustment” from the Adjustment Program
Correct the impact offset caused by Paper type: Plain paper and execute the item to print the adjustment pattern.
a difference in the speed of the  Adjustment
PTS delay adjustment Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the adjustment pattern P. 572
lowspeed part and acceleration/ Program
Paper source: Paper cassette (1) based on the judgment criteria and then enter the adjustment
deceleration part of the CR.
value from the PTS delay adjustment menu.
Select “Head angular adjustment” from the Adjustment
Use software to correct the vertical Paper type: Plain paper Program and execute the item to print the adjustment pattern.
Head angular  Adjustment
or horizontal tilting that occurs at Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the adjustment pattern P. 573
adjustment Program
Adjustment the time of print attachment. Paper source: Paper cassette (1) based on the judgment criteria and then enter the adjustment
(Print adjustment value from the Head angular adjustment menu.
by program) Use software to correct the print Select “Bi-d adjustment” from the Adjustment Program and execute
Paper type: Plain paper
timing for aligning the print position the item to print the adjustment pattern. Determine the adjustment  Adjustment
Bi-d adjustment Size: A4 P. 574
between the outward path and return value from the adjustment pattern based on the judgment criteria Program
path when bidirectional printing. Paper source: Paper cassette (1) and then enter the adjustment value from the Bi-d adjustment menu.
Use software to correct the print Select “Paper Skew adjustment” from the Adjustment Program
timing for aligning the print position Paper type: Plain paper menu and execute the item to print the adjustment pattern.
 Adjustment
Paper Skew adjustment between the outward path and return Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the adjustment pattern P. 575
Program
path when bidirectional printing in Paper source: Paper cassette (1) based on the judgment criteria and then enter the adjustment
band feed mode. value from the Paper Skew adjustment menu.

Confidential
Adjustment /
 PW Adjustment  PW Adjustment
Use software to correct the offset  Paper type: Photo matte paper
due to sensor characteristics and  Size:A4 Select “PW / 1st Dot adjustment” from the Adjustment
attachment variations.  Paper source: Rear ASF Assy Program and execute the item to print the adjustment pattern.  Adjustment
PW / 1st Dot adjustment  1st Dot Adjustment  1st Dot Adjustment Determine the adjustment value from the adjustment pattern Program P. 576
Use software to correct the print  Paper type: Plain paper based on the judgment criteria and then enter the adjustment  Scale
timing so that the main scanning  Size:A4 value from the PW / 1st Dot adjustment menu.
direction print start position  Paper source: Paper cassette (1)
Adjustment becomes the target value. Rear ASF Assy
(Print adjustment Select “PF/EJ adjustment” from the Adjustment Program menu
by program) Use software to correct variations in Paper type: Plain paper
and execute the item to print the adjustment pattern. Determine
paper feed accuracy due to
PF/EJ adjustment Size: A4 the adjustment value from the adjustment pattern based on the - P. 577
mechanical variations and media
Paper source: Paper cassette (1) judgment criteria and then enter the adjustment value from the
transportation characteristics.
PF/EJ adjustment menu.
Select “PF Band adjustment” from the Adjustment Program menu and
Correct the paper feed error that Paper type: Plain paper execute the item to print the adjustment pattern. Determine the
occurs due to mechanical variations
PF Band adjustment Size: A4 adjustment value from the adjustment pattern based on the judgment - P. 578
or media feed characteristics in band
Paper source: Paper cassette (1) criteria and then enter the adjustment value from the PF Band
feed mode.
adjustment menu.
Use software to correct the paper Paper type: Plain paper Select “PE adjustment” from the Adjustment Program menu
detection position offset caused by  Adjustment
PE adjustment Size: A4 and execute, and run plain paper through. Correct in software P. 579
variations in the PE sensor attachment Program
Paper source: Paper cassette (1) paper errors in detected position.
position and print head position.
Corrects CR stop position errors, and
errors at APG switching operations
Obtain the APG Cam and Carriage connection location and
resulting from different parts sizes or  Adjustment
APG offset adjustment - adjust the target position for APG switching, and at that time P. 579
problems with assembly, and stops Program
record the adjustment value in the EEPROM.
correctly on the flat parts of cams
Adjustment during APG switching.
(Program) Check that an abnormal signal that will
Select “Nozzle Noise Check” from the Adjustment Program
cause a Nozzle diagnostic function  Adjustment
Nozzle Noise Check - menu and execute the item. The judgment results are displayed P. 579
problem is not occurring as a result of a Program
on the Adjustment Program.
part failure or poor assembling.
Set the rank for setting the optimal Select “Nozzle Rank Categorize” from the Adjustment
judgment threshold value of each Program menu and execute the item. Measure the optimum  Adjustment
Nozzle Rank Categorize - P. 580
nozzle to ensure Nozzle diagnostic judgment threshold value of each nozzle, and record it in Program
function detection accuracy. EEPROM.
Nozzle Detect Move Check that Nozzle diagnostic Select “Nozzle Detect Move Check” from the Adjustment  Adjustment
- P. 581
Check function is operating normally. Program menu and execute the item. Program

Confidential
Adjustment /
Run this cleaning when dots missing Paper type: Plain paper Perform a head cleaning using the adjustment program, and
 Adjustment
Head Cleaning is observed on an adjustment pattern Size: A4 print a nozzle check pattern to see if all the nozzles fire ink -
Program
printed by the adjustment program. Paper source: Paper cassette (1) properly.
Discharges the ink inside the ink
Select “Ink Eject” from the Adjustment Program menu and  Adjustment
Ink Eject supply path when removing the - -
execute it. Program
printhead and ink supply path.
Fill the print head and ink channels Select “Ink Charge” from the Adjustment Program menu and  Adjustment
Ink Charge - -
with ink to enable printing. execute it. Program
Select Temperature and Humidity Sensor Check" from the
Check that the temperature and　
Temperature and Adjustment Program and execute the item, and then determine  Adjustment
humidity sensors are operating　 - -
Humidity Sensor Check whether or not the sensor operation is normal or abnormal Program
normally.
based on the displayed temperature and humidity information.
Maintenance
Touch Panel Check that optical touch panel LED Select “Touch Panel confirmation” from the Adjustment  Adjustment
- -
confirmation levels are within standards. Program menu and execute it. Program
Select “CR Unlock” from the Adjustment Program menu and  Adjustment
CR Unlock Unlock the CR Unit. - -
execute it. Program
After repairs, reset the error history,
Preparation for Select “Preparation for shipment” from the Adjustment  Adjustment
and as necessary select cleaning - -
shipment Program menu and execute it. Program
when the printer is next turned on.
Paper type: Plain paper, Photo
Use this to check if the all matte paper
Select “Final check pattern print” from the Adjustment  Adjustment
Final check pattern print adjustments have been properly Size:A4 -
Program menu and execute it. Program
made. Paper source: Paper cassette (1)
Rear ASF Assy

Confidential
7.2 Required Adjustments

The following table lists the required adjustment items depending upon the parts being  Meaning of the marks used in the tables on the next pages are
repaired or replaced. Find the part(s) you removed or replaced, and check which C H E C K
P O IN T as follows.
adjustment(s) must be carried out.
• ◯ : Required only when replacing
 After all required adjustments are complete, use the “Final • ◎ : Required when removing and/or replacing
check pattern print” function to print all adjustment patterns • - : No adjustment is required
for final check. If you find a problem with the printout  If there are multiple adjustment items for a replaced part, be
patterns, carry out the adjustment again. sure to carry them out in the priority order indicated in the
 When replacing the Main Board and the Printer Mechanism at table.
the same time, the adjustment should be made after
performing the initial setting.
Table 7-1. Adjustment Correspondence Table
Temperature and Humidity

Relevant parts
(EEPROM Copy OK)
(EEPROM Copy NG)
Printer Mechanism
Power Supply Assy
Main Board Assy
Main Board Assy
Ink Supply Tube
Inksystem Assy
Rear ASF Assy
ADF/SCN Unit
Priority order
Panel Assy
RIPS Unit
Printhead
Rear Unit
CR Unit
Adjustment item
Sensor
1 PG Adjustment - - - - - - - - ◎ - - ◎ - - ◎
2 Leak Check - - - - - - - ◎ ◎ - - - - - -
3 EEPROM data copy - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - -
4 Initialize Setting - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - -
5 Head ID Input - - - - - - ○ - ○ - - - - - -
6 Initialize PF deterioration offset - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - ◎
7 Initialize PW detector deterioration counter - - - - - - ○ - - - - ○ - - ◎
8 CR motor heat protection control - - - - - - ○ - - - ○ - - - ◎
9 PF motor heat protection control - - - - - - ○ - - - ○ - - - ◎
10 IS motor heat protection control - - - - - - ○ - - ○ ○ - - - ◎
11 ASF motor heat protection control - - - - - - ○ - - - ○ - - - ◎
12 APG offset adjustment - - - - - - ○ - - - - ○ - - ◎
13 Temperature and Humidity Sensor Check - - - ◎ - - ○ - - - - - - ○ -
Adjustment Required Adjustments 557

Confidential
Table 7-1. Adjustment Correspondence Table
Temperature and Humidity

Relevant parts
(EEPROM Copy OK)
(EEPROM Copy NG)
Printer Mechanism
Power Supply Assy
Main Board Assy
Main Board Assy
Ink Supply Tube
Inksystem Assy
Rear ASF Assy
ADF/SCN Unit
Priority order
Panel Assy
RIPS Unit
Printhead
Rear Unit
CR Unit
Adjustment item
Sensor
14 Ink Discharge - - - ◎ - - - ◎ ◎ - - - - - -
15 Ink Charge - - - ◎ - - - ◎ ◎ - - - - - -
16 Nozzle Noise Check - - - - - ○ ○ - ○ - - - - - -
17 Nozzle Rank Categorise - - - - - ○ ○ - ○ - - - - - -
18 Nozzle Detect Move Check - - - - - ○ ○ - ○ - - - - - -
19 PE Sensor Check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎
20 Head angular mecha adjustment - - - - - - - - ◎ - - ◎ - - ◎
21 PTS delay adjustment - - - - - - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ - - ◎
22 Head angular adjustment - - - - - - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ - - ◎
23 Bi-d adjustment - - - - - - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ - - ◎
24 Paper Skew adjustment - - - - - - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ - - ◎
25 PW adjustment - ○ - - ○ - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ ○ - ◎
26 1st Dot adjustment Rear ASF - ○ - - - - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ ○ - ◎
Front ASF - - - - ○ - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ ○ - ◎
27 PE adjustment Rear ASF - ○ - - - - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ ○ - ◎
Front ASF - - - - ○ - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ ○ - ◎
28 PF/EJ adjustment - - - - - - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ ○ - ◎
29 PF Band adjustment - - - - - - ○ - ◎ - - ◎ ○ - ◎
30 Scanner/ADF motor heat protection control - - ○ - - - ○ - - - ○ - - - -
31 Touch Panel confirmation ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
32 Final check pattern print - ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎
Adjustment Required Adjustments 558

Confidential
7.3 Adjustment and Inspection Details  Preparing the thickness gauge
 The Print Head of this printer has an integral structure of

7.3.1 Mechanical Adjustments and Inspections the Printhead Cover and Printhead nozzle surface.
Therefore, if the thickness gauge touches the nozzle
PG ADJUSTMENT surface in the same way as performed in the traditional
 The standard range of the PG is as follows: procedure, the nozzle surface may be damaged. When
C H E C K
P O IN T checking the platen gap, make sure to apply Teflon tape
• Standard: 1.60 ± 0.1 mm
(thickness: 0.08 mm) on all the thickness gauges used for
checking the Platen Gap in advance.
 Use commercially available Teflon tape of 0.08 mm in
 Tools thickness.
 Thickness gauges for PG check  When applying Teflon tape on the thickness gauges, make
 Teflon tape (part code: 1684353) sure no bubbles or foreign material remain under the
tape.
Bubbles Foreign materials
Adjustment Adjustment and Inspection Details 559

Confidential
 Application procedure of Teflon tape

1. Clean the surfaces of the thickness gauge by using alcohol, and make sure
no dirt or contamination remains on the surfaces.
2. Apply Teflon tape on the thickness gauge as shown below.
Teflon tape
Fold the tape at the edge and trim it at the center in the
thickness direction.
Thickness gauge
Figure 7-1. Preparing Thickness Gauge (1)

Teflon tape
3. Fold the excess portions of Teflon tape along the edges of the thickness Thickness gauge
gauge, and trim the portions at about the center in the thickness direction
of the sides.
Before trimming
C H E C K When trimming the Teflon tape, the teflon tape can be easily cut out
P O IN T by guiding the half thickness gauge.
After trimming
 Make sure to wear the heavy gloves to prevent the cutter

from cutting the hand when trimming the Teflon tape.
Figure 7-2. Preparing Thickness Gauge (2)
 When trimming, cut in the opposite direction, away from
the hand holding the gauge.
4. Make sure any tears or burrs on the applied Teflon tape, then the
preparation of thickness gauges is complete.

Confidential
 PG adjustment procedure 2. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer.

3. Place the thickness gauge (1.42 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape)
When performing the PG adjustment, make sure of the following. at position A shown in Figure 7-4.
 Move the CR Unit by pulling the CR timing belt.
 Be careful not to damage the nozzle surface of the Full digit side HP side
Printhead with the thickness gauge.
 When make the Printhead touch the thickness gauge, be
careful not to let the Printhead run onto the gauge.
B A
1. Loosen the two fixing screws of the PG adjustment cam positioned on the left
and right, and the four fixing screws of the CR guide frame.
Full digit side Left PG adjustment Right PG HP side

cam adjustment cam
PG: Small PG: Small
PG: Large PG: Large
Thickness gauge
Figure 7-4. Placement of Thickness Gauge
Figure 7-3. PG Adjustment Cam

Confidential
4. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the CR
Unit touches the thickness gauge.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: Proceed to step 5.
• If touches the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the
procedure below.
4-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer.
4-2.Move the PG adjustment cam on the right side by one notch in the “+”
direction.
4-3. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not
the carriage touches the thickness gauge.
• If touches the thickness gauge, repeat the work of Step 4-1 to Step 4-3
until the CR Unit does not touch the thickness gauge.
at position B shown in Figure 7-4.
•Even for the Full digit side, follow the same procedure to adjust the PG
adjustment cam on the left side until the CR Unit is no longer in contact
with the thickness gauge.
at position A shown in Figure 7-4.
7. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the
carriage touches the thickness gauge.
• If touches the thickness gauge: Proceed to step 8.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the
procedure below.
7-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer.
7-2.Move the PG adjustment cam on the right side by one notch in the “-”
direction.
7-3.Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not
the CR Unit touches the thickness gauge.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge, repeat the work of Step 7-1 to
Step 7-3 until the CR Unit touches the thickness gauge.
at position B shown in Figure 7-4.
•Even for the Full digit side, follow the same procedure to adjust the PG
adjustment cam on the left side until the CR Unit comes in contact with the
thickness gauge.
9. Tighten the two fixing screws of the PG adjustment cam positioned on the left
and right, and the four fixing screws of the CR guide frame.

Confidential
INK LEAK CHECK 2. Check the ink adherence state on the cloudy surface of the jigs to determine
whether or not there is an ink leak.
An ink leak check is required when disconnecting the Ink Supply Tube from the
Printhead.
 Judgment criterion of leak check
Check whether or not ink is adhered at a position of 2 mm or more from the
The judgment method of the ink leak check is described below. leading edge of the cloudy surface of the jigs. (Consider the result to be a fail
if any of the jigs for the leak check does not pass the check.)
C H E C K The jigs for the leak check (leak tester sheet front/rear) need to be
P O IN T attached during the part replacement work. For the procedure to • Pass (no ink leak)
attach the jigs, refer to " Printhead (p. 403)" and " Ink Supply When ink adherence is less than 2 mm from the leading edge of the jig
Tube (p. 398)".
• Fail (ink leak)
When ink adherence is 2 mm or more from the leading edge of the jig
 Leak check procedure
2mm
1. Pull out the jigs for the leak check.
Jig
Jig (Leak tester sheet rear) Jig (Leak tester sheet front)
Leading edge
Cloudy surface
NG OK
Figure 7-6. Judgment Criterion of Leak Check
C H E C K If the result is determined to be a fail (ink leak), refer to

Figure 7-5. Leak Check Procedure (1)
P O IN T “Printhead” (p. 403) and perform the ink leak check again.

Confidential
7.3.2 Software Adjustments and Inspections 4. Turn the printer off, and replace the Main Board Assy with a new one.
(For information on how to replace the Main Board Assy, see " Main Board Assy
7.3.2.1 Initial settings (p. 328)")
5. Connect the printer and PC, and turn the printer on.
EEPROM DATA COPY
6. Press the Restore button on the EEPROM Data Copy menu to restore the data.
1. Start the Adjustment Program.
2. Select the “EEPROM Data Copy” from menu of adjustment program.
3. Make sure a check mark has been placed for items that require data copy, and then
press the Backup button.
Figure 7-8. EEPROM Data Copy screen (2)
Figure 7-7. EEPROM Data Copy screen (1)

Confidential
INITIAL SETTINGS 4. Enter the product serial No. into the Product Serial No. (10 digits) entry field.
5. Enter the MAC address into the MAC Address entry field.
C H E C K Execute this function only when the EEPROM backup fails (backup
P O IN T cannot be performed). 6. Press the Perform button to execute the initialize the Main Board Assy.
1. After replacing the Main Board Assy, connect the printer and PC, and then turn the
printer on.
2. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “Initial Settings”.
3. In the Initial Settings menu, make sure a check mark has been placed for the
following items.
 EEPROM data initial check
 Product Serial No. (10 digits) **********
 MAC Address ** ** **
Figure 7-10. Initial settings screen (2)
Figure 7-9. Initial settings screen (1)

Confidential
HEAD ID INPUT INITIALIZE PF DETERIORATION OFFSET
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “Head ID Input”. 1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “Initialize PF deterioration offset”.
2. Press the Auto input button, and then enter the head ID. 2. Press the Initialization button, and initialize the concerned counter.
Figure 7-11. Head ID Input screen Figure 7-12. Initialize PF deterioration offset screen
C H E C K  If you press the Check button, you can check the head ID that
P O IN T has been currently entered.
By comparing the values before input and after input, it can be
checked if the head ID has been written correctly.
 If Head ID Input cannot be performed, head failure occurs.
Therefore, replace the Printhead with a new part.

Confidential
7.3.2.2 Adjustment (Mechanical) PE DETECTOR CONFIRMATION
MOTOR HEAT PROTECTION CONTROL  Paper and feed tray
 Target adjustment  Paper size: A4
 CR motor heat protection control  Paper type: Plain paper
 PF motor heat protection control  Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette 1st
 IS motor heat protection control  Adjustment Procedure

1. Load paper into the Paper Cassette 1st.
 ASF motor heat protection control
2. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “PE Detector confirmation”.
 Scanner/ADF motor heat protection control 3. Press the Perform button to execute “PE Detector confirmation”.
 Adjustment Procedure
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select the target adjustment item.
2. Place a check mark for the replaced component, press the Perform button, and
then execute motor heat protection control.
Figure 7-14. PE Detector confirmation screen
C H E C K If the check results are NG, check the installation state of the PE
P O IN T Lever and PE Sensor.
Figure 7-13. Adjustment screen (E.g. PF motor heat protection control)

Confidential
7.3.2.3 Adjustment (Print Adjustment by Mechanical)  Judgment

Make adjustments so that the spacing between the pattern lines when the
HEAD ANGULAR MECHA ADJUSTMENT
adjustment value is “0” becomes equal.
 Paper and feed tray  Preparation
 Paper size: A4
Head angular mecha adjustment must be performed when the ADF/SCN Unit has
 Paper type: Photo matte paper been opened.
 Paper feed tray: Rear ASF Unit Therefore, in order to set the ADF/SCN Open Sensor to the closed state, secure it
 Adjustment pattern with tape.
ADF/SCN Open Sensor
Tape
Figure 7-16. Preparation
Figure 7-15. Head angular mecha adjustment pattern

Confidential
 Procedure Flowchart  Method of the Head Angular Adjustment

1. Perform preparatory work. (p. 568)
Start the adjustment
2. Start the Adjustment Program, and select the “Head angular mecha adjustment”.
3. Load specified paper into the specified paper feed tray.
Start the printer. Start the printer, and print
the adjustment pattern. 4. Press the Print button to print the adjustment pattern.
Print the adjustment

pattern from Adjustment
program.
Yes
Confirm the adjustment
pattern Line space is
Check the adjustment equal?
pattern, and forecast the
adjustment value when the No
line space becomes equal.
Confirm the misalignment
direction. Adjustment is finished.
Release the Carriage Lock
and move the Carriage
unit to the center position.
Release the Carriage Lock
and move the Carriage
unit to the center position.
Loosen the screw by 90°.
Rotate the adjustment dial Loosen the screw by 90°.

by forecast value, and
tighten the screws.
Move the Adjustment dial
for 1 step to the
misalignment direction.
Figure 7-18. Head angular mecha adjustment screen
Tighten the screws.
Figure 7-17. Head angular mecha adjustment procedure flowchart

Confidential
5. Check the adjustment pattern, and forecast the adjustment value when the gap 6. Turn the printer off, and turn the Ink System gear by hand as shown below to
between the lines is equal. release the CR lock, moving the Carriage to the center position.
<OK>
Present adjusted
value
Gear
Figure 7-20. Releasing the CR lock

7. Turn the screws (×3) holding the Print Head counter clockwise by 90° to loosen,
and move the Carriage Unit's Head Angular Adjustment dial in accordance with
the forecast adjustment value from Step 5.
Direction Direction
<NG> of “+” of “-”
Figure 7-19. Head angular mecha adjustment (1)
Head Angular
Adjustment dial
Figure 7-21. Head angular mecha adjustment (2)

Confidential
8. Tighten the screw(x3) and move the CR Assy to the home position.
 When was carried out head angular mecha adjustment, make
9. Turn the printer on again, and print the adjustment pattern. sure confirm the operation of the cap of the ink system by the
following procedure.
10. Check the present adjusted value on the adjustment pattern, check if the line
If the cap does not return to original position, make sure to
spacing is equal. replace the Ink System Assy. because it can not be performed
 If the line spacing is equal: The adjustment is completed. accurately capping, and printing failure occurs.
1. Push the Cap to rear side, and confirm to return to original
 If the line spacing is not equal: Check the misalignment direction (“+” position.
direction/“-” direction). Then go to Step 11.
11. Carry out Step 6 and Step 7, and move the Adjustment dial 1 notch in the direction
confirmed in Step 10.
12. Tighten the screws, and repeat Step 9 through Step 12 until the gap between the
lines is equal.
Cap
Figure 7-22. Operation check of the Cap (1)

2. Push the rear of the cap to the home position, and confirm to
return to original position.
Cap
Figure 7-23. Operation check of the Cap (2)

Confidential
7.3.2.4 Adjustment (Print Adjustment by Program)  Judgment

Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and right
PTS DELAY ADJUSTMENT
patterns.
 Paper and feed tray  Adjustment procedure
 Paper size: A4 1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “PTS delay adjustment”.
 Paper type: Plain paper 2. Load specified paper into the paper feed tray.
3. Press the Print button to print the adjustment pattern.
 Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette1st
4. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the
 Adjustment pattern judgment procedure.
5. Enter the adjustment value.
6. Check that an adjustment value is entered, press the Input button, and save the
adjustment value in the printer.
C H E C K If there is no pattern satisfying the judgment method among the

P O IN T adjustment patterns, there is a pattern satisfying the judgment
method outside the scope of pattern printing. Therefore, select the
best pattern and enter the adjustment value, following which again
print the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value.
Figure 7-24. PTS delay adjustment pattern

Confidential
HEAD ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT  Judgment
 Paper and feed tray From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and below
lines are the straightest.
 Paper size: A4
 Adjustment procedure
 Paper type: Plain paper
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “Head angular adjustment”.
 Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette 1st 2. Load specified paper into the paper feed tray.
 Adjustment pattern 3. Press the Print button to print the adjustment pattern.
judgment procedure.

Figure 7-25. Head angular adjustment pattern

Confidential
BI-D ADJUSTMENT  Judgment
 Paper and feed tray Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and right
patterns.
 Paper size: A4
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select Bi-d adjustment”.
 Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette 1st 2. Load paper into the specified paper feed tray.
judgment procedure.

Figure 7-26. Bi-d adjustment pattern

Confidential
PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT  Judgment
 Paper and feed tray From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and below
lines are the straightest.
 Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Plain Paper
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “Paper Skew adjustment”.
 Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette 1st 2. Load paper into the specified paper feed tray.
judgment procedure.

Figure 7-27. Paper Skew adjustment pattern

Confidential
PW / 1ST DOT ADJUSTMENT  Judgment

 PW adjustment:
 Paper and feed tray From the stepped patterns printed on the bottom, top, left, and right edges of
 Paper size: A4 the paper, select the numerical value that is 5 mm from the edge of the paper
for each of them.
 Paper type: Plain paper (1st Dot adjustment)
Photo matte paper (PW adjustment)  1st Dot adjustment:
Select the value at the location of the misaligned pattern and straight lines
 Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette 1st, Rear ASF Assy printed on the left of the paper.
 Adjustment pattern  Adjustment procedure
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “PW / 1st Dot adjustment”.
2. Load specified paper into the paper feed tray.
3. Press the Print button to print the adjustment pattern.
judgment procedure.

Figure 7-28. PW / 1st Dot adjustment pattern

Confidential
PF/EJ ADJUSTMENT  Judgment
 Paper and feed tray Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper and
lower blocks and the least white bands.
 Paper size: A4
 Paper type: Photo matte paper
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “PF/EJ adjustment”.
judgment procedure.

Figure 7-29. PF/EJ adjustment pattern

Confidential
PF BAND ADJUSTMENT  Judgment
 Paper and feed tray Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper and
lower blocks and the least white bands.
 Paper size: A4
1. Start the Adjustment Program. and select “PF Band adjustment”.
judgment procedure.

Figure 7-30. PF Band adjustment pattern

Confidential
7.3.2.5 Adjustment (Program) NOZZLE NOISE CHECK
PE ADJUSTMENT  Adjustment procedure

1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “Nozzle Noise Check”.
 Paper and feed tray
2. Press the Perform button to execute the “Nozzle Noise Check”.
 Paper size: A4
 Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette 1st
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “PE adjustment”.
2. Load specified paper into the paper feed tray.
3. Press the Perform button to execute “PE adjustment”.
The adjustment results are automatically saved in the printer.
APG OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “APG offset adjustment”.
2. Press the Perform button to execute the “APG offset adjustment”.
Figure 7-31. Nozzle Noise Check screen

3. After the check ends, the check results are displayed on the Adjustment Program.
Figure 7-32. Check result screen
C H E C K If the results of nozzle noise check are NG, the possibility of

P O IN T improper assembly is high. Therefore, check the assembly state of
the FFC of the main board from the Printhead.

Confidential
NOZZLE RANK CATEGORIZE 3. If you press the OK button, the nozzle check pattern is printed, and the
following message is displayed.
This adjustment must be performed when all nozzles are in the 4. Check the nozzle check pattern, make sure all nozzles are discharging
normal discharge state. Therefore before adjustment, make sure all properly, and then press the Yes button.
nozzles are discharging properly.
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “Nozzle Rank Categorize”.
2. If you press the Execute button, a paper set message is displayed as shown
below.
Figure 7-34. Nozzle check screen
C H E C K If nozzles that are not discharging properly are found in the nozzle
P O IN T check pattern confirmation results, the nozzle rank categorization
operation will not be performed properly. Therefore, press the No
button.
Perform head cleaning, make sure all nozzle are discharging
properly, and then perform the nozzle rank categorization
operation again.
5. The nozzle rank categorization operation is executed, the nozzle check pattern
is printed again, and the message shown in Figure 7-34 is displayed again.
6. Make sure there are no errors in the nozzle check pattern, and the press the
Yes button.
7. The nozzle rank categorization operation execution results are displayed.
C H E C K If the nozzle rank categorization operation results are NG, a nozzle

P O IN T that is not discharging properly may be present. Perform head
cleaning, make sure all nozzle are discharging properly, and then
Figure 7-33. Nozzle Rank Categorize screen
perform the nozzle rank categorization operation again.

Confidential
NOZZLE DETECT MOVE CHECK C H E C K If the nozzle detection operation confirmation results are NG, a
P O IN T nozzle that is not discharging properly may be present. Perform
This adjustment must be performed when all nozzles are in the head cleaning, make sure all nozzle are discharging properly, and
normal discharge state. Therefore before adjustment, make sure all then perform the nozzle detection operation confirmation again.
nozzles are discharging properly.
1. Start the Adjustment Program, and select “Nozzle Detect Move Check”.
2. Press the Perform button to execute “Nozzle Detect Move Check”.
Figure 7-36. Nozzle Detect Move Check screen

3. The nozzle detection operation confirmation results are displayed.

Confidential
CHAPTER
8
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Confidential
8.1 Cleaning INKSYSTEM ASSY (WIPER AND CAP)
Excepting the Print Head, there is no parts or components that need to be cleaned on a  Tools
regular basis. Clean the printer as need arises. When cleaning, make sure to observe the  Pure water
methods and cautions described below.
 Polyester swab (code: 1709718)
8.1.1 Cleaning Method  Cleaning procedure
 Do not wipe transparent parts with a cloth moistened with
1. Remove the Rear Cover (Back) (p.245), Ink Eject Cover (p.242), Housing
alcohol or diluted alcohol. Doing so may make the
transparent parts cloudy. Right (p.254).
 When wiping paper dust off the LD Roller/Pickup Roller, 2. Unlock the CR Unit.
do not wipe against the grain of the roller surface. (for more detail, refer to ' 6.2.2.1 Unlocking the CR Unit' p.235))
EXTERIOR PARTS SUCH AS HOUSING 3. Move the CR Unit in the middle of the printer manually.
Wipe the surface using a soft clean cloth moistened with water. Use of an unwoven
cloth is recommended for coated or transparent part to prevent damaging the surface.
INSIDE THE PRINTER

Use a vacuum cleaner for removing paper dust.
CR Unit
RUBBER OR PLASTIC ROLLERS IN THE PAPER FEED

MECHANISM SUCH AS LD ROLLER/PICKUP ROLLER
If paper dust adhered to the roller surface drops the frictional force and causes paper
feed problems, moisten a cloth with water and wring the water out, then wipe the dust
off the roller using the cloth.
SCANNER GLASS
Wipe the scanner glass using a soft clean cloth.
When oil stain or stubborn stains are attached, clean with a small amount of glass
cleaner attached to a soft cloth.
Figure 8-1. Moving the CR Unit
Maintenance/inspection Cleaning 583

Confidential
4. Rotate the gear of the Inksystem Assy in the direction of the arrow to move 5. Clean the wiper and the cap part using the Polyester swab moistened with
the wiper to wiping position. pure water.
 Cleaning the wiper
Wiper Wiper Clean the top end and right side of the Wiper by moving the Polyester swab
in the direction of the arrows as shown in the figure below.
Top
Wiper
Right
Wiper
Inksystem Assy
Figure 8-3. Cleaning the Wiper
 If the Polyester swab is moved in a direction other than

that indicated by the arrows in the figure above, the
Wiper may shift. Therefore, always be sure to move it in
Gear
the direction of the arrows.
 Be very careful when cleaning the Wiper as it is made of
Figure 8-2. Preparation of Cleaning the Wiper rubber and may be easily damaged.

Confidential
 Cleaning the Cap part 6. After cleaning the wiper and cap part is completed, rotate the gear of the
Inksystem Assy in the direction of the arrow to retract the wiper.
Clean the Cap surface by moving the Polyester swab in the direction of the
arrows as shown in the figure below.
Wiper Wiper
Figure 8-4. Cleaning the Cap part
Do not forcibly press the Polyester swab as the Cap surface

may be easily damaged.
Inksystem Assy
Gear
Figure 8-5. Retracting the Wiper

Confidential
7. Move the CR Unit to the home position manually. 8. Rotate the gear of the Inksystem Assy counterclockwise to lock the CR
Unit.
CR Unit
Figure 8-6. Moving CR Unit

Inksystem Assy
If the CR Unit is moved to the home position without storing
the Wiper, the nozzle of the Printhead may collide against the
Wiper and damage it. Therefore, make sure the Wiper has
been stored.
Gear
Figure 8-7. CR Lock

Confidential
8.2 Lubrication
The type and amount of the grease used to lubricate the printer parts aredetermined
based on the results of the internal evaluations. Therefore, refer to "8.2.1 Lubrication
Points and Instructions" (p. 588) for the repairing procedures below, and apply the
specified type and amount of the grease to the specified part of the printer mechanism.
 Grease
Type Name EPSON Part Code Supplier
Grease G-71 1304682 EPSON

 Tools
Name Availability EPSON Part Code
Injector O* ---
Brush O* ---
Note: Use tools whose specifications are specified in "8.2.1 Lubrication Points and
Instructions" (p.588).
Maintenance/inspection Lubrication 587

Confidential
8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions <Lubrication Point>

EJ Roller Application point
EJ Roller
<Lubrication Point>
PF Roller <Type>
PF Roller
G-97
<Type>
G-97 <Application Amount>
Appropriate amount
<Application Amount>
1 mm × 5 mm (3mg) <Remarks>
Apply with injector.
<Remarks>
After application, spread
Apply with injector. grease by rotating EJ
After application, spread 2 mm Roller one time.
grease by rotating PF 2 mm
Roller one time.
Figure 8-10. Lubrication of EJ Roller

Application point Main Frame
<Lubrication Point>
Contact point with CR
Figure 8-8. Lubrication of PF Roller Unit on Main Frame and
on CR Guide Frame (Front
side and bottom side)
<Lubrication Point>
PF Pulley
PF Pulley <Type>
1 G-97
<Type>
G-97 <Application Amount>
CR Gudie 1. 0.7g (2 line × 300 mm)
Frame 2. 0.3g (1 line × 300 mm)
1 mm × 2 mm (two points)
<Remarks>
<Remarks>
 Apply with injector. After
application, spread by
2
moving CR Unit to the
right and to the left (from
0-digit side to 80-digit
side) three times slowly.
 If clumps of grease are
Application point Application point
seen on both sides of the
frame, remove them.
Figure 8-9. Lubrication of PF Pulley
Figure 8-11. Lubrication of contact point with CR Unit (1)

Confidential
Main Frame <Lubrication Point> <Lubrication Point>

CR Driven Pulley
Contact point with CR Unit CR Driven Pulley
on Main Frame and on CR
<Type>
Guide Frame (Back side)
G-71
<Type>
G-97
Appropriate amount
<Remarks>
1. 0.7g (2 line × 300 mm)
2. 0.3g (1 line × 300 mm)
1 Take care that grease does
<Remarks> not adhere to the rotating
 Apply with injector. After area.
application, spread by
moving CR Unit to the
right and to the left (from Application point
0-digit side to 80-digit
2 side) three times slowly. Figure 8-14. Lubrication of CR Driven Pulley
 If clumps of grease are
seen on both sides of the
Application point <Lubrication Point>
frame, remove them. CR Driven Pulley Holder
CR Driven Pulley Holder
Figure 8-12. Lubrication of contact point with CR Unit (2)
<Type>
G-71
<Lubrication Point>
Contact point between CR
Slider Sub and CR Unit Appropriate amount
(two points)
CR Unit <Type>
<Remarks>
G-97
CR Slider Sub 1 mm × 3 mm (two points)
<Remarks>
Application point
Figure 8-15. Lubrication of CR Driven Pulley Holder(1)
Application point
Figure 8-13. Lubrication of CR Unit

Confidential
<Lubrication Point> <Lubrication Point>

Application point
CR Driven Pulley Holder Contact point between
Paper Guide Front Assy
<Type>
and EJ Roller
G-71
<Type>
1. G-96
1 mm × 1 mm (8 points)
2. G-97
CR Driven Pulley Holder <Remarks>
Paper Guide Front 1. Appropriate amount
Assy 2. 2 mm × 5 mm
1 2 <Remarks>
4 mm 1. Apply with Flux
Dispenser.
Application point 2. Apply with injector.
5 mm
 Rub off excess grease.
Figure 8-16. Lubrication of CR Driven Pulley Holder (2) 3 mm 2 mm
<Lubrication Point> Figure 8-18. Lubrication of Paper Guide Front Assy (2)
Contact point between
1 3 Paper Guide Front Assy
and PF Roller
2
<Type>
G-97
1. 3 mm × 15 mm
2. 1 mm × 15 mm
3. 3 mm × 15 mm
<Remarks>
 Apply with injector.
 Rub off excess grease.
Paper Guide Front Assy Application point
Figure 8-17. Lubrication of Paper Guide Front Assy (1)

Confidential
CHAPTER
9
APPENDIX
Confidential
9.1 Connection Diagram

*1: WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only
*2: WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a only
ADF Relay Board ADF PE Sensor *3: WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a only
ADF*1
ADF DOC Sensor
ADF Motor
ADF Encoder
ADF Solenoid
SCN Motor
SCN Encoder
Scanner*2 CIS Module
Maintenance Box Sensor (CSIC)

Power Supply Board
FAX Board*1 PE Sensor
ADF/SCN Open Sensor*1
Printer Cover Open Sensor*2
CN801 CN606 CN609 CN56 Rear ASF Solenoid
CN55 CN1
CN110 Speaker*1 Rear ASF Paper Detection Sensor
CN601 CN74 CN9 CN44 CN53 Cassette Detection
CN80
CN67 CN66 CN3
Sensor
CN53 CN51 Cassette Paper Detection Sensor
CN612
ASF Motor CN42 CN55 CN52
Panel Board Rear Unit CN10
ASF Encoder CN68 Detection
CN20 CN22 CN54
Sensor
Main Board
CN30
Ethernet CN11 CN31
CN8
CN75 CN73 Wi-Fi CN12
CN34 CN31
USB
CN77 CN72
Board CN2
CN50 CN52 CN2 Printhead CR Encoder

PDL Board*3 PW Sensor
CR Motor Feed Sensor
I/S Encoder
Printer I/S Motor
PF Motor
PF Encoder
Temperature and Humidity Sensor Ink Leak Sensor 4

Ink Pack Sensor C (CSIC)
Front Cover Open Sensor Ink Leak Sensor 3
Decompression Motor Ink Pack Sensor M (CSIC)
CRCM Ink Leak Sensor 1 Ink End Sensor (C, M)
Ink Pack Sensor Y (CSIC) Board
Ink Leak Sensor 2 Ink End Sensor (Bk, Y)
RIPS Unit Ink Pack Sensor Bk (CSIC)

Drawer Connector
ASF Encoder
Jam Cover Detection Sensor
CN6
CN5
Lift Phase Sensor CN4
CN1
Feed Sensor CN7
Cassette Detection Sensor
CN2
Cassette Paper Detection Sensor

CN12 CN13
Hopper Position Sensor
Optional Cassette Unit Lift Motor

ASF Motor
Drawer Connector
Appendix Connection Diagram 592

Confidential
9.2 Part Names Conversion Table ASP Name Name used in This Manual
BOARD ASSY.,SUB,CF24,ASP PF Encoder Board
9.2.1 WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 SCALE,PF,ASP PF Scale
ASP Name Name used in This Manual HOUSING,PICKUP,ASSY Pickup Roller Housing
ADF/SCN UNIT,ASP ADF/SCN Unit HOLDER,RETARD,ES,ASSY Retard Roller
DOCUMENT SUPPORT ADF ASSY ADF Document Support EXTENSION SPRING,1.379,RETARD Retard Extension Spring
COVER,ADF ASSY.,ASP ADF Cover Assy PE ASSY.;IEI PE Assy
PAD,ADF ASSY.,SEC ADF Pad Assy CARRIAGE ASSY.,ASP CR Unit
COVER,REAR,ADF Rear ADF Cover INK SYSTEM,ASSY.,ASP Inksystem Unit
FRAME LD ASSY LD Frame POROUS PAD,CAP,LOWER Porous Pad Cap Lower
COVER,FRONT,ADF,ASP ADF Front Cover FFC HEAD,ASSY.;IEI Head FFC Assy
MAT,COVER,DOCUMENT Document Mat HOLDER,STAR,WHEEL,ASSY.;IEI Star Wheel Unit
HOUSING,UPPER Housing Upper STACKER ASSY Stacker Assy
PANEL ASSY.,CG02,ASP Panel Assy SOLENOID,RASF,ASSY Rear ASF Solenoid
HOUSING,LEFT Housing Left DUPLEX,ASSY.,ASP Rear Unit
BOARD ASSY.,PANEL Main Board SCALE,CR CR Scale

SPEAKER ASSY.;IEI Speaker Assy
HOUSING,RIGHT Housing Right
TUBE,ASSY.,SUPPLY,ASP Ink Supply Tube
COVER,INK EJECT,ASP Ink Eject Cover
SCREW HEAD ASSY Head Screw Assy
HINGE,ASSY.,SC Hinge Assy
RASF,ASSY.,ASP Rear ASF Assy
HARNESS Relay Cable (Panel to Main)
EXTENSION SPRING,11.11 Extension Spring 11.11
HARNESS Relay Cable (Panel to Numpad)
CASSETTE,1st BIN,ASSY.,ASP Paper Cassette 1st Assy
HOUSING,REAR Housing Rear
RIPS UNIT, ASSY.,ASP RIPS Unit
COVER,ASF,CG03,ASP ASF Cover
IS DECOMP PUMP,ASSY.,IEI Decompression Pump Assy
COVER,ASF,FRONT ASF Front Cover
HOUSING,RIPS ASSY.,ASP RIPS Housing
PAPER SUPPORT Paper Guide
COVER,FRONT,RIPS,ASP RIPS Front Cover
BOARD ASSY.,PANEL Numpad Board Assy
TRAY,INK PACK,CL,ASP Ink Pack Tray CL
BOARD ASSY.,MAIN Main Board Assy
TRAY,INK PACK,BK,ASP Ink Pack Tray BK
POWER SUPPLY,ASSY.;B;IEI Power Supply Assy
BOARD ASSY.,SNS CSIC Board
BOARD ASSY.,INTERFACE USB Interface Board
GUIDE,TUBE,INK HOLDER,UPPER Ink Tube Guide Holder
WIRELESS LAN USB MODULE Wireless Lan Module
FOOT Foot
FAX ASSY.;B;IEI Fax Assy
PrintHead,IG238V;ASP Printhead
BOARD ASSY.,SUB Relay Board Assy
Appendix Part Names Conversion Table 593

Confidential
9.2.2 WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a ASP Name Name used in This Manual

TUBE,ASSY.,SUPPLY,ASP Ink Supply Tube
ASP Name Name used in This Manual
SCREW HEAD ASSY Head Screw Assy
PANEL ASSY.,CG05,ASP Panel Assy
RASF,ASSY.,ASP Rear ASF Assy
HOUSING,LEFT Housing Left
EXTENSION SPRING,11.11 Extension Spring 11.11
HOUSING,RIGHT Housing Right
CASSETTE,1st BIN,ASSY.,ASP Paper Cassette 1st Assy
COVER,INK EJECT,ASP Ink Eject Cover
RIPS UNIT, ASSY.,ASP RIPS Unit
HOUSING,REAR Housing Rear
IS DECOMP PUMP,ASSY.,IEI Decompression Pump Assy
COVER,ASF,CG06,ASP ASF Cover
HOUSING,RIPS ASSY.,ASP RIPS Housing
HOUSING,TOP Housing Top
COVER,FRONT,RIPS,ASP RIPS Front Cover
PAPER SUPPORT Paper Guide
TRAY,INK PACK,CL,ASP Ink Pack Tray CL
COVER,PRINTER Printer Cover
TRAY,INK PACK,BK,ASP Ink Pack Tray BK
HOUSING,ASF Housing ASF
BOARD ASSY.,SNS CSIC Board
BOARD ASSY.,MAIN Main Board Assy
GUIDE,TUBE,INK HOLDER,UPPER Ink Tube Guide Holder
POWER SUPPLY,ASSY.;IEI Power Supply Assy
FOOT Foot
WIRELESS LAN USB MODULE Wireless Lan Module
PrintHead,IG238V;ASP Printhead
BOARD ASSY.,SUB Relay Board Assy
BOARD ASSY.,SUB,CF24,ASP PF Encoder Board
SCALE,PF,ASP PF Scale
HOUSING,PICKUP,ASSY Pickup Roller Housing
HOLDER,RETARD,ES,ASSY Retard Roller
EXTENSION SPRING,1.379,RETARD Retard Extension Spring
PE ASSY.;IEI PE Assy
CARRIAGE ASSY.,ASP CR Unit
INK SYSTEM,ASSY.,ASP Inksystem Unit
POROUS PAD,CAP,LOWER Porous Pad Cap Lower
FFC HEAD,ASSY.;IEI Head FFC Assy
HOLDER,STAR,WHEEL,ASSY.;IEI Star Wheel Unit
STACKER ASSY Stacker Assy
SOLENOID,RASF,ASSY Rear ASF Solenoid
DUPLEX,ASSY.,ASP Rear Unit
SCALE,CR CR Scale

Confidential
9.2.3 Optional Cassette Unit

ASP Name Name used in This Manual
CASSETTE,2ND BIN ASSY.,OPT,ASP Paper Cassette 2nd Assy
BOARD ASSY.,MAIN Optional Paper Cassette Main Board Assy
COVER,LEFT,OPT,ASP Optional Paper Cassette Left Cover
COVER,RIGHT,OPT Optional Paper Cassette Right Cover
CAM,SECTOR GEAR,40,HOPPER,OPT Lift Up Sector Gear 40T
SPUR GEAR,30,CASSETTE Lift Up Gear 30T
HOLDER RETARDS,ASSY Retard Roller
EXTENSION SPRING,1.379,RETARD Extension Spring (Retard Roller)
DRAWER CONECTOR 1-1612256-4 Drawer Connector (female)
DRAWER CONECTOR 1-1612257-4 Drawer Connector (male)
BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,ASF ASF Encoder Assy
ROLLER ASSY.,SEPARATE Separation Roller
LEVER,DETECTOR,FE,OPT Paper Feed Detector Lever
ERIBG,4,L/NA E-ring (plastic)
ROLLER ASSY,VERTICAL,OPT Vertical Feed Roller
PHOTO INTERRUPTER Photo Sensor
FOOT Foot
LEVER,PAPER DETECTOR,CASSETTE Cassette Paper Detection Lever
COVER,REAR,OPT,ASSY.,ASP Optional Paper Cassette Rear Cover

Confidential
9.3 Status Sheet Information

The following status sheets can be printed from the printer.
This section explains about each item printed on the status sheets.
 Overview of Status Sheets
 Printer information sheet: printer settings information
 Consumables information sheet: supported model numbers of consumables or periodic replacement parts, and the total number of sheets fed into the printer.
 Usage history sheet: usage history such as the total number of printed pages per function.
 Service status sheet: in addition to the information included in the above three sheets, information required for servicing is also provided.
 Status Sheet Items
 Printer Information Sheet (total pages: 5 sheets)
Item Explanation
Device ID Device ID (product name) is displayed.
Serial Number The serial number of the product is displayed.
MAC Address MAC address of the product is displayed.
Memory Capacity Capacity of the memory inside the product is displayed.
<Hardware> The connection status of the ID card reader is displayed.
Hardware Configuration Card Reader Status
Firmware Version of the firmware is displayed.
Main Firmware Version of the main firmware is displayed.
<Version>
Network Firmware Version of the NW firmware is displayed.
QPIT Version of the QPIT is displayed.
Basic settings Language The current language setting is displayed.
Mute The setting of mute (on/off) is displayed.
Button Press
Error Notice
Receive Completion Notice
<Sound settings> Send Completion Notice
Normal Sound level setting (0 to 10) is displayed.
Print Completion Notice
Ring Tone
Receiver
Sound Type
Appendix Status Sheet Information 596

Confidential
Item Explanation
Sleep timer setting Whether the sleep timer is enabled or not is displayed.
Power Off Timer The Power Off Timer setting is displayed.
USB I/F time out settings are displayed.
USB I/F Timeout Setting
USB Print language settings are displayed.
Printing Language
Network (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only)
Basic settings Auto Error Solver Whether the auto error resolver options are enabled or not is displayed.
Memory Device Whether the external memory setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Memory Device Interface The file sharing setting (which connection way of computers, USB or
File Sharing
network, is allowed to access the external memory) is displayed.
Ink Drying Time The Ink Drying Time when duplex printing is displayed.
PC connection via USB Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
NFC Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper cassette 1 to Paper Size Paper size settings of each of the cassettes are displayed.
Paper cassette 2 Paper Type Paper type settings of each of the cassettes are displayed.
Paper cassette
Paper Size Paper size settings of the MP tray are displayed.
Rear MP tray
Paper Type Paper type settings of the MP tray are displayed.
A4/Letter Auto Switching Whether the auto switching function is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper source
Auto Selection-Copy Paper cassette 1 to paper cassette 2, Rear MP tray
settings Whether the auto paper source selection setting for each of the functions is
Auto Selection-Fax Paper cassette 1 to paper cassette 2, Rear MP tray
enabled or not is displayed.
Auto Selection-Other Paper cassette 1 to paper cassette 2, Rear MP tray
Rear Paper Feed Priority Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper Size Notice Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper Type Notice Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Top Offset
Left Offset
The offset setting (-30 to 30) is displayed.
Top Offset in Back
Print settings Universal Print Settings
Left Offset in Back
Check Paper Width Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Skip Blank Page Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Paper Size Paper size setting is displayed.
Paper Type Paper type setting is displayed.
Orientation The orientation setting (portrait or landscape) is displayed.
Quality The print quality setting (Draft, Standard, or Best) is displayed.
Ink Save Mode Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
<Common settings>
Print Order The print order setting (print from the first page or last page) is displayed.
Number of Copies Standard number of copies (1 to 999) is displayed.
Binding Margin The Binding Margin is displayed.
Auto Paper Ejection Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
2-Sided Printing Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Font Source
Font Number
PDL Print Configuration Pitch
(WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700
only) Height
<PCL Menu> Symbol Set
Form
CR Function
LF Function
Paper Source Assign
Error Sheet Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Coloration The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
<PS3 Menu>
Binary Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
PDF Page Size The PDF paper size setting is displayed.
PCL
<Language Version> PS The version of each of the printer language is displayed.
PDF

Confidential
Item Explanation
Subject (“Scan to Email” only) The subject of email is displayed.
Color The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
File Format File format setting is displayed.
Document Open Password (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Permissions password (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Printing Whether printing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Editing Whether editing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Resolution (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Scan resolution setting is displayed.
2-Sided Whether the 2-sided scanning is enabled or not is displayed.
Binding position of documents (left/top/--- (in case of one-side scanning)) is
Binding Position
displayed.
Scan area Original document size setting is displayed.
Remove shadow Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
<Scan to Email> The frame width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove setting
Surround
<Scan to Network Folder/FTP> is disabled)) is displayed.
Scan settings
<Scan to Memory Device> The center width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove setting
<Scan to Cloud> Center
is disabled)) is displayed.
Remove Punch Holes Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
The erasing setting (left edge/right edge/top edge/bottom edge/--- (in case of
Erasing Position
the remove punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The erasing amount (0 to 20 mm/--- (in case of the remove punch holes setting
Erase Amount
is disabled)) is displayed.
Orientation (Original) The document orientation setting (portrait or landscape) is displayed.
Document Type The quality setting (Text/Text & Image/Photo) is displayed.
Density The density setting (-4 to 4) is displayed.
Filename Prefix (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) File name prefix setting for scanned file is displayed.
Date Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Time of Day Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Compression Ratio (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) The Compression Ratio is displayed.
Attached File Max Size (“Scan to Email” only) The maximum file size that can be attached to an email is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Lock Setting Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Admin Settings
Access Control Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Epson Open Platform Information Version The version is displayed.
(WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700
only) Product key The product key is displayed (“---” is displayed when it is not set).

Confidential
 Supply Status Sheet (total pages: 1 sheets)

Item Explanation
<Version>
Remaining capacity Remaining capacity of ink pack
Black Part Number Model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Serial Number Manufacturer's serial number of the ink pack is displayed.
Cyan Part Number Model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Ink Supply Unit
Supply Status
Magenta Part Number Model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Yellow Part Number Model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Available space Available space in maintenance box
Maintenance Box
Part Number Model number of the maintenance box is displayed.

Confidential
 Usage History Sheet (total pages: 2 sheets)

Item Explanation
Capacity of the memory inside the product is
Memory Capacity
displayed.
<Hardware> The connection status of the ID card reader is
Hardware Configuration
Card Reader Status displayed.
<Version>
The date and time when the printer printed for the first
Usage History First Time Printing
time is displayed.
Total Number of Pages The total number of printed pages is displayed.
The total number of pages printed in monochrome is
Total Number of B&W Pages
displayed.
The total number of pages printed in color is
Total Number of Color Pages
<Sorted by Function> displayed.
The total number of printed 2-sided pages is
Total Number of 2-Sided Printing Pages
displayed.
The total number of printed one-sided pages is
Total Number of 1-Sided Printing Pages
displayed.
Number of Pages
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A5 The total number of printed pages per paper size is
A6/Postcard displayed.
<Sorted by Paper Size>
Detailed count per function (one-sided/2-sided,
(1-sided/2-sided, B&W/Color) B4/Legal monochrome/color) is also displayed for each paper
B5 size.
Envelope
Others

Confidential
Item Explanation
B&W Copy
Color Copy
B&W Fax
Color Fax The total number of printed pages for each of the
<Sorted by Usage>
B&W Print from Computer or Mobile Device purposes is displayed.
Color Print from Computer or Mobile Device
Number of prints B&W Print from Memory Device or Other Functions
Color Print from Memory Device or Other Functions
ESC/P-R
PCL (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only)
The version of each of the printer language is
<Sorted by Printer Language> PS / PDF displayed.
Others
B&W Scan Number of sheets scanned in monochrome.
Scanned page number
Color Scan Number of sheets scanned in color.

Confidential
 Service Status Sheet (total pages: 8 sheets)

Item Explanation
<Version>
Whether the sleep timer is enabled or not is displayed. When enabled,
Sleep Timer
the time period before the product enters sleep mode is also displayed.
Whether the auto power off setting is enabled or not is displayed. When
Basic Settings
Power Off Settings enabled, the time period before the printer automatically turns off is also
displayed.
Ink Drying Time The Ink Drying Time when duplex printing is displayed.
Paper Size Paper size settings of each of the cassettes are displayed.
Cassette 1 to Cassette 2
Paper Source Paper Type Paper type settings of each of the cassettes are displayed.
Paper Cassette
Settings Paper Size Paper size settings of the MP tray are displayed.
MP tray
Paper Type Paper type settings of the MP tray are displayed.
Top Offset
Left Offset
The offset setting (-30 to 30) is displayed.
Top Offset in Back
Print Settings Universal Print Settings
Left Offset in Back
Check Paper Width Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Skip Blank Page Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS Server
Network Settings Secondary DNS Server The network settings are displayed.
DNS Domain Name
Proxy Server Settings
Proxy Server
Proxy Server Port Number
Subject (“Scan to Email” only) The subject of email is displayed.
Color The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
File Format File format setting is displayed.
Document Open Password (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Permissions password (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Printing Whether printing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Editing Whether editing scanned document is permitted or not is displayed.
Resolution (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) Scan resolution setting is displayed.
2-Sided Whether the 2-sided scanning is enabled or not is displayed.
<Scan to Email> Binding position of documents (left/top/--- (in case of one-side

Binding Position
<Scan to Network Folder/FTP> scanning)) is displayed.
Scan settings
<Scan to Memory Device> Scan area Original document size setting is displayed.
<Scan to Cloud>
Remove shadow Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
The frame width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
Surround
setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The center width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
Center
Remove Punch Holes Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
The erasing setting (left edge/right edge/top edge/bottom edge/--- (in
Erasing Position
case of the remove punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
The erasing amount (0 to 20 mm/--- (in case of the remove punch holes
Erase Amount
Orientation (Original) The document orientation setting (portrait or landscape) is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Document Type The quality setting (Text/Text & Image/Photo) is displayed.
Density The density setting (-4 to 4) is displayed.
<Scan to Email> Filename Prefix (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) File name prefix setting for scanned file is displayed.
<Scan to Network Folder/FTP>
Scan settings Date Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
<Scan to Memory Device>
<Scan to Cloud> Time of Day Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Compression Ratio (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) The Compression Ratio is displayed.
Attached File Max Size (“Scan to Email” only) The maximum file size that can be attached to an email is displayed.
The product key is displayed (“---” is displayed when it is not set).
Epson Open Platform Information Product key
Fax Function Whether the fax feature is enabled or not is displayed.
Option Settings Serial Number Always “---” is displayed.
Optional Cassette 1
FW version Firmware version of the option cassettes are displayed.
Part Number Model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Black
Yellow
Ink packs
Supply Status Part Number Model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Magenta
Cyan
Maintenance box Part Number Model number of the maintenance box is displayed.
First Time Printing The data and time the printer printed for the first time are displayed.
Total Number of Pages The total number of pages printed by the printer is displayed.
Usage History
<Sorted by Function> Total Number of B&W Pages The total number of pages printed in monochrome is displayed.
Total Number of Color Pages The total number of pages printed in color is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A5
<Sorted by Paper Size> A6/Postcard The total number of printed pages per paper size is displayed. Detailed
(1-sided/2-sided, B&W/ count per function (one-sided/2-sided, monochrome/color) is also
Color) B4/Legal displayed for each paper size.
B5
Envelope
Other
B&W Print from Computer or
Mobile Device
Color Print from Computer or
Mobile Device
B&W Copy
Usage History Color Copy
<Sorted by Usage> The total number of printed pages for each of the purposes is displayed.
B&W Fax
Color Fax
B&W Print from Memory Device
or Other Functions
Color Print from Memory Device
or Other Functions
The Cumulative number of paper
Other The total number of times a paper jam error occurs is displayed.
jam
Document Table (Number of
pages) The total number of pages scanned on the scanner glass or in the ADF is
Number of Sheets Scanned displayed.
ADF (Number of pages)
ADF (Number of Fed Sheets) The total number of document sheets fed by the ADF is displayed.
Cassette 1 to Cassette 2, Rear MP
Number of Sheets Loaded The total number of printed pages per paper source is displayed.
tray
Ink coverage of print jobs finished before printing this status sheet is
PD1 Level displayed according to the rule below.
L: less than 5%, M: 5% to 20%, H: more than 20%
Coverage Coverage Raito
Ink coverage of the last print job is displayed according to the rule
PD2 Level below.
L: less than 20%, M: 5% to 50%, H: more than 50%

Confidential
Item Explanation
Printer Error
Scanner Error
Status Fax Error Status of the product (error occurring state) is displayed.
Network Error
Other Error

Confidential

WF-C5790Series WF-C5710 ET-8700 WF-C5210 WF-C5290Series A

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WF-C5790Series WF-C5710 ET-8700 WF-C5210 WF-C5290Series A

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Inkjet Printer

Copyright © 2018 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT OUTLINE

CHAPTER 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PRINCIPLES

CHAPTER 5. SERVICE SUPPORT MODE

1.1 Product Summary  Economy and ecology

 High reliability reduces downtime

Product outline Product Summary 12

2.1 Product Hardware Specifications

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 14

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 15

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 16

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 17

2.2 Printing Specifications 2.3 Copying Specifications

Languages Japanese, English

Product Specifications Printing Specifications 18

Item Specification 2.4 ADF Specifications

Product Specifications ADF Specifications (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only) 19

2.5 Scanner Specifications 2.6 Options Specifications

Product Specifications Scanner Specifications (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only) 20

2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications  Fax specifications (WF-C5790/WF-C5790a/WF-C5710/ET-8700 only)

 10BASE-T (IEEE802.3i) Standard: 8 pixels per mm x 3.85 lines per mm

Security protocol TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6 Encoding Monochrome MH, MR, MMR

 WEP (64/128 bit) Document sizes Letter, A4, Legal

Product Specifications Network Specifications/Fax Specifications 21

Figure 3-1. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 23

Table 3-2. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-2. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 24

Table 3-3. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-3. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 25

Table 3-4. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-4. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 26

Table 3-5. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-5. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 27

Table 3-6. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 28

3.1.2 WF-C5210/WF-C5290/WF-C5290a Table 3-7. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-7. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 29

Table 3-8. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-8. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 30

Table 3-9. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-9. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 31

Table 3-10. Name of Each Part

Figure 3-10. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 32

Table 3-11. Name of Each Part

Configuration and operating principles Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 33

3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications

3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors and solenoids)

Figure 3-12. Printer Main Unit (Motors and solenoids)

Figure 3-13. Ink detection and cover detection system sensors

3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (Encoder sensors and PW sensor)

Figure 3-14. Encoder sensors and PW sensor